2007 toyota sienna owners manual

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

i

2007 SIENNA from Oct. ’06 Prod. (OM45437U)

ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331 Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information. The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com Canada www.toyota.ca

2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

This quick reference guide provides you with information on Dynamic Laser Cruise ControlVehicle−to−Vehicle Distance Control Mode. Before operating the system, you should be thoroughly familiarwith it referring to “Dynamic Laser Cruise Control” in Section 1−7 in the Owner’s Manual.

Dynamic Laser Cruise Control OperationThe system’s laser radar sensor detects the reflectors of vehicles and measures the vehicle−to−vehicle distance. The detection range ofthe sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.

If no vehicle is detected ahead of you:

Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph).

If a vehicle is detected ahead of you:

Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance from your vehicleto the vehicle ahead.

If the vehicle ahead is out of the detection range, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed, and yourvehicle resumes fixed−speed cruising.

If the vehicle ahead decelerates abruptly or other vehicles cut in ahead of you, your vehicle may be too close to the vehicle aheadof you. If this occurs, the display flashes and beeps. (Approach warning)

The dynamic laser cruise control should be used on roads in which sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be ensured(such as on freeways).

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 1 −

2007 SIENNA Laser from Oct. ’06 Prod. (OM45440U)

y16121q

Operation Requirements

The selector lever is in the “D” or “4” position.

Even if these requirements are met, the system may notoperate properly under certain conditions such as badweather. See “Owner’s Manual” for details.

See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.

The wipers are not operating at all or operatingintermittently (including the same wiper operationin the “AUTO” position).

Cruising from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph)

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 2 −


Cautions Do not rely too much on dynamic laser cruise control. Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control has its limitations.

Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles. If necessary, depress the brake pedal toensure sufficient distance.

Dynamic laser cruise control is not a co llision−avoidance system.

If necessary, depress the brake pedal to ensure sufficient distance.

Dynamic laser cruise control should not be used in the following conditions:

In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms)

In direct sunlight from the front

Raindrops or snowflakes get in the laser radar sensor glass

On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends

On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow−covered road surfaces)

On steep downhill slopes

Continual acceleration or deceleration (such as on busy traffic)

On roads with steep and short inclines and declines

In any conditions of the above, an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance control may not be attained.

This system is not provided to justify careless driving.

Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles.

The dynamic laser cruise control should not be used when exiting from, or when entering or merging onto a freeway.

When you are following a slower moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect the vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed.

y16078

y16079q

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 3 −


Cautions If other vehicles are driving outside of the laser radar detection range, a delay in the detection of the vehicle cutting in

at short range or detection failure of the motorcycle running on the side of the same lane will occur. In this case, thedynamic laser cruise control system will not function properly.

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead cannot be accurately detected in the following cases:

The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance, which means that the placement of the reflectors is in a higher position.

The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.

The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you are flinging up water or snow.

Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming from the vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you, obscuring your frontview.

Protective film is attached to the reflectors on the vehicle ahead, or reflectors are not installed on the vehicle ahead or aredamaged.

Heavy luggage is loaded on top of your rear seats.

The laser radar sensor automatically detects dirt if dirt is sticking to the sensor glass of your vehicle.

However, in some cases dirt may not be detected. At this time warning display does not operate and an appropriatevehicle−to−vehicle distance cannot be maintained. Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead.

Dynamic laser cruise control does not operate when the vehicle is at a stop or is driving very slowly.

Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the end of the line in heavy traffic or at the toll gate.

Turn off the main switch when dynamic laser cruise control is not in use.

The approach warning may not turn on even if the vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at almost the same speed.

The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than yours. (The distance between the vehicles will become longer.)

The accelerator pedal is depressed, immediately after the release of the accelerator pedal or immediately after the speedsetting.

Depending on the road configuration (curved roads) or your vehicle condition (steering wheel maneuvering, position inthe lane), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding objects will be detected.


SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 4 −


y16120q

Warning DisplayIf dynamic laser cruise control detects bad weather or malfunction of the system, the master warning light comes on and the alarmsounds, and one of the warning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3” will appear on the display.

If a warning message appears on the display, take the appropriate measure referring to Section 1−7, “Owner’s Manual”.

Approach WarningDynamic laser cruise control and approach warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead isat a stop or is driving much slower than your vehicle. Use caution for the vehicle at the endof the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate, the vehicle at a stop and the very slow vehicle.

If your vehicle approaches the vehicle ahead because of insufficient braking when the vehicle aheaddecelerates abruptly or when another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, the display flashes and beeps.Depress the brake pedal to slow down, ensuring sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance.

Warning code Conditions

E1

E2

E3∗

Laser radar sensor glass is dirty

Wipers are operating at high or low speeds

Direct sunlight from front

It is difficult to make a measurementbecause of bad weather

System malfunction has been detected∗: “CRUISE” indicator light also flashes.

Master WarningLight

“CRUISE”indicator light

Warning code

y16062q

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 5 −


2 Bring your vehicle to the desired speed.

3 Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed.

If a vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain anappropriate distance from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead. If there was no vehicle ahead, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed.

If no vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed.

Cancelling

To stop the operation: Push the main switch to turn off.

To stop the operation temporarily: Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.

To resume follow−up cruising or cruising at fixed speed,press the control lever upward and release it.

y16102q

y16101qy16100q

Operation ProcedureThe operation procedure is shown as follows. For the detailed information, see Section 1−7 in the “Owner’s Manual”.

Setting

1 Push the main switch (“ON−OFF” button) to turn on the system. The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster come on.

y16103q


SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 6 −


y16104q

Operation Procedure Acceleration/Deceleration

To accelerate: Depress the accelerator pedal. (When you release the accelerator pedal, follow−up cruising or fixed speedcruising resumes.) If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will accelerate gradually to the preset speed. At this time,depressing the accelerator pedal or pressing the control lever upward and releasing it will accelerate quickly.

To decelerate: Depress the brake pedal. (Even when you release the brake pedal, dynamic laser cruise control does not returnto follow−up cruising or fixed speed cruising. Press the control lever upward to resume follow−up−cruising or fixed speedcruising.)

Changing the preset speed

Using the control lever:

1 Press the control lever upward or downward.

Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction to increase the preset speed.

Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction to decrease the preset speed.

The displayed speed will increase or decrease every 5 mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada and Mexico).

2 Release the control lever when the display shows the desired preset speed.

y16101q

Using the accelerator and brake pedals:

1 Depress the accelerator or brake pedal to attain the desired speed.

2 Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction and release the lever.

00/06/06

To increase the preset speed

To decrease the preset speed

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 7 −


y16070q

Operation Procedure To restore the previous control

If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you press the lever upward in the “+ RES” direction while “READY” shows up onthe instrument cluster and at a vehicle speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set prior to cancellation will berestored.

Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting

You can select one of the vehicle−to−vehicle distances: LONG, MIDDLE or SHORT. Each time you push the distance switchbriefly, the setting changes from LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT and then back to LONG. You can confirm the setting on thedisplay.

LONG MIDDLE SHORT


y16069qy16071q y16072q

y16068q

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 8 −


y16075qy16068q

Each mode display

The control system in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode differs from the one in the conventional cruise controlmode. When using dynamic laser cruise control, make sure whichmode is selected.

00/06/06

In addition to the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode described in this quick reference guide, dynamic laser cruisecontrol has conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at fixed speeds. For the conventional cruise controlmode, see Section 1−7 in the “Owner’s Manual”.

Displays in the instrument cluster:

Changing to the conventional cruise control mode

1 Push the main switch (“ON−OFF” button) to turn on thesystem. The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in theinstrument cluster come on.

2 Push the control lever in the “MODE” direction for longerthan 1 second to change to conventional cruise controlmode. The “NORM.” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on.

y16105q

y16068q

y16076q y16077q

y16100qVehicle−to−vehicle DistanceControl Mode

Conventional Cruise ControlMode

In R

eady

Sta

teIn

Con

trol

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 9 −


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)


Publication No. OM45437UPart No. 01999-45437Printed in Japan 01−0612−00

Quick index

If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 191. . . . . . . .

If your vehicle will not start 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving during break−in period 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher.

See page 388 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 79 L (21 gal., 17.5 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 483 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 487 through 497.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 517.

gU−6

C

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

iii


Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact ofthe head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

iv


In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag,or if an object or some part of his or her body has beenplaced between the occupant and the airbag at the time ofdeployment. This is just one example of how the instruc-tions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help en-sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device may recordsome or all of the following information:

Engine speed

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

Position of the transmission selector lever

Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

Driver’s seat position

Front passenger’s occupant classification

SRS airbag deployment data

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

v


SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situationswhich include activating the VSC under which the VSCEDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR mayrecord some or all of the following information:

Behavior of the vehicle

Steering wheel angle

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

To what extent the brake pedal was applied

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition ofthe 4 wheels

Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Officially requested by the police or other authorities

Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

vi


New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

New vehicle warranty

Emission control systems warranty

Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

vii


Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic throttle control system, cruisecontrol system, dynamic laser cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, SRS airbag system and seat belt preten-sioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealerfor precautionary measures or special instructions regard-ing installation.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

viii


Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 411 and 487.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.These components may include airbag, seat belt preten-sioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

1


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

2


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Multi−information display or garagedoor opener box

6. Auxiliary boxes

7. Glove box

8. Power window switches

9. Power door lock switches

10. Seat heater dials or auxiliary box

11. Cup holder and coin holder

12. Power outlets

13. Automatic transmission selector lever

14. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

15. Power sliding door main switch (“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch)

16. Parking brake pedal

17. Window lock switch

18. Driving position memory buttons

19. Hood lock release lever

20. Power back door main switch (“BACK DOOR OFF” switch)

Instrument panel overview

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

3


1. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger and windshield wiperde−icer switch

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Audio system or rear view monitorsystem/navigation system includingaudio system (For the navigationsystem, see the separate “NavigationSystem Owner’s Manual”.)

6. Power outlet main switch

7. AUX adapter

8. Air conditioning controls

9. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

10. Toyota park assist system switch andindicator light

11. Personal light main switch

12. Ignition switch

13. “TRAC OFF” switch

14. Cruise control switch or dynamic lasercruise control switch

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

4


15. Tilt and telescopic steering lock releaselever

16. Power rear view mirror control switches

17. “REAR VENT” switch

18. Headlight beam level control dial

1. Conversation mirror

2. Power back door switch

3. Front personal lights

4. Power sliding door switches

5. Electric moon roof switch

6. Microphone (See the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

1. Volume control switches for audiosystem/hands−free system (For thehands−free system, see the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

2. “” switch

3. “MODE” switch

4. Telephone switches (See the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

5. Distance switch

6. Speech command switch (See theseparate “Navigation System Owner’sManual”.)

Overhead console Steering switches

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

5


1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Low fuel level warning light

5. Fuel gauge

6. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panellight control knob

7. Odometer and two trip meters

8. Tachometer

Instrument cluster overviewType A

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

6


1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Low fuel level warning light

5. Fuel gauge

6. Dynamic laser cruise control masterwarning light

7. Dynamic laser cruise control display

8. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panellight control knob

9. Odometer and two trip meters

10. Tachometer

Type B

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

7


Brake system warning light∗1or

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

or Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

or Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system/traction controlsystem warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

8


Cruise control indicator light∗2 or dynamic lasercruise control indicator light∗3

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 191 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 221 inSection 1−7.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 224 in Section 1−7.

Slip indicator light

Traction control system off indicator light(two−wheel drive models)

Turn signal indicator lights

Dynamic laser cruise control ready modeindicator light

Conventional cruise control mode indicator light

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent systemindicator light

“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light

Third seat warning light∗1

Headlight indicator light

Tail light indicator light

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

9


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front doors 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding doors 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power sliding doors 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back door 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual quarter windows 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power quarter windows 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

10


Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in theglove box.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the front doors and sliding doorscan be locked without a key, you shouldalways carry a spare master key in caseyou accidentally lock your keys inside thevehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

Keys (without engineimmobilizer system)

Keys (with engine immobilizersystem)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

11


To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the front doors and sliding doorscan be locked without a key, you shouldalways carry a spare master key in caseyou accidentally lock your keys inside thevehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

12


Do not bend the key grip.

Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

13


The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.

On some models—

The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 49 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

Engine immobilizer system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

14


For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI−21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Type A

Type B

Wireless remote control—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

15


1. Lock switch

2. Unlock switch

3. Alarm switch

4. Sliding door open switch (right side)

5. Back door open switch

6. Sliding door open switch (left side)

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, or activate thepanic mode from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.On some models, the system also al-lows you to activate the theft deterrentsystem from the same distance.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the wireless remote controltransmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingbattery” on page 20.

If you lose your wireless remote controltransmitter, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to avoid the possibilityof theft, or an accident. (See “If you loseyour wireless remote control transmitter”on page 455 in Section 4.)

MADE IN U.S.A.

This complies with Part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

16


Locking operation (type A)

Unlocking operation (type A)

Locking operation (type B)

Unlocking operation (type B)

To lock and unlock all the doors, pushthe switches of the transmitter slowlyand securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the sidedoors and back door are locked simulta-neously. At this time one beep will beheard, turn signal lights will flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, or if the key is in theignition switch, locking cannot be per-formed by the lock switch and a beep willsound continuously for 10 seconds. How-ever, if the key is in the ignition switch,a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doorsand back door securely or push the un-lock switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once tounlock only the driver’s door. Pushing theswitch twice within 3 seconds unlocks allthe side doors and back door simulta-neously. Each time the unlock switch ispushed, two beeps will be heard, turn sig-nal lights will flash twice.

—Locking and unlockingdoors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

17


This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the unlock switch is pressed, thefront personal lights and ignition switchlight come on. The lights remains on forabout 15 seconds unless any of the sidedoors or back door are opened then andclosed. (For further information, see “Frontpersonal lights” on page 179 and/or “Igni-tion switch light” on page 181 in Section1−5.)

You have 60 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will automatical-ly lock again.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

Cancelling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

Cancelling the flash of the turn signallights

Cancelling the beep sound

Right side power sliding door (type A)

Right side power sliding door (type B)

—Opening and closing slidingdoors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

18


Left side power sliding door (type B only)

Push and hold the switch of the wire-less remote control transmitter aboutone second. The power sliding dooropens and closes completely.

Right side power sliding door—

To open: Push the sliding door openswitch (right side).To close: Push the sliding door openswitch (right side) again.

Left side power sliding door—

To open: Push the sliding door openswitch (left side).To close: Push the sliding door openswitch (left side) again.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switches under the following conditionsonly:

The sliding door is unlocked.

The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)

The key is not in the ignition switch.

The sliding door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

The sliding door stops at the half−openedposition when the window is opened morethan about 15 cm (6 in.).

The left side power sliding door does notoperate when the fuel filler door isopened.

Closing operation can be performed by thewireless remote control switches under thefollowing conditions only:

The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


The sliding door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The sliding door operation by the wirelessremote control can be changed or dis-abled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

19


Push and hold the back door openswitch on the wireless remote controltransmitter for about one second. Thepower back door opens and closescompletely.

When closing or opening the back door,two beeps will be heard and the turn sig-nal lights will flash twice.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switch under the following conditionsonly:

The back door is unlocked.

The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


The back door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

Closing operation can be performed by theswitch under the following conditions only:

The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


The back door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The back door operation by the wirelessremote control can be changed or dis-abled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

Pushing and holding the alarm switchblows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlights, tail lights andturns on the front personal lights.

The alarm switch is used to deter vehicletheft when you witness anyone attemptingto break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

Push any of the switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter.

Lock or unlock either front doors orback door with the key.

Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

—Opening and closing backdoor (type B only) —Activating alarm

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

20


The alarm does not work when the ignitionkey is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

—Replacing battery

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

21


2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

22


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all thedoors simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

When either front door is unlocked with akey, the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 179 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 181 in Section 1−5.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

Front doors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

23


CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if youleave the key in the ignition switch.

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors andback door are closed.

Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

24


The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorsand back door with the power doorlock switch.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Locking linked with the shift position

All doors are automatically locked whenthe selector lever is moved out of “P”position.

Locking linked with vehicle speed

All doors are automatically locked whenthe vehicle speed goes above about 20km/h (12 mph).

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor locking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.

To select the locking linked with theshift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignitionkey to the “ON” position.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion key to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the lock position for 5seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-eration again.

To select the locking linked with thevehicle speed:


2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion key to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the lock position for 5seconds and then release.



—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

25


AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the selector lever is moved to“P” position.

Unlocking linked with the ignitionswitch

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the driver’s door is opened within10 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-tion, or the key is removed.

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor unlocking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.

To select the unlocking linked with theshift position:


2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion key to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the unlock position for5 seconds and then release.



To select the unlocking linked with theignition switch:


2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion key to the “ON” position, pressand hold the driver’s side power doorlock switch in the unlock position for5 seconds and then release.




Move the lock knob.

To lock: Move the knob forward. To unlock: Move the knob backward.

Closing the sliding door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the slid-ing door. Be careful not to lock your keysin the vehicle.

Sliding doors (non−powered)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

26


CLOSING THE FULLY−OPENED SLIDINGDOOR

To close the fully−opened sliding door, pullthe inside or outside handle and thenclose the door.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the passengers from beingthrown out from the vehicle in anaccident. It also helps prevent thedoors from being opened unintention-ally.

Sliding door closer (on some models):When the sliding door has not been fullyclosed, it is automatically closed com-pletely even if the power sliding door sys-tem is off.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe sliding door automaticallycloses when it has not been fullyclosed.

Never allow a child to operate thesliding door.

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe sliding door closer is operating.Otherwise, the sliding door closermay be damaged.

CAUTION

When closing the sliding door, con-firm safety of the area around.Keep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the sliding door. Other-wise, the closing door may causedeath or serious injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on aslope, the door will slide fasterwhen opening or closing, so be es-pecially careful that the passengersdo not get hit or pinched by thedoor.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

27


When stopping on a downwardslope, open the door fully whilepassengers are getting on or off.Do not pull the outside handle orinside handle while the door isopen as the door could suddenlyclose by itself causing injury.

NOTICE

Do not close the sliding door by ap-plying the brakes. Doing so couldcause the door to be damaged.

When the fuel filler door is opened, theleft side sliding door will not open.Close the fuel filler door securely andthen operate the sliding door.

NOTICE

Avoid forcibly opening the left sidesliding door fully when the fuel fillerdoor is opened. Otherwise, the fuelfiller door may be damaged.

When the sliding door window isopened more than about 15 cm (6 in.),the sliding door will stop at half−opened position for safety reasons.Close the window and then operate thesliding door.

CAUTION

Do not leave the sliding door at half−opened position because the door isnot latched at this position. If thevehicle is stopped on a downwardslope, it may move and cause an un-expected injury.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

28


SLIDING DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Open the sliding door fully and movethe lock lever to the “LOCK” positionas shown on the label. Then close thesliding door.

If the child−protector is locked, you cannotopen the sliding door from the inside. Werecommend using this feature wheneversmall children are in the vehicle.

On Off

POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH(“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch)

This switch is used to turn on and offthe power sliding door system. In orderto operate the power sliding door, the“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on the in-strument panel must be pushed out.(The orange line on top of the switchindicates that the power sliding doorsystem is on.) To disable the powersliding door feature, push in the switch.

When the power sliding door system ison, you can open and close the slidingdoor with the power sliding door switcheson the overhead console or wireless re-mote control transmitter even if the slidingdoor child−protector is locked.

When the power sliding door system isoff, you can open and close the slidingdoor by the same operations as non−pow-ered sliding door.

The sliding door closer is operative evenif the power sliding door system is off.See page 32 about sliding door closer.

CAUTION

Do not leave small children or petsunattended in your vehicle. Theycould operate the power slidingdoor and injure themselves or oth-ers. Turn off the power sliding doorsystem when the power sliding dooris not in use.

When jacking up the vehicle, turnoff the power sliding door systemand close the sliding door com-pletely.

Power sliding doors—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

29


NOTICE

When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower sliding door system is off.


Move the lock knob.

To lock: Move the knob forward. To unlock: Move the knob backward.

Closing the sliding door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the slid-ing door. Be careful not to lock your keysin the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the passengers from beingthrown out from the vehicle in anaccident. It also helps prevent thedoors from being opened unintention-ally.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

30


The power sliding door can be operatedautomatically in the following ways:

Operates with the power sliding doorswitches inside the vehicle

Operates with the wireless remote con-trol transmitter

Assists operation with the outside orinside handle by hand

The power sliding door system can becanceled by the “SLIDE DOOR OFF”switch.

When the power sliding door system ison, if you put the transmission out of “P”with the ignition key in the “ON” positionand the sliding door is not completelyclosed, a buzzer will sound.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe sliding door automatically opensor closes.


NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe sliding door is operated automati-cally. Otherwise, the power slidingdoor system may be damaged.

You can cause a beep to sound when thepower sliding door is opened or closed.For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Front overhead console (type A)

Front overhead console (type B)

—Operation of power slidingdoor

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

31


Center pillar

OPERATING WITH THE POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

To open the door, push the switch. Toclose the door, push the switch onceagain. The door opens and closes com-pletely.

Switches on the front overhead con-sole:

“ ” switch—To operate the left side

door (type B only)

“ ” switch—To operate the right side

door

Switches on the center pillar:

“PWR DOOR” switch—To operate eachside door

Opening operation can be performed bythe switches under the following condi-tions:

The sliding door is unlocked.

The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

The sliding door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

When the ignition key is in the “ON”position, the transmission selector levermust be in “P”.

The child−protector is unlocked.(switches on the center pillar only)

Closing operation can be performed bythe switches under the following condi-tions:

The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

The sliding door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

Left and right side power sliding doormodels—The left side power sliding doordoes not operate when the fuel filler dooris opened.

The length of time required to push theswitches for operating the sliding door canbe changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

CAUTION

If you shift the automatic transmis-sion selector lever out of “P” andaccelerate before the power slidingdoor is closed completely, the slidingdoor may reverse to the open posi-tion. A child or others could fall outof the vehicle and be injured. Alwaysmake sure the power sliding door isclosed and latched before you startdriving.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

32


OPERATING WITH THE WIRELESSREMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

To open or close the door, push the“ ” or “ ” switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter about onesecond. (Only when the power slidingdoor system is on.) For details, see“Wireless remote control” on page 14in this Section.

ASSISTS OPERATION WITH THEOUTSIDE OR INSIDE HANDLE BY HAND

When the power sliding door system is on(the “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch is pushedout), if you pull the outside handle or slidethe inside handle, the sliding door willautomatically and completely open orclose.

When the power sliding door system isoff, the sliding door can be operatedmanually by the outside or inside handle.

CLOSING THE FULLY−OPENED SLIDINGDOOR

To close the fully−opened sliding door, pullthe inside or outside handle and thenclose the door.

Sliding door closer: When the slidingdoor has not been fully closed, it is auto-matically closed completely even if thepower sliding door system is off.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe sliding door automaticallycloses when it has not been fullyclosed.


NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe sliding door closer is operating.Otherwise, the sliding door closermay be damaged.

JAM PROTECTION FUNCTION

If anything with sufficient resistance ob-structs the power sliding door while it isclosing or opening, the sliding door willautomatically reverse to the opposite di-rection. However, if the power sliding dooris between the half−opened and fully−opened positions while it is opening, thedoor will stop at that position.

If the jam protection function operatescontinuously at the closing operation morethan 2 times, the sliding door will bestopped at that position and the powersliding door system will be canceled.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

33


Before operating the power sliding door,make sure there is nobody near the slid-ing door. Make sure the sliding door stopsat the fully−opened position, and then al-low the passengers to get in and out ofthe vehicle.

The resistance must be as strong as theforce of the moving door, or stronger. Asthe sliding door approaches the fully−closed or fully−opened position, its movingforce increases significantly.

The jam protection function may not workif something gets caught just before thesliding door is fully closed.

If the sliding door receives a strong im-pact, this function may operate even ifnothing is caught.

CAUTION

The power sliding door could injurepeople if they are caught in the doorpath. When using the power slidingdoor, observe the following:

Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in death or serious injury.

The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the sliding door is fullyclosed.

Before you close the power slidingdoor, always make sure there is no-body around it. Also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing door, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the power slid-ing door, make sure he or she oper-ates the door safely.

NOTICE

Objects caught in the path of the slid-ing door may be damaged. Make surethere is nothing in the doorway be-fore closing the sliding door.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power sliding door system maynot work after you reconnect, replace orrecharge the battery. In any of thesecases, close the sliding doors completelyby hand to normalize the power slidingdoor system.

If the power sliding door system does notoperate properly after the above proce-dure, there may be a problem in the sys-tem. Contact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

34


CAUTION

When closing the sliding door, con-firm safety of the area around.Keep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the sliding door. Other-wise, the closing door may causedeath or serious injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on aslope, the door will slide fasterwhen opening or closing, so be es-pecially careful that the passengersdo not get hit or pinched by thedoor.

When stopping on a downwardslope, open the door fully whilepassengers are getting on or off.Do not pull the outside handle orinside handle while the door isopen as the door could suddenlyclose by itself causing injury.

NOTICE

Do not close the sliding door by ap-plying the brakes. Doing so couldcause the door to be damaged.

When the fuel filler door is opened, theleft side sliding door will not open.Close the fuel filler door securely andthen operate the sliding door.

NOTICE

Avoid forcibly opening the left sidesliding door fully when the fuel fillerdoor is opened. Otherwise, the fuelfiller door may be damaged.

—Power sliding door cautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

35


When the sliding door window isopened more than about 15 cm (6 in.),the sliding door will stop at half−opened position for safety reasons.Close the window and then operate thesliding door.

CAUTION

When the power sliding door is ON—Do not leave the sliding door at half−opened position because the door willunlock after 30 minutes. If the vehicleis stopped on a downward slope, itmay move and cause an unexpectedinjury.

When the power sliding door isOFF—Do not leave the sliding door athalf−opened position because thedoor is not latched at this position.If the vehicle is stopped on a down-ward slope, it may move and causean unexpected injury.

NOTICE

When the power sliding door is ON —To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the sliding doorat half−opened position.

Open the sliding door fully and movethe lock lever to the “LOCK” positionas shown on the label. Then close thesliding door.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the sliding door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

—Sliding doorchild−protectors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

36


CAUTION

Make sure to turn off the power slid-ing door system after locking thechild−protectors.

To open the back door, push up theback door opener and raise the door.

The back door can be opened when thevehicle is stopped.

The back door can be locked or unlockedin the following ways.

Operate the power door lock switch.(See “Front doors” on page 22 in thisSection.)

Operate the wireless remote control.(See “Wireless remote control” on page14 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door arelocked and unlocked simultaneouslywith the driver’s door. (See “Frontdoors” on page 22 in this Section.)

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a key,the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 179 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 181 in Section 1−5.)

If the back door opener does not operate,see “If you cannot operate back dooropener” on page 456 in Section 4.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. Be careful not to lockyour keys in the vehicle.

Back door (non−powered)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

37


When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 412in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

Back door closer (on some models):When the back door has not been fullyclosed, it is automatically closed com-pletely.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closeswhen it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate theback door.

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door closer is operating.Otherwise, the back door closer maybe damaged.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

38


On Off

This switch is used to turn on and offthe power back door system. In orderto operate the power back door, the“BACK DOOR OFF” switch on the in-strument panel must be pushed out.(The orange line on top of the switchindicates that the power back door sys-tem is on.) To disable the power backdoor feature, push in the switch.

CAUTION

Do not leave small children or petsunattended in your vehicle. Theycould operate the power back door,and anyone around the back doorcould be injured. Turn off the powerback door system when the powerback door is not in use.

When jacking up the vehicle, turnoff the power back door system andclose the back door completely.

NOTICE

When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower back door system is off.

The power back door can be operatedautomatically in the following ways:

Operates with the power back doorswitch on the overhead console

Operates with the wireless remote con-trol transmitter

Assists closing by hand

The power back door system can be can-celed by the “BACK DOOR OFF” switch.

When the system is canceled, see“—Manual operation” on page 41 in thisSection.

When closing or opening the back doorautomatically, two beeps will be heard andthe turn signal lights will flash twice.

The beep sound can be changed. For de-tails, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closes.


Power back door——“BACK DOOR OFF” switch

—Automatic operation (powerback door—ON)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

39


NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door is operated automati-cally. Otherwise, the power back doorsystem may be damaged.

OPERATING WITH THE POWER BACKDOOR SWITCH

To open the door, push and hold the“ ” switch on the overhead con-sole about one second. To close thedoor, push this switch once again. Thedoor opens and closes completely.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switch under the following condi-tions:

The back door is unlocked.

The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

The back door is between in the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

When the ignition key is in the “ON”position, the transmission selector levermust be in “P”.

Closing operation can be performed bythe switch under the following condi-tions:

The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

The back door is between in the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The time of pushing the switches for oper-ating the back door can be changed. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

40


OPERATING WITH THE WIRELESSREMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

To open or close the door, push andhold the “ ” switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter about onesecond. (Only when the power backdoor system is on.) For details, see“Wireless remote control” on page 14in this Section.

ASSISTS CLOSING BY HAND

When the power back door system is on(the “BACK DOOR OFF” switch is pushedout), if you move the back door about10—15 cm (4—6 in.) from its fully−openedposition, the back door will automaticallyand completely close.

When the power back door system is off,the back door can be closed manually.

The assisting function when closing theback door can be disabled and the assist-ing function when opening the back doorcan be added. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

JAM PROTECTION FUNCTION

If anything with sufficient resistance ob-structs the power back door while it isclosing or opening, the back door will au-tomatically reverse to the opposite direc-tion.

If the jam protection function operatescontinuously at the closing operation morethan 2 times, the back door will bestopped at that position.

Before operating the power back door,make sure there is nobody near the backdoor.

The resistance must be as strong as theforce of the moving door, or stronger. Asthe back door approaches the fully−closedor fully−opened position, its moving forceincreases significantly.

The jam protection function may not workif something gets caught just before theback door is fully closed.

If the back door receives a strong impact,this function may operate even if nothingis caught.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

41


CAUTION

The power back door could injurepeople if they are caught in the doorpath. When using the power backdoor, observe the following:


The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the sliding door is fullyclosed.

Before you close the power backdoor, always make sure there is no-body around it. If someone’s neck,head or hands get caught in a clos-ing door, it could result in death orserious injury. When anyone closesthe power back door, make sure heor she operates the door safely.

NOTICE

Objects caught in the path of theback door may be damaged. Makesure there is nothing in the doorwaybefore closing the back door.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked and the power back door systemmay not work after you reconnect, replaceor recharge the battery. In any of thesecases, normalize the power back doorsystem by following procedure.

1. Unlock the back door with the key,wireless remote control transmitter orpower door lock switch.

2. Close the back door completely byhand.

If the power back door system does notoperate properly after the above proce-dure, there may be a problem in the sys-tem. Contact your Toyota dealer.

To open the back door, push up theback door opener and raise the door.

The back door can be opened when thevehicle is stopped.

The back door can be locked or unlockedin the following ways.

Operate the power door lock switch.(See “Front doors” on page 22 in thisSection.)

Operate the wireless remote control.(See “Wireless remote control” on page14 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door arelocked and unlocked simultaneouslywith the driver’s door. (See “Frontdoors” on page 22 in this Section.)

—Manual operation (powerback door—OFF)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

42


When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a key,the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 179 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 181 in Section 1−5.)

If the back door opener does not operate,see “If you cannot operate back dooropener” on page 456 in Section 4.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. Be careful not to lockyour keys in the vehicle.

When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.


CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

43


Back door closer: When the back doorhas not been fully closed, it is automati-cally closed completely even if the powerback door system is off.

CAUTION

Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closeswhen it has not been fully closed.


NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door closer is operating.Otherwise, the back door closer maybe damaged.

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each front door.

The power windows work when the ignitionkey is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, the front door windows and slidingdoor windows work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Itstops working when either front door isopened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Power windows

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

44


Type A (to open only)

Type B (to open and close)

Automatic operation:

Type A—Push the switch completely downand then release it. The window will fullyopen. To stop the window partway, lightlypull the switch up and then release it.

Type B—Push the switch completely downor pull it completely up, and then releaseit. The window will fully open or close. Tostop the window partway, lightly move theswitch in the opposite direction and thenrelease it.

Jam protection function (type B only):During automatic closing operation, thewindow stops and opens half way if some-thing gets caught between the window andwindow frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switchand lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the windowcloses and hold the switch for a sec-ond.

Make sure that the window opens andcloses automatically. If the power windowcannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION


The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

45


Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

The sliding door window cannot be oper-ated when the sliding door is opened.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

46


CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury, youmust do the following.

Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

To open the quarter window, pull thelatch handle toward you and swing itfully out.

When closing the window, make sure it iscompletely closed.

Manual quarter windows

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

47


The quarter windows can be operatedwith the “REAR VENT” switch on theinstrument panel.

The power quarter windows work when theignition key is in the “ON” position.

To open: Push the switch on the upperside.To close: Push the switch on the lowerside.

Both the left and right rear quarter win-dows move as long as you hold theswitch.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Theystop working when either front door isopened.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

Before you close the power quarterwindows, always make sure there isnobody around the power quarterwindows. You must also make surethe heads, hands and other parts ofthe bodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerquarter window switches withoutsupervision.


Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power quarter windowswitch and get trapped in a window.Unattended person (particularly asmall child) can be involved in aserious accident.

Power quarter windows

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

48


To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,move it straight up. If it is moved to theside or toward the inside of the vehicle,it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

Hood

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

49


CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

To deter the vehicle theft, the systemis designed to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-tery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andturn signal lights, and turns on the frontpersonal lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

On some models, the indicator light willstart flashing when the key is removedfrom the ignition switch. (See “Engineimmobilizer system” on page 13 in thisSection for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

Theft deterrent system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

50


The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system can be canceled by the fol-lowing ways:

Any of the side doors or the back dooris unlocked with the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key to “ON” position.

If the parking lights and tail lights comeon for 2 seconds when the system iscanceled, the system has been alarmed.Check to see if there is any abnormalitywith your vehicle.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

If any of the side doors or back dooris unlocked or opened without the keyor wireless remote control transmitter,or if the hood is forcibly opened.

If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and anyof the side doors or back door is un-locked, all the side doors and back doorwill re−lock automatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.

Reactivating the system

Once set, the system is automatically re-set after the alarm stopped automaticallyafter one minute.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingthese ways:

Unlock any of the side doors or theback door with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

These ways cancel the system at thesame time.

If the battery becomes discharged dueto the vehicle being unused for a longtime, etc., when the battery is rechargedor replaced, the system will give thealarm. If this happens, immediately unlockany of the side doors or the back doorwith the key or the wireless remote con-trol transmitter, and the alarm will stop.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

51


TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above. Allthe side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light starts flash-ing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

Fuel tank cap

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

52


NOTICE

Avoid opening the fuel filler doorwhen the left side sliding door is fullyopened. Otherwise, the fuel filler doormay be damaged.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise. Pauseslightly before removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be hanged onthe cap hanger.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

53


When installing the cap, turn it clock-wise until one click is heard, in orderto fully close it. The cap returns slight-ly when your hand is released from thecap after closure, however this doesnot cause any problems.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage inthe event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch on the overhead console.

The moon roof works when the ignitionkey is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

The roof will fully open automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will open while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, thedeflector will raise to reduce the enteringof the strong wind. The angle of the de-flector will be adjusted according to thevehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

Electric moon roof

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

54


The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will close while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt up while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push the switchon either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt down whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during slide clos-ing operation, the moon roof stops andopens half way, and the deflector stopsand raises fully.

If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during tiltingdown operation, the moon roof stopsand opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

Make sure that the moon roof opens andcloses automatically. If the moon roof can-not be operated properly, have it checkedby your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury, youmust do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moon roof,first make sure it is safe to do so.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

55



Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a serious injury.

The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

56


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

57


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving position memory system 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrests 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

58


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

59


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

Do not put objects under the seatsexcept for putting them in the auxil-iary box. Otherwise, the objectsmay interfere with the seat−lockmechanism or unexpectedly pushup the seat position adjusting leverand the seat may suddenly move,causing the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

60


While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING KNOB

To change the seat height, turn theknob either way.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting driver’s seat(manual seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

61


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

4. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING KNOB

To change the amount of lumbar sup-port, turn the knob either way.

1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHIONANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH


Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting driver’s seat(power seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

62


CAUTION


3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Press either side of the switch.

The amount of lumbar support will changewhile the switch is pressed.



2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION


—Adjusting front passenger’sseat (manual seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

63


3. SEATBACK FOLDING LEVER (onsome models)

The front passenger’s seat can befolded down using this lever.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING SWITCH


Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH



—Adjusting front passenger’sseat (power seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

64


CAUTION


1. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver and raise the seatback to its up-right position.

2. Pull the seatback folding lever andfold the seatback down.

—Folding front passenger’sseat

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

65


You can use the seatback as a temporarytable only when the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury:

Do not set up the seatback tablewhile the vehicle is moving.

Do not sit on the folded seatback.

Make sure the front passenger’sseat is securely locked in slidingposition when you set the seat asa temporary table.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat, avoidputting heavy loads on the temporarytable.

This system can memorize the positionof the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors, and recall them at thetouch of a button.

Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize twoseparate positions.

Driving position memorysystem

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

66


SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The key must be in the “ON” position andthe selector lever is in the “P” position.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outsiderear view mirrors to the desiredposition.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,push button “1” or “2” until a beepis heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi-tions by repeating the above steps. If step2 is performed when both buttons “1” and“2” are memorized, the previous positionwill be erased and a new position will beset.

To make only slight changes to an alreadymemorized position, the easiest way is tofirst activate the memorized position, thenmake the desired changes and performstep 2 above.

RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, abeep will sound and the driving posi-tion will be automatically adjusted tothe position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalledunder the following conditions:

The ignition key is in the “ON positionand the selector lever is in the “P”position.

The key is not in the ignition switchand less than 30 seconds have passedsince opening the driver’s door.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

67


To stop the operation, push any drivingposition memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button“1” or “2” again.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the memory will be erased and the posi-tions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

Do not start the vehicle while theadjustment are being made.

Take care not to select the wrongbutton, or the seat could strike therear passenger or hit your bodyagainst the steering wheel. If thishappens, you can stop the move-ment by pressing another drivingposition memory switch, or de-pressing the brake pedal.

CAUTION

Adjustment should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position,try sliding it forward and backwardto make sure it is lock in position.

After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

When returning seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug-gage compartment. See “—Stowage pre-cautions” on page 412 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

68


Outer seat Center seat



2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER/STRAP (from front)

Lean forward and pull the lever or straptoward you. Then lean back to the de-sired angle and release the lever orstrap.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSTRAP (from rear)

Pull the strap and push the seatbackforward or pull it backward to the de-sired angle and release the strap.

—Adjusting second seats

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

69


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the p assengersare sitting up straight and well backin the seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hips andapply restraint forces directly to theabdomen or your neck may contactthe shoulder belt. In the event of afrontal collision, the more the seat isreclined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

For access to the third seat, performthe following procedure.

Fold down the seatback while pulling theseatback angle adjusting lever or strapand swing up the seat.

After passengers are in, return the seatuntil it locks securely, and lift up the seatback by pulling the lever or strap.

CAUTION

After returning the seat, make surethe seat is securely locked by push-ing forward and rearward on the topof the seatback or by trying to pullup the edge of the bottom cushion.Failure to do so will prevent seat beltfrom operating properly.

—Tumbling second seat forthird seat entry

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

70


When returning the tumbled secondseat to its original position:

Once the seat is moved from thetumbled position to the folded−downposition, it cannot be directly returnedto the tumbled position again. (It is im-possible to operate the seat in the or-der 1→2→1.) When you return thefolded−down seat (position 2) to itstumbled position (position 1), you mustreturn the folded−down seat (position 2)to its original position (position 3)once. (It is possible to operate the seatin the order 1 →2→3→1.)

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS(7−passenger models only)

1. Stow the second seat belt bucklesas shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from stickingout when you tumble the second seats.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the buckles must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

—Tumbling second seats(outer seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

71


2. Make sure the shoulder belt passesthrough the hanger when folding thesecond seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position. Hold the center of thelever and pull it up. Then slide theseat to the rear−most lock position.

2. 7−passenger models only: Pull thearmrests up.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

72


3. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting lever orstrap and swing up the seat.

If the front seat is in the way, adjust itso it will not interfere.

CAUTION

Make sure the seat is free of peopleor luggage. Then, hold the seat andslowly move it. Otherwise, peoplemay be injured or luggage may bedamaged if the seat hits them.

To avoid death or serious injury, donot sit on the folded seatback.

4. Take the holding strap out of thepocket. Pass the strap through theassist grip, and hook it as shown inthe illustration.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe pocket.

NOTICE

Do not use anything other than theassist grip to hold the second seat.

The holding strap must be stowedinto the pocket when it is not inuse.

CAUTION

When tumbling the second seats,fix the seats securely by adjustingthe length of the holding strap.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Do not sit on the third seats whenthe second seat is tumbled in orderto prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

73



When you fold down the seatback from itsupright position, the rear leg locks willdisengage. In this case, lift up the seatand fold down again to engage the rearleg locks.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury:



Make sure the second seat is se-curely locked in position when youset the second seat as a temporarytable.

NOTICE


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

74




CAUTION

When folding or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent death or serious in-jury:

Do not fold or remove the seatwhile the vehicle is moving.


When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or s udden stop:


Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

TUMBLING SECOND SEAT


—Tumbling second seat(center seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

75


2. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting strap.

3. Pull the seat lock release lever (red)and swing up the seat.

If the front seat is in the way, adjust itso it will not interfere.

If the seat is not in the rear−most lockposition, the rear leg will not unlock. Inthis case, slide the seat to the rear−mostlock position and then do the above op-eration again.

CAUTION



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

76


4. Take the holding strap out of thepocket. Pass the strap through theassist grip, and hook it as shown inthe illustration.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe pocket.

NOTICE

Do not use anything other than theassist grip to hold the second seat.

The holding strap must be stowedinto the pocket when it is not inuse.

CAUTION

When tumbling the second seats,fix the seats securely by adjustingthe length of the holding strap.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Do not sit on the third seats whenthe second seat is tumbled in orderto prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop.


CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:



Make sure the second seat is se-curely locked in position when youset the second seat as a temporarytable.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

77


NOTICE


CAUTION

When folding or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent death or serious in-jury:



When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent death orserious injury in a collision or sud-den stop:



BEFORE REMOVING SECOND SEATS(7−passenger models only)

1. Stow the second seat belt bucklesas shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from stickingout when you fold up the second seats.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the buckles must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

—Removing second seats(outer seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

78


2. Make sure the shoulder belts passthrough the hangers when foldingthe second seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

REMOVING SECOND SEATS


2. 7−passenger models only: Pull thearmrests up.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

79


3. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting lever orstrap and swing up the seat.

CAUTION



4. Pull and hold the front leg releasestrap and fold down the seat. Thenthe front leg locks will disengageand you can remove the seat.

CAUTION

When removing the seat, observe thefollowing to prevent death or seriousinjury:



Be careful not to hit the removedseat against a person or drop it onyourself.

To prevent death or serious injury ina collision or s udden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback while driving.

Do not leave the removed seatloose in the vehicle.

Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed seat.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

80


NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on theremoved seat. The metallic tips ofthe seat leg may be damaged andthe seat cannot be reinstalled.

Do not carry the removed seat withholding the seat position adjustinglever. Otherwise, the seat may slideand not installed properly. If youslide the removed seat, return theseat to the rear−most position be-fore it is installed.

Front of the vehicle

7−passenger models



—Installing second seats(outer seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

81


When you install the second seats, besure to place it where the seat is origi-nally positioned because each secondseat is not interchangeable. You candistinguish the original seat position bythe position of the front seat leg pinand the shape of the seat striker bezelin the floor.

The right side second seat has a pin inthe outside of the right front leg and theleft side second seat has a pin in theoutside of the left front leg as shown inthe illustration.

CAUTION

You must install the seat in properposition to wear the seat belt proper-ly. Failure to be properly restrainedwith the seat belt in an accident cancause death or serious injury. Referto the label on the side of the seatfor additional installation instructions.

NOTICE

You must install the seat in its origi-nal position. If it is installed in thewrong position, the seat lock or bezelwill be damaged.

1. Align the front leg hooks with therear strikers in the floor. Then swingup the seat.

2. Make sure the front leg is lockedsecurely, fold down the seat and en-gage the rear leg lock.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

82


You can easily align the front leg hookswith the rear strikers by using the floorbezel. Put the front legs of the seat shortof the rear strikers as shown in the il-lustration. Then slide the seat forwardalong the groove of the bezel until thefront legs will reach the striker. Make surethe front legs align with the striker, swingup the seat.

NOTICE

When installing the seat, make sureto align the front leg hooks with bothof the rearmost strikers in the floor.If you align the legs with the frontstrikers, the bezel in the floor will bedamaged.

If you lock the rear legs before the frontlegs are locked securely, disengage therear leg lock by pushing the red pin insideeach rear leg. Then reinstall the seat fol-lowing the correct procedure.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

83




CAUTION

When reinstalling the seat, observethe following to prevent death or seri-ous injury:

Do not reinstall the seat while thevehicle is moving.



After folding or installing the seat,push it forward and backward tomake sure it is locked in position.

When reinstalling seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent deathor serious injury in a collision orsudden stop:


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

84



Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent theoccupants from using seat beltsproperly.

Do not reinstall the seat with itsback facing forward.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked in the proper position.

NOTICE

Do not carry the removed seat byholding the seat position adjusting le-ver. Otherwise, the seat may slide andnot be installed properly. If you slidethe removed seat, return the seat tothe rear−most position before it isinstalled.

7−passenger models only: The rightside seat can be moved to the insidewhen the console box is not installedbetween the second seats.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

85


REMOVING CENTER SECOND SEAT


2. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting strap.

3. Pull the rear leg release lever (red)and swing up the seat.

If the seat is not in the rear−most lockposition, the rear leg will not unlock. Inthis case, slide the seat to the rear−mostlock position and then do the above op-eration again.

—Removing second seat(center seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

86


CAUTION



4. Pull and hold the front leg releasestrap and fold down the seat. Thenthe front leg locks will disengageand you can remove the seat.

CAUTION

When removing the seat, observe thefollowing to prevent death or seriousinjury:




To prevent death or serious injury ina collision or s udden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback while driving.

Do not leave the removed seatloose in the vehicle.

Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed seat.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

87


NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on theremoved seat. The metallic tips ofthe seat leg may be damaged andthe seat cannot be reinstalled.

Do not carry the removed seat withholding the seat position adjustinglever.


When you install the second seats, besure to place it where the seat is origi-nally positioned because each secondseat is not interchangeable. You candistinguish the original seat position bythe position of the front seat leg pinand the shape of the seat striker bezelin the floor.

The second center seat has a pin in theinside of the right front leg as shown inthe illustration.

CAUTION

You must install the seat in properposition to wear the seat belt proper-ly. Failure to be properly restrainedwith the seat belt in an accident cancause death or serious injury. Referto the label on the side of the seatfor additional installation instructions.

NOTICE

You must install the seat in its origi-nal position. If it is installed in thewrong position, the seat lock or bezelwill be damaged.

—Installing seconds seat(center seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

88


1. Align the front leg hooks with therear strikers in the floor. Then swingup the seat.

2. Make sure the front leg is lockedsecurely, fold down the seat and en-gage the rear leg lock.

You can easily align the front leg hookswith the rear strikers by using the floorbezel. Put the front legs of the seat shortof the rear strikers as shown in the il-lustration. Then slide the seat forwardalong the groove of the bezel until thefront legs will reach the striker. Make surethe front legs align with the striker, swingup the seat.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

89


NOTICE

When installing the seat, make sureto align the front leg hooks with therearmost strikers of each pair in thefloor. If you align the legs with thefront strikers, the bezel in the floorwill be damaged.

If you lock the rear legs before the frontlegs are not lock securely, disengage therear leg lock by pulling the rear leg re-lease lever. Then reinstall the seat follow-ing the correct procedure.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

90


INSTALLING THE SECOND CENTERSEAT IN THE FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

The second center seat can be used inthe forward position.

To use the center second seat in the for-ward position, install according to the fol-lowing procedure.

BEFORE INSTALLING THE SECONDCENTER SEAT IN FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

1. Slide the front seats forward fromthe rear−most position, stand theseatbacks to the upright position.

2. For vehicles equipped with the frontseat side table, pull up the lock re-lease lever and fold the table down.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

91


INSTALLING THE SECOND CENTERSEAT IN THE FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

1. Remove the second center seat fromthe normal position. (For details, see“—Removing second seat (centerseat)” on page 85 in this Section.)

Align the front leg hook with therear striker of the forward pair. Thenswing the seat until it reaches thefolded seat side table.

2. Push the foot pedal forward to se-curely latch the front leg locks. Makesure the front leg is locked securely,fold down the seat and engage therear leg lock.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

92


CAUTION

When reinstalling the seat, observethe following to prevent death or seri-ous injury:

Do not reinstall the seat while thevehicle is moving.



After folding or installing the seat,push it forward and backward tomake sure it is locked in position.

When reinstalling seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent deathor serious injury in a collision orsudden stop:



Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent theoccupants from using seat beltsproperly.

Do not reinstall the seat with itsback facing forward.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked in the proper position.

NOTICE

Do not carry the removed seat byholding the seat position adjusting le-ver.

—Adjusting third seats(manual seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

93


Lean forward and pull the strap for-ward. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the strap.

CAUTION

Align both seatbacks at the sameangle when a person sits in thethird seat center position. Other-wise, the person cannot wear theseat belt properly and this maycause death or serious injuries in acollision.

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or ser-ious injury.

To adjust the seatback angle, push ei-ther side of the switch.


CAUTION

Align both seatbacks at the sameangle when a person sits in thethird seat center position. Other-wise, the person cannot wear theseat belt properly and this maycause death or serious injuries in acollision.

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or ser-ious injury.

—Adjusting third seats (powerseat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

94


Before stowing the third seats:

Stow the seat belt buckles and centerseat belt. (See “—Stowing seat beltbuckles of the second and third seats”on page 114 and “—Stowing the centerseat belt of the third seats” on page 114in this Section.)

Lower the head restraint to the lowestposition. See “Head restraints” on page106 in this Section.

STOWING THIRD SEATS

1. Pull the seatback angle adjustingstrap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK”printed on its surface), then folddown the seatback.

—Stowing third seats (manualseat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

95


2. Pull and hold the seat lock releasestrap (“TO STOW/USE” printed on itssurface) and lift up the seat rear-ward. Then push the seat down.

If the seat does not lift up when the seatlock release strap (“TO STOW/USE”printed on its surface) is pulled, reset asfollowing procedure.

Lift the seatback by pulling on the seat-back angle adjusting strap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK” printed on its surface).Then push the seatback down again.

3. Push the seat against the floor andmake sure it is locked securely.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

96


To return the third seats, perform thefollowing procedure.

1. Pull and hold the seat lock releasestrap (“TO STOW/USE” printed on itssurface), then lift up the seat rear-ward. Push the seat forward andthen engage the front leg locks.Make sure the front legs are lockedsecurely.

If the seat does not lift up when the seatlock release strap (“TO STOW/USE”printed on its surface) is pulled, reset asfollowing procedure.

Lift the seatback by pulling on the seat-back angle adjusting strap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK” printed on its surface).Then push the seatback down again.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjustingstrap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK”printed on its surface) and raise theseatback.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

97


CAUTION

Do not sit on the third seat when itis in the stowed position as shown inthe illustration. It may cause death orsevere injury in the event of emergen-cy braking or collision.

CAUTION

When stowing or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent death or serious in-jury:



Do not stow and return the seatswhen you are inside the vehicle inorder to prevent pinching yourhands or feet in the seat. Be sureto stow and return the seats fromoutside the vehicle.

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent death orserious injury in a collision or sud-den stop:



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

98


The third seats can be folded down au-tomatically by operating the folding/re-turning switch that is inside the backdoor opening on the outer edge of theceiling.

Before folding the third seats:


Lower the head restraint to the lowestposition. (See “Head restraints” onpage 106 in this Section.)

Make sure that there is no object onthe seat cushion. If an object is caughtbetween the seat cushion and seatbackduring the operation, seat operation willstop.

1. FOLDING/RETURNING SWITCH

The seatback will be folded by pushingthis switch.

The seatback will be returned by push-ing this switch again.

2. RETURNING SWITCH

The seatback will be returned by push-ing this switch.

3. STOWING SWITCH

The seats will be stow. (See “—Stowingthird seats” on page 101)

4. SEATBACK ADJUSTING SWITCH

The seatback will be returned by push-ing this switch.

—Folding third seats (power seat only)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

99


FOLDING THIRD SEATS

Push the folding/returning switch. Theseatback will fold down.

If the indicator light above the switchesflashes three times when the folding/re-turning switch is pushed, the folding op-eration will not start.

To continue the operation, do the follow-ing:

1. Open the back door when the ignitionkey is in “LOCK” or “ACC” and/or theautomatic transmission selector lever isin “P”.

2. Push the folding/returning switch.

Seat operation will stop if any one ofthe switches shown in the illustrationsis pushed. At this time the indicatorlight above the switches comes on anda beep sounds for about 10 seconds.

If the engine is started during operating,the seat operation may also be stopped.

To continue the folding operation, the seat-back must be back to its original positionfirst.

If an object is caught between the seat-back and seat cushion, the indicatorlight above the switches flashes and abeep sounds for about 10 seconds. Re-move the object before operating theseat again.

If the indicator light above the switchesflashes even though there is no objectbetween the seatback and seat cushion,contact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

100


Operation from outside

Operation from inside

RETURNING THIRD SEATS

Push one of the switches shown in theillustrations. The seatback returns to itsoriginal position.

If the indicator light above the switchesflashes three times when the switch ispushed, the returning operation will notstart.


1. Operation from outside only—Open theback door when the ignition key is in“LOCK” or “ACC” and/or the automatictransmission selector lever is in “P”.

2. Lock the seat legs and push anyswitch other than the stowing switch.

Seat operation will stop if any one ofthe switches shown in the illustrationsis pushed. At this time the indicatorlight above the switches comes on anda beep sounds for about 10 seconds.


To continue the returning operation, theseatback must be back to the folded posi-tion first.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

101


CAUTION

When folding or returning the seats,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent personal injury:

Make sure that the seat path isclear before moving the seat. Other-wise, injury may result from contactwith the seat.

Be careful not to allow hands orfeet to get caught or pinched in theseat.

When returning the seats to theiroriginal position, make sure the seatbelts are not twisted or caught in theseatback. It could result in seriousinjuries in a sudden braking or a col-lision.

Do not shift the automatic transmis-sion selector lever out of “P” withthe ignition key in “ON” during theoperation. Doing so may cause thevehicle to move and result in seriouspersonal injury.

This “3RD SEAT” warning light warns thethird seat operation is not yet completewhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position.

The third seats can be stowed by push-ing and holding the stowing switch thatis inside the back door opening on theouter edge of the ceiling.

Before stowing the third seats:


Lower the head restraint to the lowestposition. (See “Head restraints” onpage 106 in this Section.)

Make sure that there is no object onthe seat cushion, floor around theseats and floor of the luggage compart-ment. If an object is caught during theoperation, seat operation will stop.

—Stowing third seat (power seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

102


1. FOLDING/RETURNING SWITCH

The seatback will be folded/returned.(See “—Folding third seats” on page98)

2. RETURNING SWITCH

The seat will be returned from thestowed position by pushing and holdingthis switch.

3. STOWING SWITCH

The seat will be stowed by pushing andholding this switch.

4. SEATBACK ADJUSTING SWITCH

The seatback will be returned. (See“—Folding third seats” on page 98)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

103


STOWING THIRD SEATS

Push and hold the stowing switch. Abeep sounds twice to indicate the startof the operation. The beep soundsagain twice when the operation is com-pleted.

If the indicator light above the switchesflashes while the stowing switch is beingpushed, the stowing operation will notstart.



2. Push and hold the stowing switch.

To operation stops, the indicator lightabove the switches comes on and a beepsounds for about 10 seconds if any of thefollowing condition occur during the opera-tion:

When the stowing switch is released.

When the folding/returning switch, re-turning switch or seatback adjustingswitch is pushed while the stowingswitch is being pushed.

When the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position and the automatic trans-mission selector lever is moved fromthe “P” position.

When the automatic transmission selec-tor lever is in the “N” position and theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.


If an object is caught between the seat-back and seat cushion, the indicatorlight above the switches flashes and abeep sounds for about 10 seconds. Re-move the object before operating theseat again.


If an object is caught between the seatand floor, the object prevents the seatfrom moving. Do not continue the op-eration. Remove the object before oper-ating the seat again.

When the seat is already folded, the seatcan be stowed using the same procedure.If an object is caught between the seat-back and seat cushion, the stowing opera-tion will not start.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

104


After stowing the seats, open the flaps asshown in the illustration.

RETURNING THIRD SEATS

Push and hold the returning switch un-til the seat cushion is locked. A beepsounds twice to indicate the start ofthe operation. Releasing the switchwhen the beep sounds again completesthe operation automatically.

If the indicator light above the switchesflashes while the returning switch is beingpushed, the returning operation will notstart.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

105




2. Push and hold the returning switch.

To operation stops, the indicator lightabove the switches comes on and a beepsounds for about 10 seconds if any of thefollowing condition occur during the opera-tion:

When the returning switch is releasedbefore the seat legs are securelylocked.

When the folding/returning switch, stow-ing switch or seatback adjusting switchis pushed while the returning switch isbeing pushed.

When the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position and the automatic trans-mission selector lever is moved fromthe “P” position.

When the automatic transmission selec-tor lever is in the “N” position and theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.


If an object is caught between the seatand floor, the object prevents the seatfrom moving. Do not continue the op-eration. Remove the object before oper-ating the seat again.


CAUTION

When stowing or returning the seats,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent personal injury:

Make sure that the seat path isclear before moving the seat. Other-wise, injury may result from contactwith the seat.

Be careful not to allow hands orfeet to get caught or pinched in theseat. Be sure to operate the seatsfrom outside the vehicle.

When the indicator above the stowingswitch and returning switch come onor flash, do not continue the opera-tion. An object or a person may becaught in the seat. If a person iscaught, serious injury may result.

When returning the seats to theiroriginal position, make sure the seatbelts are not twisted or caught in theseatback. It could result in death orserious injuries in a sudden brakingor a collision.

Do not shift the automatic transmis-sion selector lever out of “P” withthe ignition key in “ON” during theoperation. Doing so may cause thevehicle to move and result in seriouspersonal injury.

NOTICE

Make sure that the seat path is clearbefore stowing or returning the seat.Otherwise, the seat cushion and seatlegs may be damaged if the seatcomes into contact with the luggage.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

106


This “3RD SEAT” warning light warns thethird seat operation is not yet completewhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position.

Front and second seats

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Third seats—When an occupant sits onthe seat, always pull up the head restraintto the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Head restraints

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

107


To use the armrest, pull it down as shownabove.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move thedial upward (“L” dial for the left frontseat or “R” dial for the right frontseat). At this time, the indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the seat heat-er is operating.

Move the dial upward or downward to ad-just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial downwarduntil it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, movethe dial fully downward.

The key must be in the “ON” position tooperate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

Persons who have sensitive skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,do not use the seat heater with ablanket, cushion, or other insulatingobjects which cover the seat.

Armrests Seat heaters

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

108


NOTICE

Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 139 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

109


CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal co llision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or serious inju-ry.

Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 463in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

110


When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 139 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended event. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

111


Seat belts for seats with outside arm-rests—

Fasten your belt, ensuring that the shoul-der portion of the belt passes over the topof the outside armrest and that the lapportion of the belt passes under the out-side armrest as shown.

CAUTION

Always wear the belt with the shoul-der portion over the outside armrestand the lap portion under the outsidearmrest. Failure to do so may in-crease the chance of death or seriousinjury in an accident.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

112


To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

CENTER SEAT BELT OF THE THIRDSEATS

The center seat belt of the third seats isa 3−point type restraint with 2 buckles.Both seat belt buckles must be correctlylocated and securely latched for properoperation.

Make sure buckle 1 is securely latchedfor ready use of the center seat belt ofthe third seats.

Two buckles and tabs for center seatbelt of the third seats

The two tabs have different shapes toprevent the belt from being buckled in thewrong place.

Buckle 1—Matches the tab with thehooked endBuckle 2—Matches the tab with theconcave end

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

113


CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-rectly located and securely latched.Failure to properly match the buckleand tab may cause death or seriousinjury in case of an accident or acollision.

To release the hooked end tab, insert thekey into the hole on buckle 1 and allowthe belt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the center seat belt of thethird seats with either buckle re-leased. Fastening only the shoulderbelt or lap belt may cause death orserious injury in case of a suddenbraking or a collision.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

114


Second (7−passenger models)

Third

The seat belt buckles of the secondseats (7−passenger models) and thirdseats can be stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed beforeyou fold the seat back.

STOWING THE CENTER SEAT BELT OFTHE THIRD SEATS

To stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the seat belt out of its cov-er. It will automatically roll back part-way. Roll the seat belt backward andinsert it into the slot of its cover asshown above. Make sure the tabs aresecurely locked in the cover.

Seat belt must be stowed before you foldthe seatback.

NOTICE

Stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats when not in use.

—Stowing seat belt buckles ofthe second and third seats

—Stowing the center seat beltof the third seats

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

115


PULLING OUT THE CENTER SEAT BELTOF THE THIRD SEATS

To use the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the tab (1) out, then pull thebelt out a little and pull the tab (2) outfrom the cover.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

The shoulder belt comfort guide for theoutside third seats will provide addedseat belt comfort for children who haveoutgrown child restraints and for smalladults. When the shoulder belt is in-serted through the guide, the comfortguide pulls the belt away from the neckand head of an occupant.

For wearing the seat belt, see “—Fasten-ing front and rear seat belts” on page 109in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twistedand that it lies flat.

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should bekept away from the neck, andshould not fall off the shoulder.Failure to observe these precau-tions could reduce the effectivenessof the seat belt in an accident,causing death or serious injury.

—Seat belt comfort guides

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

116


If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

If the seat belt extender had beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without the driver actuallywearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-er’s airbag system will judge thatthe driver is wearing it. In thiscase, the driver’s airbag may notactivate correctly, causing death orserious injury in the event of colli-sion. Be sure to wear the seat beltwith the seat belt extender.

Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disc onnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front p assengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

—Seat belt extender

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

117


Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

118


The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 135 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

6. Airbag sensor assembly

—Seat belt pretensioners

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

119


The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

Repairs on or near the front seatbelt pretensioner assemblies

Modification of the suspension sys-tem

Modification of the front end struc-ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.This means the seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

120


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front pas-senger occupant classification system,“AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seatbelt buckle switch, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnecting wir-ing and power sources. (For details, see“Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 191 in Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

When the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, the light does not comeon, remains on for more than 6 sec-onds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

If any seat belt does not retract orcannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-tion or activation of the relevant seatbelt pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor etc. The frontpassenger’s airbag system consists of thefront passenger occupant classificationsensor etc.

SRS airbags——SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

121


In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead or chest caused by hitting the ve-hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 135 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 108 in this Sec-tion.

Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 139 in thisSection.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

122


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision fromthe rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

123


The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights



7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor


10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon−toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so im-mediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to; avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

124


CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page58 in this Section.

Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 139 in this Sec-tion.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

125


Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden activationof the system or disable the sys-tem, which could result in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



Modification of the front end struc-ture

Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

126


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.This means the SRS front airbags areoperating properly.





If the light stays on, it indicates that theSRS driver and front passenger airbagsystem and/or front passenger occupantclassification system and “AIRBAG ON”and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights have aproblem. If the light flashes, the SRS sideairbag system and/or curtain shield airbagsystem have a problem.

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

127



The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheelor dashboard (shaded in the illustra-tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver and all win-dow−side passengers in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s and all win-dow−side passengers’ heads.

—SRS side airbags andcurtain shield airbags

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

128


The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put onthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled upregardless of the presence of the occu-pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-ger occupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 135 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or all window−side seat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver and allwindow−side passenger seat beltsystems. To ensure maximumprotection in an accident, the driverand all passengers in the vehiclemust wear their seat belts properly.Wearing a seat belt properly duringan accident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 108 in this Sec-tion.

Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the side window or the areaof the seat, front or side pillars orroof side rail from which the SRSside airbag and curtain shield air-bag deploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page139 in this Section.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

129


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.


2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights

3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

130




The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of front andside pillars, and roof side rails may be hotfor several minutes, but the airbags them-selves will not be hot. The airbags aredesigned to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver and all window−sidepassengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront and side pillars and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

131


Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe seat facing the side window,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

132


Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front or sidepillars, roof side rails and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

133


Do not disassemble or repair thefront or side pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.This means the SRS side airbags andcurtain shield airbags are operatingproperly.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

134








07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

135



Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

The portion of the front pillars, sidepillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 137 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates the following systems;

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passengerseat

Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect theconditions correctly, do not do any ofthe following:

Apply a heavy load to the front pas-senger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-back table, grocery bag hooks, armrestor auxiliary box).

Attach a commercial seatback table,etc. to the front passenger seat seat-back.

Put weight on the front passenger seatby putting your hands or feet on theseatback from the rear passenger seat.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position with the condition 2 inthe table shown below.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

136


If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

The front passenger seatback is incontact with the second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when an adult isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, and with the seatbelt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-ther ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position. After about 4 sec-onds, they will go off. After that, thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem operates and judges which indi-cator light be illuminated.

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

137


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detectedby the front

passenger occupantclassification system

“AIRBAG ON” and“AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “AIRBAG OFF”∗5 Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off DeactivatedActivated

Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated

Activated

Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 139 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)

∗4: In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.∗5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 139 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

138


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a second seat as it may causethe “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lightbe illuminated. If the seatback inter-feres with the second seat, returnthe seatback to a position where itdoes not interfere with the secondseat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disc onnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front p assengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, which could cause deathor serious injury in the event ofcollision.

If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should be illumi-nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illumi-nated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that isnot possible, move the frontpassenger seat fully rearward.

Wear the seat belt properly.

Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

Do not apply a heavy load to thefront passenger seat or equipment(e.g. seatback table, grocery baghooks, armrest or auxiliary box).

Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

139


Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

Child restraint systems installed onthe second seat should not contactthe front seatbacks.

When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 142 in this Section.)

Do not remove the front seats.

Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” onpage 120 and “Child restraint” on page 139in this Section.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 108 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

140


Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean his/her head orany part of his/her body against theside window or the area of theseat, front or side p illars or roofside rails from which the side air-bags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and/orcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured. If it is not se-cured properly, it may cause deathor serious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

141


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 153 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 157 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Child restraint system—Types of child restraintsystem

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

142


(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

—Installation with seat belt

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

143


Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

Same angle

When installing a child restraintsystem in the third seat centerposition, adjust both seatbacks tothe same angle. Otherwise, thechild restraint system cannot be se-curely restrained and this maycause death or serious injuries in acollision.

To install the infant seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

144


CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

145


CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

To remove the infant seat:

Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or older child passenger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

146


Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the ignition key is“ON” and the child is in the child restraintsystem after following these procedures.The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light indi-cates the SRS front passenger airbag andside airbag on the passenger side will notdeploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator lightis illuminated, remove the child restraintsystem and reinstall it with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Ifthe “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illumi-nated when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position, then the SRS front pas-senger airbag and side airbag on the pas-senger side may deploy in an accident.Do not drive the vehicle in this condition.Remove the child restraint system andcontact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

147


CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Move seat fully back


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

148



Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

Same angle


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

149


To install the convertible seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt to retract.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

150


3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


To remove the convertible seat:

Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or older child passenger.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

151


(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

Move seat fully back

CAUTION



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

152


Same angle


To install the booster seat:

Sit the child on a booster seat. Run thelap and shoulder belt through or aroundthe booster seat and across the child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab into thebuckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 108 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

153



To remove the booster seat:

Press the buckle release button and allowthe belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

—Using a top strap (for second seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

154


Anchor brackets


Anchor brackets


Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe second seats to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachsecond seating position.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

155


2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 139 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

3. Replace the head restraint. Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

—Using a top strap (for third seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

156


Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe third seats to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for right andcenter seating position.

TO USE THE ANCHORAGES:

1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 139 in this Section.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

157


CAUTION

Do not replace the head restraintwhen the child restraint system isinstalled. The head restraint may in-terfere with the top strap and thechild restraint system can not besecurely restrained. This may causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the childrestraint system is secure by push-ing and pulling it in different direc-tions. Follow all the installation in-structions provided by its manufac-turer.



The lower anchorages for the child re-straint systems complying with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifica-tions are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the seatcushion of each second seat.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages(for second seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

158


1st lockposition

5th lockposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback. The rearseat legs will disengage. Pushingdownward on the back of the seat,make sure the rear seat legs are re-locked into place. Next pull back theseatback to the 1st lock position(the most upright position). Then ad-just the seatback to the 5th lockposition.

Make sure the seat and seatback arelocked securely. Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

159


2. Turn up the covers for the lower an-chorages. Confirm the position ofthe lower anchorages near the but-ton in the seat cushion.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada— The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for second seats)” on page153 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, en-sure that the seat is moved to therear−most position, with the seat-back close to the child restraintsystem.

After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.

Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second seat if it inter-feres with the lock mechanism ofthe front seats. Otherwise, the childor front seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a co llision.

The lower anchorages for the child re-straint systems complying with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifica-tions are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of the right and center seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages(for third seats)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

160


1st lockposition

11th lockposition

Manual seat

Power seat

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Manual seat—Fold down the seat-back and pull back to the 1st lockposition (the most upright position)until it locks into place. Adjust theseatback to the 11th lock position.

Make sure the seatback is locked se-curely.

Power seat—Fold down the seatbackby pressing the folding/returningswitch. Raise the seatback by press-ing the same switch, the returningswitch or the seatback adjustingswitch. (The seat back will automati-cally stop.) For details of theseswitch operations, see page 98.

Do not touch the switch while the seat-back is moving, because the operationwill stop.

Canada only

Type A

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

161


Canada only

Type B

2. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada— The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for third seats)” on page 155in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

After securing the child restraintsystem, never recline the seat.

Do not put a child restraint systemon the third seat if it interferes withthe lock mechanism of the secondseats. Otherwise, the child or front(or second) seat occupant(s) maybe killed or seriously injured incase of sudden braking or a colli-sion.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

162


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

163


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt and telescopic steering wheel 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

164


To adjust the steering wheel position,push down the lock release lever. Thentilt the steering wheel to the desiredangle, push or pull it to the desiredsteering column length and pull up thelock release lever.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down or for-ward and rearward to make sure itis locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

Tilt and telescopic steeringwheel Outside rear view mirrors—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

165


Vehicles with the auto anti−glare insiderear view mirror—On some models, whenthe inside rear view mirror surface dark-ens in “AUTO” mode, the outside rearview mirror surface also darkens to re-duce the reflection of the headlights of thevehicle behind you. (For details, see “Autoanti−glare inside rear view mirror” on page167 in this Section.)

On some models, when you push the rearwindow defogger switch, the heater panelsin the outside rear view mirrors will quick-ly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rearwindow and outside rear view mirror de-foggers and windshield wiper de−icer” onpage 184 in Section 1−5.)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch ison.

Type A

Type B

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with the driving position memorysystem—The position of the outside rearview mirrors and driver’s seat can bememorized. For details, see “Driving posi-tion memory system” on page 65 in Sec-tion 1−3.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

166


Type A

Type B

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

Type B only—Mirror can be folded whenkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Position 1—To fold the mirrors.Position 2—To return the mirrors back totheir original positions.

The rear view mirrors can be also foldedby pushing backward.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury and anymirror malfunction, do not touchthe mirror while it is moving.

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

—Folding rear view mirrors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

167


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

168


In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off and on the automatic function,push the switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

On vehicles with the vanity lights, the lightwill come on when you open the cover.

VANITY LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is turned off andvanity light stays lighting on, the light willcut off automatically after 20 minutes.

Vanity mirrors

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

169


You can cancel the cut off operation by:

Turning the key to the “ACC” position.

Opening or closing any of front andsliding doors.

Turning off all the “ON” lights.

All the lights are cut off when all the sidedoors and back door are locked by key orwireless remote control transmitter.

The ignition switch must be turned off.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

170


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

171


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight beam level control 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front personal lights 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear personal lights 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior foot lights 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers and windshield

wiper de−icer 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

172


For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

On some models—

For Canada—The tail light indicator lightsup in the instrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

On some models—

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicatorlights up in the instrument cluster.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the lock switch of the wireless remotecontrol transmitter is pushed when all theside doors and back door are alreadylocked, the lights automatically turn offimmediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

173


Daytime Running Light (DRL) system(all models sold in Canada and somemodels sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the headlightscome on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position orposition 1.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

High−Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

174


For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

On some models—

For Canada—The tail light indicator lightsup in the instrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

On some models—

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicatorlights up in the instrument cluster.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

175


Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the lock switch of the wireless remotecontrol transmitter is pushed when all theside doors and back door are alreadylocked, the lights automatically turn offimmediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system(all models sold in Canada and somemodels sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the headlightscome on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position,position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto position 2 or position 3 with the head-lights on, or turn the ignition switch off.

High−Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

176


TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

To adjust the headlight beam level, turnthe dial.

The following list shows examples of prop-er dial settings. For loading conditions oth-er than those listed, adjust the dial posi-tion so that the beam level is the sameas the one obtained according to the listwhen only the driver is in the vehicle. Thehigher the number of the dial position, thelower the headlight beam level.

Always keep the headlight beam at theproper level, or your headlights maydazzle other road users.

Headlight beam level control

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

177


To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

Loading condition and dial position

VariationsLoading conditions

7−passengermodels

8−passengermodels

0 0

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 2

Driver only, or Driver + one passenger in the front seat

Driver + one passenger in the front seat andall passengers in the second seat

All passengers

All passengers + full luggage loading to theluggage compartment

Driver + full luggage loading to the luggagecompartment

Emergency flashers

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

178


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

On some models, with the knob turnedfully clockwise, the intensity of the instru-ment panel lights will not be reduced evenwhen the tail lights/headlights are turnedon.

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

179


Personal light main switch

To turn on the front personal lights,operate the personal light main switch.The lights can be turned on or off bypushing each lens when the personallight main switch is in the “DOOR” or“OFF” position.

The personal light main switch has thefollowing positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or offby pushing each lens.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors or back door is opened.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors or back door is opened, thelight will come on. After all the side doorsand back door are closed, the light re-mains on for about 15 seconds beforefading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

Front personal lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

180



Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

Cancelling the ignition switch linked op-eration.

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at the “DOOR”position for 20 minutes or more.


To turn on the rear personal lights, op-erate the personal light main switch.The lights can be turned on or off bypushing each lens when the personallight main switch is in the “DOOR”position.


“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe sliding doors or back door is opened.


Rear personal lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

181



To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, push the luggage compartmentlight switch upwards. The light turn onwhen the personal light main switch isin the “ON” or “DOOR” position.


“ON”—The light turns on when the lug-gage compartment switch is pushed up-wards.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when the lug-gage compartment switch is pushed up-wards and any of the sliding door or backdoor is opened. The light goes off whenboth the sliding doors and back door areclosed.


For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors and back door isopened or when the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK” position.

The light remains on for about 15 secondsafter all the side doors and back door areclosed.


All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

Luggage compartment light Ignition switch light

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

182


When any of the side doors or back dooris unlocked using either the key or thewireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.


Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 20 minutes or more.

The light will come on when the sidedoors and back door are unlocked simulta-neously using either the key or the wire-less remote control. This light remains onfor 15 seconds before fading out whenany door is opened, and additional 15seconds after all the side doors and backdoor are closed.


Doors are locked with wireless remotecontrol.

The selector lever is put in a positionother than “P” with the ignition switchon.

The doors are locked via the driver’sdoor key cylinder.

The doors are locked via the switcheseither inside the driver’s or front pas-senger’s door.

Exterior foot lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

183


To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

With interval adjuster: The band lets youadjust the wiping time interval when thewiper lever is in the intermittent position(position 1). Twist the band upward toincrease the time between sweeps, anddownward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 503 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Windshield wipers and washer

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

184


To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it. The rear window wip-er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 503 inSection 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratchthe glass.

Do not lift the rear wiper arm awayfrom the window, as it may break.

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurfaces. An indicator light will illuminateto indicate the defogger is operating.

On some models, the rear view mirrordefoggers and/or the windshield wiper de−icer is also operating simultaneously bythis switch. Vehicles with the outside rearview mirror defoggers, the heater panel inthe outside rear view mirrors will quicklyclear the surfaces. Vehicles with the wind-shield wiper de−icer, the windshield wiperblades will be de−iced.

Rear window wiper andwasher

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers andwindshield wiper de−icer

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

185


Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defoggers have operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

Vehicles with outside rear view mirrordefoggers, since the mirror surfacescan get hot, do not touch them whenthe defogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear or the wiperblades have de−iced. Leaving the defog-gers on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

186


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

187


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

188


Low fuel levelwarning light

Type A

Low fuel levelwarning light

Type B

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

Type A

Type B

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

189


The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 436 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Tachometer

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

190


This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—It shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

191


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) or If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

(g) Stop and check.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

192



(h) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all doors.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure. If the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, contactToyota dealer.

(m) Add washer fluid.

(n) Replace engine oil.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

193



(o)

Check if third seat operation is completed.

(o)Third seats warning lightand buzzer

Check if an object is caught between third seat and seatback and/or between thirdseat and floor. If nothing is caught, contact Toyota dealer.

(p) Dynamic laser cruise controlmaster warning light

Check condition according to warning code. If system malfunctions, contact Toyotadealer.

(q) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

194


(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following case:

The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

The light does not come on initiallyeven if the ignition key is turned onwith the parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,the reminder light flashes and buzzersounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fas-tened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,the light continues flashing and the buzzersounds for about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-tened, the buzzer will sound in a differenttone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stop thebuzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzerstill sounds, make sure the front passen-ger’s seat belt is fastened.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

195


(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,the reminder light flashes if a passengersits in the front passenger seat and doesnot fasten the seat belt. Unless the frontpassenger fastens the belt, the light con-tinues flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-tened, the buzzer will sound in a differenttone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stop thebuzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzerstill sounds, make sure the driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash andbuzzer may sound.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, and goes off when the engine isstarted.

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the engine is running, thewarning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the engine isrunning, malfunctions such as the en-gine drive belt being broken may haveoccurred. If the warning light comeson, immediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowing.

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

196


If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 472in Section 6.

(f) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(g) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

197


(h) “ABS” Warning Light

Vehicles without the vehicle stab ilitycontrol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operatebut the brake assist system still operates.In this case, the wheels could lock upduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Vehicles with the vehicle stability con-trol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem works properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle stability control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

198






CAUTION



(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doorsare completely closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags and seat beltpretensioners are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, curtain shield airbag sensorassemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front pas-senger occupant classification system,“AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seatbelt buckle switch, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnecting wir-ing and power sources.


The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds or flashes.




07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

199


(k) “VSC” Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off aftera few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC” warning light comes on even if the“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure ofone or more of your tires (without thespare tire) is low. The light comes onwhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-onds. This indicates that the tire pressurewarning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop yourvehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-sible and check that the inflation pressureof all four tires is as specified on the tireand loading information label. (See“Checking tire inflation pressure” on page487 in Section 7−2.) The light should gooff 3 to 6 minutes after the tire pressureis adjusted.

If the warning light comes on after blink-ing for 1 minute, the tire pressure warningsystem may be malfunctioning. Contactyour Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 214 in Section 1−7.

(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 503 inSection 7−3.)

(n) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutreplacing the engine oil, and if the dis-tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000miles), the light will come on after theignition key is turned to “ON” position.The light will remain on thereafter.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

200


If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 190 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset button.

Hold down the button for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(o) Third Seats Warning Light andBuzzer

“3RD SEAT” Warning light (instrumentcluster)—

This light warns that the third seat opera-tion is not yet complete. Complete thethird seat operation. For details, see“—Folding third seats” on page 98 or“—Stowing third seats” on page 101 inSection 1−3.

Third seats warning light and buzzer(switch)—

This light warns that the third seat opera-tion is not yet completed.

When flashing—An object may be caughtbetween the seat and seatback.

When illuminated—An object may becaught between the seat and floor orswitch is released during the operation.

Remove the object and then operateagain. If nothing is caught when flashing,contact your Toyota dealer.

(p) Dynamic Laser Cruise Control Mas-ter Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the dynamic laser cruisecontrol system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and go off after afew seconds.

When the light comes on, the alarmsounds and the warning code will appearon the display. At this time, dynamic lasercruise control is cancelled. For details,see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 224 in Section 1−7.

(q) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

201


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” and “VSC” warn-ing lights, low tire pressure warninglight, dynamic laser cruise masterwarning light and engine oil replace-ment reminder light go off after a fewseconds. The SRS warning light goesoff after about 6 seconds. (“TRACOFF”, “READY” (dynamic laser cruiseready mode) indicator lights and slipindicator light also comes on and gooff after a few seconds.)

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

202


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

203


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic laser cruise controll 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

204


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 417 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the keyfrom “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. Theselector lever must be put in the “P” posi-tion before pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 13in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

It is not a malfunction if the needle on allmeters and gauges move slightly when thekey is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or“START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

205


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and keyremoval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission

Selector lever

Shift normally.

Shift with the brake pedaldepressed. (The ignition switchmust be in “ON” position.)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

206


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 418 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low, the transmis-sion will not shift into the overdrive geareven in the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

Shift into the “4” position. The trans-mission will downshift to fourth gearand engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models215/65R16 tires

152 km/h (94 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . 225/60R17 tires

156 km/h (96 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . All−wheel drive models

146 km/h (91 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.


94 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225/60R17 tires

96 km/h (60 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . All−wheel drive models

90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.


40 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225/60R17 tires

41 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . All−wheel drive models

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

207


Vehicles with cruise control or dynamiclaser cruise control—When the cruise con-trol is being used, even if you downshiftfrom “D” to “4”, engine braking will not beenabled because the cruise control is notcancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 221 or “Dy-namic laser cruise control” on page 224in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,you can start the vehicle in motion aswith the lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models“3” 162 km/h (100 mph). . . . . . . . “2” 104 km/h (64 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . . .

All−wheel drive models“3” 154 km/h (95 mph). . . . . . . . . “2” 99 km/h (61 mph). . . . . . . . . . “L” 55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . .

Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “4” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

208


(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

Vehicles with rear view monitor system—

When the selector lever is shifted into “R”position with the ignition switch in the“ON” position, rear view monitor systemwill activate. For instructions, see “Rearview monitor system” on page 361 in Sec-tion 1−10.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between fourth gear andoverdrive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-tion. Be sure to shift the selector leverto the “D” position immediately after-ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 455 in Section 4.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

209


The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of frontwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against front wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the traction control system is in theself−check mode, but does not indicate amalfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of thefront wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

Traction control system(two−wheel drive models)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

210


TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in a ditchwhen you are driving on a severe offroad and sand, turn off the tractioncontrol system. This system that con-trols engine performance interferes withthe process of freeing your wheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon.

The vehicle stability control system is al-ways activated, even if the traction controlsystem is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switchonce again.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.

“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on fora few seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the “TRAC OFF” switch toturn off the system.


The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

211






The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC” warning light comeson even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is notpushed.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of 4wheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against 4 wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the traction control system is in theself−check mode, but does not indicate amalfunction.

Traction control system(all−wheel drive models)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

212


When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-tor light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer. “VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.







07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

213


The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as an anti−lock brakesystem, brake assist system, tractioncontrol, engine control, etc. This sys-tem automatically controls the brakesand engine to help prevent the vehiclefrom skidding when cornering on a slip-pery road surface or operating steeringwheel abruptly.

The vehicle stability control system is acti-vated when the vehicle speed is aboutmore than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the system is in the self−check mode,but does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightflashes, an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 490 in Section 7−2.)

In situations where the road surfaceis covered with ice or snow, yourvehicle should be fitted with snowtires or tire chains.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

Vehicle stability controlsystem

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

214


“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or the traction control system.







Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC” warning light comes on even if the“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

The tire pressure warning system warnsyou that the tire inflation pressure islow.

The tire pressure warning system is nota substitute for checking normal tire infla-tion pressure. Check the tire inflationpressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activateimmediately if a blowout or suddenair leakage should occur.

Tire pressure warning system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

215


The tire pressure warning light comes onwhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position and goes off after a fewseconds. This means the tire pressurewarning light is operating properly. If thetire inflation pressure becomes low, thelight comes on again. In this case, adjust-ing the tire inflation pressure will turn offthe light after several minutes. If the lightcomes on after blinking for 1 minute, thetire pressure warning system is not work-ing properly.

Indicatorstatus

Meanings Do this

ONTire inflationpressure islow

Adjust thetire inflationpressure

ON afterblinking for1 minute

Tire pres-sure warn-ing systemmalfunction

Have thesystemchecked atyour Toyotadealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, be sure to observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to doso could cause loss of vehicle controland result in death or serious injury.

Vehicles with run−flat tires:

Decelerate to the lowest appropriatespeed as soon as possible. Do notdrive over 90 km/h (55 mph).

Check and adjust the tire inflationpressure immediately.

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, it is probablethat you have a flat tire. Have thetire replaced by the nearest Toyotadealer.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of the steer-ing wheel or the brakes.

Vehicles with standard tires:

Stop your vehicle in a safe place assoon as possible. Adjust the tireinflation pressure immediately.

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, it is probablethat you have a flat tire. Check thetires. If the tire is flat, change tothe spare tire and have the flat tirerepaired by the nearest Toyota deal-er.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of the steer-ing wheel or the brakes.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

216


The tire pressure warning light may turnon due to natural causes such as naturalair leaks or tire inflation pressure changescaused by temperature. In this case, ad-justing the tire inflation pressure will turnoff the light after several minutes.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. Adjusting the tire inflationpressure will turn off the light.

The compact spare tire is not equippedwith the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warninglight will not turn off even though the flattire is replaced with the spare tire. Re-place the spare tire with the repaired tireand adjust the proper tire inflation pressur-e. The tire pressure warning light will turnoff after several minutes.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label (tireand load information label). (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label(tire and load information label), youshould determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that il-luminates a low tire pressure telltale(tire pressure warning light) when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure telltale (tire pres-sure warning light) illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under−inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under−inflation also re-duces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ab ility.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

217


Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-sure warning system) is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsib ility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder−inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale (tirepressure warning light).

NOTICE

Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as tire pressure warning valveand transmitter will be damaged.

When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror authorized tire dealer. The tirepressure warning valves and trans-mitters will be affected by theinstallation or removal of tires.

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGLIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKINGFOR 1 MINUTE...

If the tire pressure warning light comeson after blinking for 1 minute when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, the tire pressure warning systemis not working properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-ing conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, thesystem will work properly.)

If tires not equipped with tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters areused.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

218


If the ID code on the tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters is notregistered in the tire pressure warningECU.

If electronic devices or facilities usingsimilar radio wave frequencies arenearby.

If a radio set at similar frequencies isin use in the vehicle.

If a window tint that affects the radiowave signals is installed.

If there is a lot of snow or ice on thevehicle, in particular around the wheelsor wheel housings.

If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

If tire chains are used.

If the tire pressure warning light continuesto come on after blinking for 1 minutewhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, have the system checkedby your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tirepressure warning system may not workproperly with some types of tires.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

−Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

−Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

219


−Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

−Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may notcause interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, besure to install tire pressure warning valvesand transmitters. ID codes on the tirepressure warning valves and transmittersare registered in the tire pressure warningECU. When replacing a tire pressurewarning valve and transmitter, it is neces-sary to register the ID code of tire pres-sure warning valve and transmitter. Havethe ID code registered by your Toyotadealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-tem will not work properly. After about 20min−drive, the tire pressure warning lightcomes on after blinking for 1 minute toindicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters must bereplaced, have them replaced by yourToyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters will beaffected by the installation or removalof tires.

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RESETSWITCH

When initializing the system, the presenttire inflation pressure is stored as stan-dard. The tire pressure warning systemdetermines decreased air pressure bycomparing the present and the standardtire inflation pressures. When you changethe set tire inflation pressure, it is neces-sary to initialize the tire pressure warningsystem.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

220


To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place andturn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. (See “Tires” on page517 in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

4. Push and hold the tire pressure warn-ing reset switch until the tire pressurewarning light blinks slowly three times.

5. Wait for several minutes with the igni-tion key “ON”, and then turn the igni-tion key to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-tion.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchwhile vehicle is moving, initialization is notperformed.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchaccidentally and initialization is performed,adjust the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level and initialize the systemagain.

If the tire pressure warning light does notblink slowly three times when you pushand hold the reset switch, initialization hasfailed and the tire pressure warning sys-tem may not work properly. In this case,initialize the system again. If initializationcannot be performed, have the systemchecked at your Toyota dealer.

If turned ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position before the initialization isfinished, the tire pressure warning lightmay blink 3 times the next time the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

CAUTION

Do not push the reset switch withoutadjusting the tire inflation pressure tothe specified level. Otherwise, the tirepressure warning light may not comeon even if the tire inflation pressureis low, or it may come on when thetire inflation pressure is actually nor-mal.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

221


Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control is designed to main-tain a set cruising speed without requir-ing the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruising speed can be set to anyspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-ties, cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades. However, changes in ve-hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

Be careful about vehicle speed asit may increase when driving down-hill with the cruise control on.

Parking brake Cruise control

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

222


TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument panel will come onto indicate that the cruise control is opera-tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” buttonagain turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed must be reset when the cruise con-trol is turned on again.

When the ignition is turned off, the systemis also automatically turned off. To usecruise control again, press the “ON−OFF”button again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, turn the system offwhen it is not in use. Make sure the“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” or “4”before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

223


If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarilycancelled by the driver or by the systemitself under certain circumstances. Tempo-rary cancellation allows the set cruisingspeed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-celled by doing the following:

Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it

Depressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruisecontrol is temporarily cancelled:

When vehicle speed falls below 40km/h (25 mph)

When vehicle stability control is acti-vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-trol is cancelled and the set speed iserased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains onto indicate that the system is still in op-eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-celled, the cruising speed can be resumedby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, withthe cruise control on, engine braking willnot be enabled because the cruise controlis not cancelled. To decrease the vehiclespeed, reset to a slower speed with thecruise control lever or depress the brakepedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruisecontrol is cancelled.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

224


CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flasheswhen using the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

Dynamic laser cruise control allows youto drive at a selected cruising speedover about 45 km/h (28 mph) with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal, maintain-ing an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicledistance.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control in order to avoidserious injury or death, or to preventaccidents or to control the vehicle’sspeed in emergency situations. Donot use cruise control except in ap-propriate road and traffic conditions.Always drive carefully and attentively.Before using dynamic laser cruisecontrol, read and understand the fol-lowing instructions.

Steering wheel

Instrument cluster

Dynamic laser cruise control—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

225


1. Cruise control switch

2. Distance switch

3. Display

4. “NORM.” indicator light (conventional cruise control modeindicator light)

5. “CRUISE” indicator light

6. “READY” indicator light (ready mode indicator light)

7. Master warning light

Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion has two cruise control modes.

Vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode for maintaining an appropriatedistance between vehicles

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode for cruising at preset speeds

You can change the mode by using thecontrol lever.

The two cruise control modes function dif-ferently. If you use dynamic laser cruisecontrol, always confirm which mode is se-lected.

For the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode, see “—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode” on page 226. For the con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode, see “—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode” on page 236.

—Dynamic laser cruise controlmodes

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

226


The system’s laser radar sensor detectsthe reflectors of vehicles and measuresthe vehicle−to−vehicle distance. Thedetection range of the sensor is about120 m (400 ft.) ahead.

CAUTION

Dynamic laser cruise control is not acollision−avoidance system and willnot prevent accidents. Dynamic lasercruise control is a vehicle speed con-trol device that is intended for useonly on freeways or roads where thetraffic is light or moderate. To avoidserious injury, you must use cautionand be attentive to road and trafficconditions while using dynamic lasercruise control.

DYNAMIC LASER CRUISE CONTROLOPERATIONS

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion operates automatically and depend-ing on whether a vehicle is detectedahead may change the speed of yourvehicle as follows.

If no vehicle is running ahead of you—

1. Cruising at a fixed speed: If there isno vehicle detected ahead, yourcruising speed is maintained at thepreset speed from about 45 km/h (28mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). Thepreset speed is displayed in thedisplay. For the vehicle speed setting,see “SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED”on page 230.

—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

227


If a vehicle is detected ahead of you—

2. Deceleration cruising function: If aslower moving vehicle is detectedahead of you, your vehicle cruisingspeed decreases within the range ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135km/h (85 mph). The display shows thepreset speed, the detected vehicleahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicledistance. If your vehicle gets closer tothe vehicle ahead because of insuffi-cient automatic deceleration, then thealarm warns you to also manually ap-ply brakes.

3. Follow−up cruising function: After de-celeration, your vehicle cruising speedchanges in proportion to the speed ofthe vehicle ahead to maintain an ap-propriate distance from your vehicle tothe vehicle ahead. The vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance can be changed. For de-tails, see “CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCE” on page 233.

4. Acceleration cruising function: If thevehicle ahead changes lanes, your ve-hicle cruising speed will be graduallyincreased up to the preset speed, andyour vehicle resumes fixed−speedcruising.

This system operates by detecting pri-marily the reflectors of the vehicleahead. The distance may not be accu-rately or absolutely detected in the fol-lowing cases:

The vehicle ahead has higher groundclearance, which means that theplacement of the reflectors is in ahigher position.

The rear section of the vehicle aheadis extremely dirty.

The vehicle ahead or other vehiclesaround you are flinging up water orsnow.

Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke)is coming from the vehicle ahead orother vehicles around you, obscuringyour front view.

There is an obstruction (protectivefilm, sticker, etc.) on the reflectorson the vehicle ahead, or reflectorsare not installed on the vehicleahead or are damaged.

Heavy luggage in the luggagecompartment or rear seats is caus-ing the nose of your vehicle to tiltup.

CAUTION

To avoid accidents, always keep thelaser radar sensor glass clean andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front. (See “LASERRADAR SENSOR” on page 234.)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

228


CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control. Observe the fol-lowing precautions in order to avoidserious injury or death:

Under certain conditions where thevehicle in front slows drastically, oris stopped, the dynamic laser cruisecontrol will neither warn you nordecelerate. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that suffi-cient vehicle−to−vehicle distance ismaintained.

Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol in the following conditions:

In bad weather (such as rain, fog,snow, sandstorms or direct sun-light, or when raindrops or snow-flakes get on the laser radar sensorglass), the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance will not be measured accura-tely.

When using the windshield wipersat high or low speeds the dynamiclaser radar cruise control turns off.

On roads with heavy traffic orsharp bends, an appropriate speedcannot be maintained and an acci-dent may occur.

On slippery road surfaces (icy orsnow−covered road surfaces), thetires will race and you will be un-able to control the vehicle.

When there is no vehicle detectedahead on steep downhill slopes, thepreset speed will be easily exceed-ed because of inefficient enginebraking. (In this case, automaticbraking will not work.) If there is avehicle detected ahead, the delay indeceleration timing could cause se-rious injury or death.

When the alarm sounds frequently(because acceleration or decelera-tion was repeated or sufficient ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance was notmaintained), an appropriate vehiclespeed cannot be attained and anaccident may occur.

On roads with steep and short in-clines and declines, failure to de-tect the vehicle ahead will shortenthe distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead and an acci-dent may occur.

Deceleration cruising function andapproach warning do not operatewhen the vehicle ahead is at a stopor driving very slowly.

If the vehicle ahead of you deceler-ates abruptly or if another vehiclecuts in ahead of you, your vehiclemay collide with the vehicle aheadunless you manually depress thebrake pedal to slow down your ve-hicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

229


Depending on the road configura-tion (curved, left and right continu-ous curved, the start or end of acurve, or narrow driving lanes dueto road construction) or your ve-hicle condition (steering wheel ma-neuvering, position in the lane, orunstable driving because of an acci-dent or breakdown), vehicles in oth-er lanes or surrounding objectsmay be detected, resulting in a con-trol failure or the approach warningactivation. This may also result ina very close distance between vehi-cles due to a failure to detect thevehicle ahead.

Dynamic laser cruise control should notbe used in circumstances which are inap-propriate for any cruise control, such asentering free way on−ramps or off−ramps.

CAUTION

Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol when exiting from or whenentering or merging onto a freeway.When you are following a slowermoving vehicle and exiting, the sen-sor does not detect the vehicle andwill accelerate to the preset speed.

If other vehicles are driving outsideof the laser radar detection range,a delay in the detection of the ve-hicle cutting in at short range orfailure to detect a motorcycle run-ning on the side of the same lanewill occur. In this case, the dynamiclaser cruise control system will notfunction properly.

When a slower vehicle in front ofyou leaves the lane, the dynamiclaser cruise control will no longerdetect a vehicle ahead and will at-tempt to accelerate the vehicle tothe faster preset speed.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

230



To turn the dynamic laser cruise controlon, turn the “ON−OFF” button on. The“CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights onthe instrument panel will come on to indi-cate that the vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode is operational. Pressing the“ON−OFF” button again turns the systemoff.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed and vehicle−to−vehicle distancemust be reset when the vehicle−to−vehicledistance control mode is turned on again.

When the ignition is turned off, the systemis also automatically turned off. To usedynamic laser cruise control again, pressthe “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.

When the ignition is turned off, all thepreset data is cleared. When you use thedynamic laser cruise control again, youneed to reset the data.

CAUTION




Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. At this time, the displayindicates settings such as the preset ve-hicle speed, whether a vehicle is presentahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance. If there is no vehicle detectedahead, the display does not indicate thevehicle ahead. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

231


If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe control prior to acceleration.

You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates one ofthe warning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3”. Ifany of the above codes appears on thedisplay, see “VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE CONTROL MODE FAILUREWARNING” on page 235.

CANCELLING THEVEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

The vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode may be temporarily cancelled by thedriver or by the system itself under cer-tain circumstances. Temporary cancellationallows the set cruising speed and vehicle−to−vehicle distance to remain in memory.

The vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode can be temporarily cancelled by do-ing the following:



Under certain circumstances, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is tempo-rarily cancelled:



The “READY” indicator light comes on toindicate that the system is still in opera-tion.

To turn the system off, press the “ON−OFF” button. Make sure the “CRUISE” in-dicator light is off.

If one of the warning codes “E1”, “E2” or“E3” appears on the display, the presetspeed automatically cancels out. See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” onpage 235.

If the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode automatically cancels out other thanfor the above cases, have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer at the ear-liest opportunity.

RESUMING THE VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE CONTROL MODE

If the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode is temporarily cancelled, the cruisingspeed and vehicle−to−vehicle distance canbe resumed by pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction.


During follow−up cruising, if there are novehicles ahead because they havechanged lanes, your vehicle will accelerategradually up to the preset speed. At thistime, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction will quickly speed up your ve-hicle in vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

232



Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. The displayed speed will in-crease in increments of 5 mph (for theU.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually in-crease to the display speed.


CAUTION

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol is on, your cruising speed isregulated in proportion to the speedof the vehicle ahead, so increasingthe preset speed using the controllever does not accelerate the vehicle.However, if the vehicle ahead leavesthe lane, your cruising speed will in-crease to the preset speed becausethe preset speed has been set higherusing the control lever. Confirm thesetting on the display.


Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. The displayed speed willdecrease in increments of 5 mph (for theU.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually de-crease to the display speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

If the control lever is released when thevehicle speed exceeds the upper limit ofthe preset speed traveling downhill whileyou are pushing the lever down, the sys-tem will memorize the upper limit of thepreset speed as a preset speed.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4” inthe vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode, engine braking will not be enabledbecause this mode is not cancelled. Todecrease the vehicle speed, reset to aslower speed with the cruise control leveror depress the brake pedal. If you use thebrake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

233


CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE

You can select one of the following ve-hicle−to−vehicle distances.

1. LONG2. MIDDLE3. SHORT

Each time you pull the distance switchbriefly toward you, the setting changesfrom LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT andthen back to LONG. You can confirm thesetting on the display.

Your vehicle speed changes in proportionto the speed of the vehicle ahead, main-taining the selected distance. However, ifthe vehicle ahead is slower, the selecteddistance will be shorter than the desig-nated distance.

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-trol mode is activated or the “READY”indicator comes on, the vehicle−to−vehicledistance setting can be changed.

The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is alwaysset to LONG when the ignition switch isturned on.

Select the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-sidering traffic conditions. The approximatevehicle−to−vehicle distance based on timeinterval when driving at 88 km/h (55 mph)is shown below:

LONG about 75 m (245 ft.). . . . . . . . . . . MIDDLE about 50 m (165 ft.). . . . . . . . . . SHORT about 30 m (100 ft.). . . . . . . . . .

If the vehicle speed is slower than 88km/h (55 mph), the distance will be short-er than the above.

During long downhill driving, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be shorter thanthe selected distance.

BRAKING CONTROL

Dynamic laser cruise control is not a colli-sion avoidance system. If the approachwarning is activated, depress the brakepedal to decelerate to ensure an appropri-ate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.

If you are getting closer to the vehicleahead at a relatively higher speed thanthat of the vehicle ahead or if enginebraking cannot be applied properly, brak-ing control is automatically activated.

Braking control is operating only when thevehicle−to−vehicle distance control modeis selected and your vehicle speed ex-ceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph). If thespeed decreases below about 40 km/h (25mph), braking control will cease, requiringthe manual application of brakes.

CAUTION

Braking control will not ensure thatyour vehicle will reduce speed ap-propriately. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that sufficientvehicle−to−vehicle distance is main-tained.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

234


APPROACH WARNING

While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, if the ve-hicle ahead decelerates abruptly or ifanother vehicle cuts in ahead of you, in-adequate braking will make your vehiclebecome closer to the vehicle ahead of youand the display will flash and beep.

CAUTION

If the display flashes and beeps,you must depress the brake pedalto slow down to avoid a collisionor maintain sufficient vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance.

In the following conditions, the ap-proach warning may not turn oneven if the vehicle drives closer tothe vehicle ahead, and an accidentmay occur:

Your vehicle and the vehicle aheadare cruising at almost the samespeed.

The vehicle ahead is cruising at afaster speed than yours. (The dis-tance between the vehicles will be-come longer.)

The vehicle ahead is at a stop ordriving very slowly. Pay specialattention to a very slow vehicle atthe end of the line in heavy trafficor at a tollgate.

The speed has just been set.

The accelerator pedal is depressedor has just been released.

LASER RADAR SENSOR

The laser radar sensor is used for ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control cruis-ing.

If dirt is on the sensor glass, thedynamic laser cruise control function isautomatically cancelled and a warningcode appears on the display. (See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING”on page 235.)

However, if the glass sensor is coveredwith icicle or any substance, dirt maynot be detected.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

235


Before driving in the vehicle−to−vehicledistance control mode, make sure theradar sensor glass is clean.

This product is a class I laser productcomplied with 21 C.F.R part 1040.10and 1040.11.

CAUTION

To ensure that dynamic laser cruisecontrol will function properly whiledriving, observe the following:

Always keep the laser radar sensorglass clean. When cleaning, use asoft cloth and be careful not todamage the sensor.

Avoid strong impacts around the la-ser radar sensor. An incorrect laserradar sensor alignment will result insystem malfunction. A special de-vice is required to adjust the laserradar sensor alignment. Be sure tohave the sensor adjusted by yourToyota dealer.

Do not affix a sticker (including atransparent sticker) or attach an ac-cessory around the laser radar sen-sor.

VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble somewhere in the dy-namic laser cruise control while the ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control mode ison, the master warning light comes onand the alarm sounds, and one of thewarning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3” will ap-pear on the display. Dynamic laser cruisecontrol is automatically cancelled.

If “E3” appears on the display, the“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrumentcluster also flashes.

If “E1” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty laserradar sensor glass while the dynamic la-ser cruise control is on.

If this code appears, clean the sensorglass with a soft cloth and try setting thepreset speed again. If the dirt is removedwithout cleaning, the system will automati-cally enter the ready mode.

If the system does not enter the readymode even after cleaning or the code re-mains on the display, the system might bemalfunctioning. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Always keep the sensor glass andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

236


If “E2” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the followingconditions:

The wipers are operating at high or lowspeeds

Direct sunlight from the front

It is difficult to make a measurementbecause of bad weather (such as rainy,foggy, or snowy weather)

In the following cases, dynamic lasercruise control switches to the ready mode:

The wipers are stopped or areswitched to intermittent operation.

No direct sunlight from the front

In the above conditions, push the lever upin the “+ RES” direction and release it.Dynamic laser cruise control will be re-stored. If the setting operation cannot beperformed or if the warning code still ap-pears even after the weather clears, thesystem might have malfunctioned. Al-though there is no problem to continuedriving, contact your Toyota dealer.

If “E3” appears on the display, a systemmalfunction has been detected.

If this code appears, stop your vehicle ina safe place, turn the ignition off, andthen restart it to reset the system. If thesetting still cannot be made or the samecode appears again, the system mighthave malfunctioned. Although there is noproblem to continue driving, contact yourToyota dealer.

The conventional cruise control mode isdesigned to maintain a set cruisingspeed without requiring the driver tooperate the accelerator. Cruising speedcan be set to any speed above 45 km/h(28 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-ties, cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades. However, changes in ve-hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

In the conventional cruise controlmode, the approach warning doesnot activate and no alarm willsound even if you are too close tothe vehicle ahead, as neither thepresence of the vehicle ahead northe vehicle−to−vehicle distance isdetected. Pay special attention tothe distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead. Always con-firm the setting in the display.

—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

237


Do not use the conventional modein the following conditions, or seri-ous injury or death could result:

To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use conven-tional cruise control mode when us-ing dynamic laser cruise controlwhile driving in heavy or varyingtraffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy orsnow−covered) or winding roads.

Be careful about vehicle speed asit may increase when driving down-hill with the conventional cruisecontrol mode selected. TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the conventional cruise controlmode on, turn the “ON−OFF” button on.The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicatorlights on the instrument panel will comeon. Push the lever in the “MODE” direc-tion for longer than 1 second to changeto conventional cruise control mode. Theindicator on the instrument panel is asshown. You can now set the cruisingspeed. Pressing the “ON−OFF” buttonagain turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed must be reset when the convention-al cruise control mode is turned on again.

However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode activates and is used,it cannot be changed to the conventionalcruise control mode using the above op-eration. To change the mode, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on. Nextpush the lever in the “MODE” direction forlonger than about 1 second.

To change to the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode from the conventionalcruise control mode, push the lever in the“MODE” direction for longer than about 1second.

CAUTION


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

238




Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed and the display shows thepreset speed. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe speed set prior to acceleration.

You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates thewarning code “E3”. If this code appearson the display, see “CONVENTIONALCRUISE CONTROL MODE FAILUREWARNING” on page 239.

CANCELLING THE CONVENTIONALCRUISE CONTROL MODE

The conventional cruise control mode maybe temporarily cancelled by the driver orby the system itself under certain circum-stances. Temporary cancellation allows theset cruising speed to remain in memory.

The conventional cruise control mode canbe temporarily cancelled by doing the fol-lowing:



Under certain circumstances, the conven-tional cruise control mode is temporarilycancelled:



When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the set speed, the convention-al cruise control mode is cancelled andthe set speed is erased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains onto indicate that the system is still in op-eration.

To turn the system off, press the “ON−OFF” button. Make sure the “CRUISE” in-dicator light is off.

If the conventional cruise control modeautomatically cancels out other than forthe above cases, have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer at the ear-liest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CONVENTIONALCRUISE CONTROL MODE

If the conventional cruise control mode istemporarily cancelled, the cruising speedcan be resumed by pushing the lever upin the “+ RES” direction.


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

239



Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.



Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever down in the “− SET”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.


Even if you downshift from “D” to “4” inthe conventional cruise control mode, en-gine braking will not be enabled becausethis mode is not cancelled. To decreasethe vehicle’s speed, reset to a slowerspeed with the cruise control lever or de-press the brake pedal. If you use thebrake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

CONVENTIONAL CRUISE CONTROLMODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble in the conventionalcruise control mode, the “CRUISE” indica-tor light in the instrument cluster flashes,the master warning light comes on andthe alarm sounds, the warning code “E3”will appear on the display.

If a system malfunction is detected whenthe conventional cruise control mode is inthe ready mode or operating, the masterwarning light comes on, an alarm soundsand the above code appears.

If this code appears, press the “ON−OFF”button to turn the system off and thenpush it again to turn it on. If the settingstill cannot be made or the same codeappears again, the system might havemalfunctioned. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

240


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

241


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video system operating hints 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

242


Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2−1: AM·FM radio/compact disc play-er with changer (with XM satellite radio ∗

controller)

Type 2−2: AM·FM radio/compact disc play-er with changer (with XM satellite radio ∗

controller)∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyotadealer for details.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.


Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2”,“DISC·AUX” or “LOAD” to turn on thatfunction without pushing “PWR·VOL”.

You can turn on each player by insertinga compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe compact disc. If the audio system waspreviously off, then the entire audio sys-tem will be turned off when you eject thecompact disc. If another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

243


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2”,“DISC·AUX” “LOAD” if the system is al-ready on but you want to switch from onefunction to another.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITERADIO BROADCAST ∗ (type 2−1 and 2−2)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-lents) must be purchased and installed. Asubscription to the XM satellite radio ser-vice is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM satelliteradio

An XM satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM radio, visit XM on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listen-er Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM ra-dio is solely responsible for the quality,availability and content of the satellite ra-dio services provided, which are subjectto the terms and conditions of the XMradio customer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-low.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM Sat-ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM sat-ellite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM service or when reportinga problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-phanumeric characters appears. If you se-lect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel (000) alter-nates the display between the radio IDand the specific radio ID code.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

244


TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

SRS (type 1 and type 2−1)

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUSand SRS TruBass audio enhancementtechnologies, under license from SRSLabs, Inc., in all mode except AM radiomode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol aretrademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.FOCUS and TruBass technologies areincorporated under license from SRSLabs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange (type 2−2) and basslevels. In fact, different kinds of musicand vocal programs usually sound betterwith different mixes of treble, midrangeand bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has the mast type antenna oron−glass antenna printed on the inside ofthe rear quarter window.

Mast type antenna—To remove an anten-na, carefully turn it counterclockwise.

NOTICE

Mast type antenna:To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed beforedriving your Toyota through an au-tomatic car wash.

On−glass antenna:Putting a film (especially a conduc-tive or metallic film) on the rearwindow will noticeably reduce thesensitivity of the radio.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

245


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2−1 and 2−2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. This compact disc play-er can store up to six discs. The playerwill play from track 1 through to the endof the disc. Then it will play from track1 of the next disc.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc changer. Insertonly one compact disc into slot ata time.

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.

CAUTION

Laser products

Do not take this unit apart or at-tempt to make any changes your-self. This is an intricate unit thatuses a laser pickup to retrieve in-formation from the surface of com-pact discs. The laser is carefullyshielded so that its rays remain in-side the cabinet. Therefore, nevertry to disassemble the player or al-ter any of its parts since you maybe exposed to laser rays and dan-gerous voltages.

This product ut ilizes a l aser. Useof controls or adjustments or per-formance of procedures other thanthose specified herein may result inhazardous radiation exposure.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

246


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and featuresType 1

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

247


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The button num-ber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The button num-ber and station frequency will appear onthe display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer canbe turned on by turning the knob. In addi-tion, turning the knob allows you to selectfrom LOW, MID, and HIGH volume andtone settings. The ASL system automati-cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-dance with ambient noise levels. Thishelps ensure an optimal listening experi-ence even when road, wind or other ambi-ent noise levels rise.

RSE: Vehicles with a rear seat entertain-ment system—The system can be locked.For details, see page 280 in this Section.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

248


DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-tem—

The “DISC·AUX” button may also be usedto operate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC·AUX” button changes between theCD player and DVD player. When theDVD player is in operation, “AUX” appearson the display.

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX(external device) modes, press the“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is onlyavailable when AUX adapter is connectedto the system. When the AUX adapter isin use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc youwant to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

MP3/FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push either side of the “MP3/FOLDER”several times until the number of the fold-er you want to listen to appears on thedisplay.

To jump to the first file in the currentfolder:Push and hold the “” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

249


PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

250


MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up or down theband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenmove to the next preset station. To stopscanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upor down the station band, stay there for5 seconds, and then scan again to thenext station. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan up or down allthe tracks on the disc you are listening to.To stop scanning, push this button again.If the player scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changercan be scanned up only.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “ SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upthe first track of the next disc. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the discs, it willstop scanning.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

251


MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “” or “” side of the“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “” or “” side of the“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the down side of the button onetime.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “” or “” side of the“SEEK/TRACK” button.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”several times until the file you want tolisten to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent file, push the “” side of the but-ton one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:If you want to fast forward or reverse thedisc, push and hold it until you hear abeep. When you release the button, theplayer will resume playing.



ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

252


TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the frequency. Turn the knobcounterclockwise to step down the fre-quency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turnthe knob counterclockwise to file down.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

253



Type 2−1

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

254



Type 2−2

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

255


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FMstations for each button. (The display willshow “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM·SAT”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XM satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune inthe desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe channel to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-ton for the channel you want. The presetbutton number and channel number willappear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channelsfor each button. (The display will show“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push“AM·SAT” button.)∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (presetbutton 3) or “” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be canceled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XM satellite ra-dio ∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the AM or XM band.“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,your audio system will display the follow-ing error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

The XM antenna is not connected.Check whether the XM antenna cableis attached securely.

A short−circuit occurs in the antenna orthe surrounding antenna cable. See aToyota certified dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

256


“UPDATING”:

You have not subscribed to the XMsatellite radio. The radio is being up-dated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM satellite radio for sub-scription information. When a contact iscanceled, you can choose the “CH000”and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected isnot authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it doesnot change automatically, select anoth-er channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM sat-ellite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is tooweak at the current location. Wait untilyour vehicle reaches a location with astronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audioor program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected isnot broadcasting any programming. Selectanother channel.

“− − −”: The channel you selected is nolonger available. Wait for about 2 secondsuntil the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not changeautomatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is alsoavailable on the phone, please call (800)967−2346 during the following hours:Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. East-ern TimeSunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

Type 2−1—





ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer canbe turned on by turning the knob. TheASL system automatically adjusts volumeand tone in accordance with ambient noiselevels. This helps ensure an optimal lis-tening experience even when road, windor other ambient noise levels rise.


Type 2−2—


MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.




07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

257


SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or“SURROUND OFF” will appear on thedisplay.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer canbe turned on by turning the knob. In addi-tion, turning the knob allows you to selectfrom LOW, MID, and HIGH volume andtone settings. The ASL system automati-cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-dance with ambient noise levels. Thishelps ensure an optimal listening experi-ence even when road, wind or other ambi-ent noise levels rise.


DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.


The “DISC·AUX” button may also be usedto operate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC·AUX” button changes between theCD player and DVD player. When theDVD player is in operation, “AUX” appearson the display.

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX(external device) modes, press the“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is onlyavailable when AUX adapter is connectedto the system. When the AUX adapter isin use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages


“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

258


DISC

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen to appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on). When theindicators on both sides of the slot turngreen, insert the first compact disc. Afterthe disc is loaded, the shutter of the slotwill close. After a few seconds, the shut-ter will automatically open again and theindicators will turn green so the next disccan be inserted. The same process canbe applied for loading the rest of thediscs. If the player is full of discs, “DISCFULL” will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

259


MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

260


SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up or down theband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenmove to the next preset station. To stopscanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upor down the station band, stay there for5 seconds, and then scan again to thenext station. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again.


You can either scan the currently selectedchannel category or scan only the presetchannels for that band.

To scan the preset channels:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on thedisplay. The radio will tune in the nextpreset channel up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset channel. To stop scanning, pushthis button again.

To scan the currently selected channelcategory:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next channel in thesame channel category up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan again.To stop scanning, push this button again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan up or down allthe tracks on the disc you are listening to.To stop scanning, push this button again.If the player scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer ofseparate unit can be scanned up only.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “ SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upor down the first track of the next disc.To stop scanning, push this button again.If the auto changer has scanned all thediscs, it will stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer ofseparate unit can be scanned up only.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

261


MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “” or “” side of the“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.


To select the next channel within the cur-rent channel category, push the “” or“” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.Repeat until a desired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “” or “” side of the“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the down side of the button onetime.



07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

262


MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”several times until the file you want tolisten to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent file, push the “” side of the but-ton one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:If you want to fast forward or reverse thedisc, push and hold it until you hear abeep. When you release the button, theplayer will resume playing.



ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

XM satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, thedisplay changes as follows: CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAMTITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If there is no song/program title or artistname/feature associated with the channelat that time, “− − − − −” will appear on thedisplay.

This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM satelliteradio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to therespective audio services.∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM


∗2: Text Information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

263


TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

Radio


When you push the “” or “” side ofthe “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receivinga XM channel, the current channel cate-gory appears on the display.

When the channel category appears, pusheither “” or “” side of the“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to thenext or previous category.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


MP3/WMA player

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push either side of the “TYPE/FOLDER”several times until the number of the fold-er you want to listen to appears on thedisplay.

To jump to the first file in the currentfolder:Push and hold the “” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the frequency. Turn the knobcounterclockwise to step down the fre-quency.


Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the channel. Turn the knob coun-terclockwise to step down the channel.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turnthe knob counterclockwise to file down.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

264


By inserting a mini plug into the AUXadapter, you can listen to music from aportable audio device through the vehicle’sspeaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to theAUX mode (external device mode) bypressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When theAUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appearon the display. To adjust the volume, turnthe “PWR·VOL” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet or cigarettelighter, noise may occur during playback.If this happens, use the power source ofthe portable audio device.

If you install an audio system other thana genuine audio system, you will not beable to use the AUX adapter.

AUX adapter

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

265


Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “” switch


Audio remote controls (steering switches)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

266


1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-ume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “−” to decrease the volume. Thevolume continues to decrease while theswitch is being pushed.

2. “ ” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “” or “”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “” or “” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release from theswitch, the radio will begin seeking up ordown for a station. Do this again to findthe next station.


To select a preset channel, push the “”or “” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “” or “”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “” side of the switch once, quickly.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “” or “” side of the switch.


Push and hold the “” or “” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

MP3/WMA player

Use this switch to select a desired file ordisc.

To select a desired file:Quickly push and release the “” or “”side of the switch until the file you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current file, pushthe “” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired disc:Push and hold the “” or “” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “” or “” side of the switch.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

267



Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-dio mode. Each push changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is readyto use. The DVD player will be selectableif a rear seat entertainment system isinstalled in your vehicle.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

268


The rear seat entertainment system con-sists of the following components.

1. Headphone volume control dials andheadphone jacks

2. DVD player

3. Rear seat entertainment system display

4. Front audio system

5. Power outlet main switch

6. Power outlets

7. A/V input adapter

8. Rear seat entertainment systemcontroller

Rear seat entertainment system—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

269


The rear seat entertainment system is de-signed for the rear passengers to enjoyaudio and DVD video separately from thefront audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated when the ignition key is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid-eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CDand MP3.

The rear seat entertainment system canplay DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CDtext, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc isloaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound whenyour personal audio system is connectedto the input terminal adapter. For details,refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainmentsystem with commercial headphone. See“—Headphone jacks” on page 308 in thisSection for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-tainment system with a wireless head-phone. The wireless headphone can beused within rear seat. If the signal be-comes weak, the headphone will mute.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not operate a motor vehiclewhile using headphones. Doing somay cause an accident, resulting indeath or serious injury.

With DVD player:

Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

270


To open the display, push the lock releasebutton.

Pull the display down to an easily view-able angle (between 90 and 125)

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with adry soft cloth. If the screen is pushedby hand or wiped with a hard cloth,the surface of the screen may bescratched.

To close, push the display up until youhear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-cally turned off when the display isclosed. However, the rear seat entertain-ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, close the display whenit is not in use.

—Display

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

271


NOTICE

Benzene or alkaline solutions maydamage the coated surface of thescreen .

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not turn on the rearseat entertainment system longerthan necessary when the engine isnot running.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated with the rear seat entertain-ment system remote control and buttonson the DVD player unit. The system can-not be operated by touching the switcheson the screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the re-mote control. It may cause an acci-dent, fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the remote control away fromdirect sunlight, high heat and highhumidity. These conditions couldcause the case to deform or the bat-tery to explode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE REMOTECONTROL(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the remotecontrol with an insulating sheet, whichprevents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the remote con-trol, remove the insulating sheet ac-cording to the following procedure.

—Rear seat entertainmentsystem remote control

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

272


1. Remove the cover of the remote con-trol as shown.

2. Remove the insulating sheet.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

273


USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-tem remote control, direct the signaloutput portion of the remote control tothe signal reception portion of the rearseat entertainment system display.

The remote control does not operate prop-erly when the signal reception portion ofthe display is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the remote controlin the console box or front seat sidetable when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise theremote control may be damaged.

Do not drop or strongly knock theremote control against hard objects.

Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the remote control.

Do not leave the remote control ex-posed to high temperatures (suchas on the instrument panel) for along time.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

274


1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to usethe video signal from an external videodevice.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

6. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

7. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

8. “ ” button

This button fast forwards a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

—Control buttonsRemote control

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

275


9. “ ” button

This button stops a screen when theDVD player is operated.

10. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set upscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

11. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screenfor DVD video when the DVD player isoperated.

12. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-dio screen when the DVD player isoperated.

13. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-title screen when the DVD player isoperated.

14. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,contrast and brightness of the screen.

15. “SIZE” button

This button changes the display modewhen the DVD player is operated.

16. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of thescreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

17. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title searchscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selectionscreen for DVD video when the DVDplayer is operated.

19. “ ” button

This button reverse a screen when theDVD player is operated.

20. “ ” button

This button plays or pauses a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

21. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

22. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

23. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated.

REPLACING REMOTE CONTROLBATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

276


Replace the battery according to the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the remote con-trol as shown.

2. Remove the discharged batteries andput in the new batteries as shown.Install the cover.

NOTICE

Be sure that the positive side andnegative side of the remote controlbattery should be faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the remote control,or it may interfere with proper op-eration.

Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the battery insertion.

Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that theremote control operates properly. If theremote control still does not operate prop-erly, contact your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

277


1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to usethe video signal from an external videodevice.

3. “ TRACK·CHAPTER ” button

This button skips directly to a desiredtrack or chapter.

4. “ ” button

This button plays or pauses a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

5. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated.

6. Joystick/“ENT” button

The joystick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

The “ENT” button inputs the selectedswitch or the selected menu for thedisc.

Buttons on the DVD player unit

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

278


7. “DISC” indicator light

This light indicates that the disc isloaded.

8. “ ” button

This button ejects a disc.

Remote control

DVD player unit

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”button or “VIDEO” button.

When the “DVD” button is pushed, thedisc load screen changes to the DVDplayer operation screen.

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, theimages and sounds from the personal au-dio machine are output.

The “DVD” button is effective only whena disc is inserted.

—Turning the rear seatentertainment system on andoff

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

279


To turn off the system, push the “OFF”button.

When the front audio system is turned off,the rear audio system and the DVD playerwill be turned off simultaneously.

Vehicles with navigation system—The rearseat entertainment system can beswitched ON and OFF by pushing the“Rear” switch on the front audio system.

The rear DVD player can be operatedthrough the front audio system.

—Front audio systemoperation

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

280


The audio system controls in the instru-ment panel allow the operation of the rearseat entertainment system by rear seatpassengers to be disabled.

Turning on the rear system lock preventssmall children from using the remote con-troller or operation panel of the DVD play-er unit to operate the rear seat entertain-ment system during driving.

Turn the audio system on. Push the“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until“RSE” is displayed. Then, turn the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”knob.

Vehicles with navigation system—

Push the “INFO” button to change thescreen to “Screen Setting”.

Push the “ON” switch on the “ScreenSetting” screen to turn on the “Rearsystem lock”. Then push “OK”.

When the rear system lock is on and anybutton is pushed on the remote control orthe operation panel, the screen shownabove is displayed for approximately 6seconds.

Even when the rear system lock is turnedon during play mode, the images andsounds continue without interruption.

The condition of the rear system lock ismaintained, even when the ignition switchis turned off.

—Rear system lock

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

281


The DVD player can play audio CDs/MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,dts−CDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see“Audio/video system operating hints” onpage 309 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc mustbe loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages


If “DISC CHECK” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,damaged or it was inserted upside down.Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION ERROR” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the DVD regioncode is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on thescreen: There is a problem inside theplayer. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.


INSERTING THE DISC

Insert a disc into the slot with the labelside up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while thedisc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannotbe played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,“DISC CHECK” will also appear on thescreen. For appropriate discs for this play-er, see “Audio/video system operatinghints” on page 309 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,and it will play from the beginning of thetrack or chapter again after it reaches theend.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the DVD player. Do not insertanything other than a disc into theslot.

—DVD player

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

282


8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player needs an adap-tor to play compact disc singles. Compactdisc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) indiameter−smaller than standard discs.

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.

The DVD player can be operated with theremote control buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “SET UP” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SIZE” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “ ”, “ ”, “” and “” buttons

—DVD player operationswitches

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

283


Remote control

DVD player unit

The player can also be operated with theswitches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,select the switch by the joystick and pushthe “ENT” button. You cannot select theswitches on the screen by touching themdirectly.

When the switch is selected by the joys-tick, the outline of the switch changes toblue. Push the “ENT” button, and theswitch will be highlighted in green.

Remote control

DVD player unit

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

284


TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHESON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, pushthe “OPTION” button on the remote con-trol.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operationswitch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

285


There are operation switches on the “Page1” and “Page 2” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page 1”or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen whenyou select a switch, it indicates thatthe switch cannot work.

On the screen

Remote control

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

286


DVD player unit

To turn off the switches on the screen,push the “OPTION” button on the remotecontrol once again or select the “HideButtons” on the screen.

—DVD player operationNOTE: The playback condition of someDVD video discs may be determined bythe DVD video software producer. ThisDVD player plays discs as the softwareproducer intended. Therefore, somefunctions may not work properly. Besure to read the instruction manual forthe DVD video disc separately provided.For detailed information about DVDvideo discs, see “—DVD video discinformation” on page 306 in thisSection.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, videoCD or audio tracks may not record insome cases while the menu is displayed.As audio will not play in this case, verifythat the video tracks are playing and thenactivate playback.

The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while playingback certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDsis recorded at a low volume to em-phasize the impact of sound effects.If you adjust the volume assumingthat the conversations represent themaximum volume level available forthe DVD, you may be startled bylouder sound effects or when youchange to a different audio source.Loud sounds may have a significantimpact on the human body or pose adriving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

287


TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THEDISC ON OR OFF

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,select the “Top Menu” or the “Menu”switch on the screen. You can also turnon the menu screen by pushing the“MENU” or “TOP MENU” button on theremote control.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe separate manual for the DVD disc.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

288


OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ”, “ ”AND “ ” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“ ” switch/button: Select this switch/button to pause the disc or to cancel thepause and return to normal playing.

“ ” switch/button: This switch/buttonstops a screen when the DVD player isoperated.

“” and “” switches on the screen:Select the “” or “” switch, andpush and hold the “ENT” button to fastforward or reverse. When you release the“ENT” button, the DVD player will resumeplaying.

“” and “” buttons on the remotecontrol: Push and hold the “” or “”button to fast forward or reverse. Whenyou release the button, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

Select the “” switch/button while paus-ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motionvideo replay.

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINEDSCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, se-lect the “Return” switch. The DVD playerstarts playing from the beginning of thepredetermined screen.

For further details of the predeterminedscreen, see the separate manual for theDVD disc.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

289


SELECTING THE TITLE

To display the searching title screen, se-lect the “Search” switch on the screen.You can also display the screen by push-ing the “SEARCH” button on the remotecontrol.

Select the title number by using thejoystick and push the “ENT” button toenter the number. The player starts play-ing disc for that title number. The selectedtitle number will appear on the screen.

Select the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

290


CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Select the “Sub Title” switch on thescreen, and then the changing subtitle lan-guage screen will appear. You can alsodisplay the screen by pushing the “SUBTITLE” button on the remote control.

Each time you select the “Sub Title”switch, another language stored on thedisc is selected.

To turn off the subtitles, select the “HideButtons” switch.

Select the “Back” switch to return to theprevious screen.

The selected subtitle language will appearon the screen.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

291


CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Select the “Audio” switch on the screenand then the changing audio languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “AUDIO” buttonon the remote control.

Each time you select the “Audio” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

To turn off the audio language screen,select the “Hide Buttons” switch.


The selected audio language will appearon the screen.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

292


CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Select the “Angle” switch on the screen,and then the changing angle screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “ANGLE” button on theremote control.

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when the “ ”mark appears on the screen. Each timeyou push the “ENT” button after selectingthe “Angle” switch, the angle changes.The angle number which you can selectwill appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, select the “HideButtons” switch.


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

293


CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Select the “Set Up” switch on the screen,and then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the re-mote control. You can change the initialsetting.

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the“Setup Menu” screen.

After you change the initial setting, selectthe “Enter” switch. The initial settingswitch will be turned off and return to thepicture previously.

When the “Default” switch is pushed, allmenus are initialized.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

294


CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Select the “Audio Language” switch on the“Setup Menu” and the “Select AudioLang.” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear bypushing the appropriate switch on thescreen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,select the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you wantto hear, select the “Others” switch. The“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will ap-pear.

To select an audio language, use the joys-tick to enter the appropriate 4−digit lan-guage code. For details of the languagecodes, see the language code list.

If a code which is not on the list is en-tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enterthe code of the language you want to hearagain.

To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”screen, select the “Back” switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”screen, select the “Subtitle Language”switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read byselecting the appropriate switch on thescreen.


If you cannot find the language you wantto read, select the “Others” switch. The“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen willappear.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

295


To enter the code of the language youwant to read, use the joystick to enter theappropriate 4−digit language code. For de-tails about the language codes, see thelanguage code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the remote con-trol. If numbers which are not on the listare entered and the “ENT” button ispushed, the “Incorrect code” screen willappear. Enter the language code you wantto read again.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”screen, select the “Back” switch on thescreen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,select the “DVD Language” switch on the“Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, select the “Others” switch. The “En-ter DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to read, use the joystick to enter theappropriate 4−digit language code. For de-tails about the language codes, see thelanguage code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the remote con-trol. If numbers which are not on the listare entered and the “ENT” button ispushed, the “Incorrect code” screen willappear. Enter the language code you wantto read again.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”screen, select the “Back” switch on thescreen.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

296


TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OROFF

The angle mark can be turned on fordiscs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you select the “Angle Mark”switch on the screen, the angle markturns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWERRESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen bysetting the viewer restrictions. You canprevent the restriction with a password.Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, se-lect the “Parental Lock” switch on the“Setup Menu” screen. The “Enter PersonalCode” screen will appear.

Enter the password and push the “ENT”button. The “Select Restriction Level”screen will appear.

You cannot change the setting without in-putting the password. When you forget orchange the password, push the “” sideof the joystick ten times to initialize thepassword.


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

297


Select a parental level (1—8). The smallerthe level number, the stricter the age limit.Select the “Back” switch to return to the“Setup Menu” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the “SIZE” button on the remotecontrol causes the display modes tochange sequentially as follows:

Normal Wide1 Wide2

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

298


0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

299


1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

300


SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button or“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button on theremote control until the number of thechapter/track you want to select appearson the screen.

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the remote control. The statusscreen will appear on the screen.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER(video CD only)

Select the “Select Number” switch andthen the disc menu number search screenwill appear. You can also display thescreen by pushing the “SEARCH” buttonon the remote control.

—DVD player operation (videoCD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

301


Enter the disc menu number by using thejoystick and push the “ENT” button. Theplayer starts playing the disc from theentered disc menu number. The entereddisc menu number will appear on thescreen.

Select the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ” AND“” SWITCHES/BUTTONS (video CDonly)

“ ” switch/button: Select this switch/push this button to pause the disc or tocancel the pause and return to normalplaying.

“” and “” switches on the screen:Select the “” or “” switch, andpush and hold the “ENT” button to fastforward or reverse. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, re-lease the “ENT” button.

“” and “” buttons on the remotecontrol: Push and hold the “” or “”button to fast forward or reverse. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, release the button.

Video CD only—

Select the “” switch/push the “”button while pausing, the DVD video playsthe slow−motion video replay.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

302


TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (videoCD only)

Select the “Return” switch to turn on themenu screen for the disc.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK(video CD only)

Select the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”switch while the disc menu is displayed.The next or previous page will appear onthe screen.

Select the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”switch while the player is playing video.The next or previous track will besearched and played.

CHANGING A MULTIPLEXTRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Select the “Main/Sub” switch to change amultiplex transmission. The mode changesfrom Main/Sub to Main to Sub and backto Main/Sub by selecting the “Main/Sub”switch.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

303


CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (videoCD only)

Select the “Set Up” switch on the screenand then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the re-mote control. You can change the initialsetting. (See “CHANGING THE INITIALSETTING” on page 293 in this Section fordetails.)

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

CD Text

CD MP3

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the remote control. The controlscreen will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear onthe screen when pushing the “DVD” buttonon the remote control/DVD player unit.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Select the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, select this switch again.

2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Select the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, select this switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Select the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc. Tostop scanning, select this switch again.When the player has scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

304


MP3 only—

Folder and file names will appear on thescreen when the “DVD” button is pushed.

The details of the specific switches, con-trols, and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch

When the “RPT” switch is selectedwhile a track is played, the track filewill be played repeatedly until theswitch is selected again. When the“ENT” button is pushed for at least 0.8seconds, all the files in a folder will beplayed repeatedly. To turn off repeatplay mode, select the switch again.

2. “RAND” switch

When the “RAND” switch is selected,the files in a current folder will beplayed in random order. When the“ENT button is pushed for at least 0.8seconds, all the files in the disk will beplayed in random. To turn off randomplay mode, select the switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch

When the “SCAN” switch is selected,all the files in a current folder will bescanned. Only the first 10 seconds ofeach file are played sequentially untilall the files are scanned. When the“ENT button is pushed for at least 0.8seconds, the first 10 seconds of eachinitial file of all the folders in the diskwill be played sequentially until the en-tire initial files are scanned. To stopscanning, push the switch again.

4. “FLD ” switch

When the switch is selected, the initialfile of the next folder will be played.

5. “ FLD” switch

When the switch is selected, the initialfile of the previous folder will beplayed.

6. “DETAIL” switch

When the switch is selected while atrack is played, the detailed file infor-mation of the track will be displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” button on the remotecontrol and the “Display” screen will ap-pear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect thesunlight. This is not a malfunction.

—Screen adjustment

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

305


Operate the joystick up and down to se-lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Colorand left and right to make adjustments.

− or “Red” + or“Green”

Brightness Darkens Brightens

ContrastWeakensthecontrast

Strengthens thecontrast

Tone Weakensthe tone

Strengthens the tone

ColorStrengthens the redcolor

Strengthens the greencolor

After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”button or “DISPLAY” button to return tothe previous screen.

The audio machine connected to the inputterminal adapter can be played in thevideo mode.

To select the video mode, push the“VIDEO” button on the remote control.

—Selecting the video mode

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

306


DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-or TV formats. DVD video discs con-forming to other formats such as PALor SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discshave a region code indicating where youcan use. If the DVD video disc is notlabeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it inthis DVD player. If you attempt to play aninappropriate DVD video disc in this play-er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen. Even if the DVD video discdoes not have a region code, in somecases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC formatof color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screento be selected. Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions inwhich this video disccan be played.ALL: all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discthat holds video. DVD video discs haveadopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-dards of digital compression technologies.The picture data is compressed by 1/40on average and stored. Variable rate en-coded technology in which the volume ofdata assigned to the picture is changeddepending on the picture format has alsobeen adopted. Audio data is stored usingPCM and Dolby digital, which enableshigher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-ti−angle and multi−language features willalso help you enjoy the more advancedtechnology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limitswhat can be viewed in conformity with thelevel of restrictions of the country. Thelevel of restrictions varies depending onthe DVD video disc. Some DVD videodiscs cannot be played at all, or violentscenes are skipped or replaced with otherscenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for childrenand G−rated movies can be played.

—DVD video disc information

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

307


Level 8: All types of DVD video discs canbe played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can selectthe language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are providedon DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the sameregion code as the DVD player, you can-not play the disc on the DVD player. Forregion codes, see page 306.

Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audioformat DVD. Other decoded type cannotbe played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored on DVD video discs are di-vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video andaudio programs stored on DVD videodiscs. Usually, one piece of a movie, onealbum, or one audio program is assignedas a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A titlecomprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, andthe double−D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-lished works.1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protectedby method claims of certain U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual propertyrights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other rights owners. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision Cor-poration, and is intended for home andother limited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized by MacrovisionCorporation. Reverse engineering ordisassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid-eos and sound when an audio−videoequipment is connected to the A/V inputadapter. For details, refer to the manufac-turer’s instructions.

—A/V input adapter

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

308


To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapterRed: Audio input adapterWhite: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V inputadapter is not in use. Inserting a for-eign object other than the appropriateplug may cause electrical failure orshort circuit.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-ment system with commercial head-phones.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the dial.

Left side dial: Turn it upward to increasethe volume, turn it downward to decreasethe volume.

Right side dial: Turn it downward to in-crease the volume, turn it upward to de-crease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

The recommended headphone impedanceis from 16 Ω to 32 Ω.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

—Headphone j acks

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

309


NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperation:

Be careful not to spill beveragesover the system.

Do not put anything other than acompact disc into the slot.

Do not put anything other than aDVD video, DVD audio, video CD,dts−CD or audio CD into the DVDplayer.

The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

Audio/video system operatinghints

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

310


XM∗

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM


NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-its are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio commu-nications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occurin a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player and DVDplayer from working. On hot days, usethe air conditioning to cool the vehicleinterior before you use the players.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player andDVD player skip.

If moisture gets into your compact discplayer and DVD player, the playersmay not play even though they appearto be working. Remove the disc fromthe player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-ers use an invisible laser beam whichcould cause hazardous radiation ex-posure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the players correctly.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

311


Audio CDs

Compact disc player

Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

SACDdts−CDCopy−protected CD

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

Video CDs

DVD player

Use only discs marked as shownabove. The following products may notbe playable on your DVD player.

SACDCopy−protected CDDVD−RDVD+RDVD+RWDVD−RWDVD−ROMDVD−RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

312


Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality or la-beled discs such as those shown inthe illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the disc.

This system is not designed for useof Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage tothe player or changer.

Correct Wrong

Handle the discs carefully, especiallywhen you are inserting them. Holdthem on the edge and do not bendthem. Avoid getting fingerprints onthem, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa chapter or track. (To see a pin hole,hold the disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not playing them.Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat, and direct sun-light.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

313


To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from thecenter to the edge of the disc (not incircles). Dry it with another soft, lint−freecloth. Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or anti−static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.

The MP3/WMA player can play MP3and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R andCD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level2 and with the Romeo and Joliet filesystem.

When naming an MP3 or WMA file,add the appropriate file extension (.mp3or .wma).

The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions asMP3 or WMA files. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropri-ate file extensions.

Multi−session compatible CDs can alsobe played.

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, andVer. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis-play disc title, track title and artistname in other formats.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag thatis used in the same way as an ID3tag. WMA tags carry information suchas track title, artist name.

The emphasis function is available onlywhen playing MP3/WMA files recordedat 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The systemcan play MP3 files with sampling fre-quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.However, the emphasis function is notavailable for files recorded at these fre-quencies.)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally improves with higher bitrates. In order to achieve a reasonablelevel of sound quality, discs recordedwith a bit rate of at least 128 kbps arerecommended.

Playable bit ratesMP3 files:MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbpsWMA files:Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

314


The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs record-er using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “pre−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

M3u playlists are not compatible withthe audio player.

MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PROformats are not compatible with the au-dio player.

The MP3 player is compatible withVBR (Variable Bit Rate).

When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast−forward or reverse operations areused.

It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-els deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levelsof folders. For this reason, we recom-mend creating discs with no more thantwo levels of folders.

It is possible to play up to 192 foldersor 255 files on one disc.

001.mp3002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3

Folder 2004.wma005.mp3

Folder 3006.mp3

The play order of the compact discwith the structure shown on the left isas follows:

CD−R and CD−RW discs

CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (aprocess that allows discs to be playedon a conventional CD player) cannotbe played.

It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a musicCD recorder or a personal computerbecause of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of theunit.

It may not be possible to play discsrecorded on a personal computer de-pending on the application settings andthe environment. Record with the cor-rect format. (For details, contact theappropriate application manufacturers ofthe applications.)

CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damagedby direct exposure to sunlight, hightemperatures or other storage condi-tions. The unit may be unable to playsome damaged discs.

If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, playback will beginmore slowly than with a conventionalCD or CD−R disc.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

315


Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played using the DDCD (DoubleDensity CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on−demand toCD−R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in an MP3 file. This em-bedded information can include the tracktitle, the artist’s name, the album title, themusic genre, the year of production, com-ments and other data. The contents canbe freely edited using software with ID3tag editing functions. Although the tagsare restricted to the number of characters,the information can be viewed when thetrack is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag.WMA tags carry information such as tracktitle, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for theformatting of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are twolevels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-ter file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composedof one−byte capital letters and numbers.The “_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-ters (including the separation mark “.” andfile extension). Each folder must containfewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” softwarehave a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on convention-al discs.

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed by Micro-soft. It compresses files into a size small-er than that of MP3 files. The decodingformats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and9.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

316


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

317


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemFront manual air conditioning system

Controls 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front automatic air conditioning systemControls 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear manual air conditioning system

Controls 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear automatic air conditioning systemControls 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning filter 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

318


1. “A/C” button

2. Air intake selector

3. Air flow selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Fan speed selector

Front manual air conditioning system——Controls

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

319


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

5. Windshield— Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly. Itis not possible to select RECIRCULATEin this position.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

320


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

If the ambient temperature drops, the airintake mode will automatically changefrom RECIRCULATE to FRESH after a fewminutes. This automatic change controlmode can be cancelled by pushing andholding the button for longer than 2 sec-onds. The automatic change control modewill be reactivated if the ignition key isturned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

321


To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

322


If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards WARM

(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—ON

For quick cooling, turning the temperatureselector knob fully towards COLD changesthe air intake selector mode toRECIRCULATE. It is not possible to returnto FRESH and to turn the air conditioningsystem off in this position.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

323


Ventilation


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging

—The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to thewindshield or floor/windshield position, theair intake selects FRESH automatically.This is to clean up the front view morequickly. It is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE in windshield position.

On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

—The outside of the windshield



(red zone)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to thewindshield or floor/windshield position, theair intake selects FRESH automatically.This is to clean up the front view morequickly. It is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE in windshield position.

To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

324


1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “SYNC” button indicatoron—simultaneous setting on driver,front passenger and rear passengersides)(with “SYNC” button indicatoroff—individual setting on driver sideonly)

2. Temperature selector (“PASS TEMP”)(individual setting on front passengerside only)

3. “A/C” button

4. “SYNC” button(with button indicator on—simultaneoustemperature setting )(with button indicator off—individualtemperature setting)

5. “MODE” button (air flow selector)

6. Windshield air flow button

7. Temperature selector (“REAR TEMP”)(individual setting on rear passengerside only)

8. Fan speed selector

9. Air intake selector

10. “OFF” button

11. “AUTO” button

Front automatic air conditioning system——Controls

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

325


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you adjust the temperature selectorbutton to maximum cooling, “LO” will ap-pear on the display and the air intakemode will be automatically changed to RE-CIRCULATE.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Push the “ ” (increase) or “ ” (de-crease) side of the button to adjust thefan speed.

In the automatic operation mode, the fanspeed is adjusted automatically unless youdesire another fan speed mode.

“SYNC” button

Push the button to change the mode ofthe temperature setting.

With the indicator on— Simultaneous tem-perature settingWith the indicator off— Individual temper-ature setting

With the indicator on, the rear air condi-tioning is turned on. However, controls onthe rear control panel cannot be used. Tocancel this function, push the “SYNC” but-ton.

For details about the rear air conditioning,see “Rear automatic air conditioning sys-tem” on page 332 in this Section.

Temperature selectors

To increase the temperature, press the“ ” side. To decrease it, press the “ ”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

—“TEMP” button

With the “SYNC” button indicator on—This button changes the temperature onthe driver side, front passenger side andrear passenger side simultaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the“PASS TEMP” or “REAR TEMP” button ispushed.

With the “SYNC” button indicatoroff— This button changes the temperatureon the driver side only.

—“PASS TEMP” button

This button changes the temperature onthe front passenger side only.

—“REAR TEMP” button

This button changes the temperature onthe rear passenger side only when therear air conditioning is turned on.

For details about the rear air conditioning,see “Rear automatic air conditioning sys-tem” on page 332 in this Section.

The temperature display changes between“C” and “F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi−information display” onpage 338 in Section 1−10.)

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

326


“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In the automatic operation mode, the airflow mode is selected automatically amongPanel, Bi−level, Floor and Floor/Windshieldunless you desire another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to selectFRESH automatically. This is to clean upthe front view more quickly. It is not pos-sible to return to RECIRCULATE in thismode.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

327


To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed selec-tor to adjust the fan speed high for aminute to help clear the intake ductsof snow or moisture. This can reducethe amount of fogging on the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

328


If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperature

MANUAL OPERATION


Heating

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

329


Defogging

—The inside of the windshield


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly. It is not possible toreturn to RECIRCULATE in this position.

On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

—The outside of the windshield


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly. It is not possible toreturn to RECIRCULATE in this position.

To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.

Side vents

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

330


1. Fan speed selector (rear)

2. Air flow selectors

3. Temperature selector

4. Fan speed selector (front)

Rear manual air conditioning system——Controls

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

331


Fan speed selector (front)

This selector knob is used to turn the rearair conditioning system on/off and adjustthe fan speed.

In the “REAR” position, you can operatethe system by the rear controllers.


Turning the knob to the “OFF” positionturns the system off and it cannot beoperated by the rear controllers.

Fan speed selector (rear)

When the front fan speed selector is inthe “REAR” position, you can operate therear fan speed selector.


Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-ture—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

Air flow selectors

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the roof panelvents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from both the roofpanel vents and floor vent.

3. Floor— Air flows from the floor vent.

—Air flow selector settings

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

332


1. “AUTO” button

2. Air flow selectors

3. Temperature selector (rear)

4. Fan speed selectors

5. “OFF” button

6. “REAR” button

7. Temperature selector (front)

Rear automatic air conditioning system——Controls

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

333


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the rear airconditioning, press the “AUTO” button. Anindicator light will illuminate to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow according to the tem-perature.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selectors

Push the button to select the fan speedmode.

In the automatic operation mode, the fanspeed is adjusted automatically unless youdesire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selectorsTo increase the temperature, press the“” side. To decrease it, press the “”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

When “SYNC” appears on the rear tem-perature display, rear controls cannot beused. Use the controls on the front controlpanel. To cancel this function, push the“SYNC” button. For details about the“SYNC” button, see “Front automatic airconditioning system” on page 324 in thisSection.

The temperature display changes between“C” and “F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi−information display” onpage 338 in Section 1−10.)

“REAR” buttonTo turn on the rear air conditioning systemusing the front control panel, push thebutton. To turn it off, push the buttonagain.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the rear airconditioning system.

Air flow selectors

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the roof panelvents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from both the roofpanel vents and floor vent.

3. Floor— Air flows from the floor vent.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

334


The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed on the right side of theglove box as shown and indicates thata filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

—Air flow selector settings Air conditioning filter—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

335


The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.)

1. Open the glove box, and slide offthe damper as shown.

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

—Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

336


3. Remove the filter case from the filteroutlet as shown in the illustration.

4. Remove the filter from the filtercase.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

337


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentMulti−information display 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversation mirror 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toyota park assist system 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener box 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage box 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removable console box 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note pad holder 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seat side table 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coat hooks 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun shade 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 10

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

338


1. “E/M” button

2. Garage door opener buttons

3. “MODE” button

4. Garage door opener indicator

5. Outside temperature and cruiseinformation display

6. Compass

Multi−information display—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

339


Operate the multi−information displaywith the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

—Before using themulti−information display

Indication

English/U.S.CustomarySystem (E)

Metric (M)

Outsidetemperature

F

C

Instantaneous fuel consumption/Average fuel consumption

MPG

L/100 km

Distance to empty

MI

km

“E/M” button

This button is used to switch between English/U.S. Customary System andmetric units.

Each time you push this button, the display switches. This is also linked to the frontand rear air conditioning displays. The display variations are as follows;

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

340


“MODE” button

This button is used to select the item.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Outside tempera-ture and cruise information display” onpage 344.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Buttons

Indicator light

The garage door opener (

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttonsyou want to program. Push and holddown one of the buttons until the indi-cator corresponding to the selectedchannel begins to flash.

—Garage door opener

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

341


HomeLink

Hand−heldgaragetransmitter

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

342


6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink ” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press theappropriate HomeLink button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

343


(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink UniversalTransceiver call the:

Toyota Customer Experience Center at1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

Toyota Canada Customer InteractionCentre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

Refer to HomeLink on the internet at:WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

344


This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICrules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

The outside temperature and cruise in-formation display indicates the follow-ing information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

4. Distance to empty

5. Display off (no compass)

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles through this informa-tion.

During the off mode, the compass displayis also turned off.

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

To set the unit, push the “E/M” buttonuntil the desired unit display appears. (Atthis time, front and rear air conditioningdisplays also change.)

—Outside temperature andcruise information display

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

345


1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE C”or “OUTSIDE F”)

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).

If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor,“−−C” (“−−F”) will appear on the display.If “−−C” (“−−F”) appears on the display,contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−C” (“−−F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 1seconds.

To reset the calculations, return the modeto “AVG” and push and hold the “MODE”and “E/M” button simultaneously for 2 sec-onds.

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption (“INST MPG” or “INST L/100 km”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated and displayed based on dis-tance and fuel consumption for 1 sec-onds with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 2seconds.

Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in the following cases.

The vehicle is stopped with the enginerunning. (The display will indicate theextremely high fuel consumption.)

The vehicle is driving down a longslope applying the engine brake. (Thedisplay will indicate the extremely lowfuel consumption.)

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

4. Distance to empty(“DTE MI” or “DTE km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger. If fuel consumption is poor, thedriving range will be shorter.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

346


The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading south.

The direction display is updated every 2seconds.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe roof.)

The battery has been disconnected.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

If the direction is not indicated or thesystem does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

—Compass

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

347


The compass sensor is on the roof ofthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the roof of the vehicle.Doing this may cause malfunction ofthe compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 344.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 5 sec-onds until the “VAR” indication appearson the compass display.

3. Push the “E/M” button several timesuntil the desired zone number appearson the compass display.

If the button is not pushed for 10 sec-onds, the display returns to the compass/outside temperature mode and the numberthat is last set is memorized.

To select the zone where the vehicle iscurrently located, refer to the followingmap.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

348


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns to the compassmode.

CAUTION


Samoa: 5Guam: 8Saipan: 8

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

349


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Inthis case, the compass needs to be cali-brated.

To calibrate the compass manually, do thefollowing;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 344.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 10seconds until the “CAL” indication ap-pears on the compass display. (At thistime, the compass display is locked in“N”.)

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h(5 mph) or less. If there is not enoughspace to drive in a circle, drive aroundthe block.

When the “CAL” indication goes off andthe compass returns to the normal mode,calibration is complete.

If you want to restart the calibration be-fore it is complete, push both of the“MODE” and “E/M” buttons simultaneouslyfor 10 seconds again.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

350


Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.


With manual air conditioning system

With automatic air conditioning system

Clock

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

351


To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication will be reduced.

The conversation mirror is designed forthe driver and front passenger to beable to look at the rear passengerswithout turning around.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe mirror only when the vehicle isstopped.

To use the mirror, push it down.

Conversation mirror

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

352


The mirror angle can be adjusted by push-ing its edge.

1: Rear sensors2: Rear corner sensors3: Front corner sensors

Toyota park assist system(type A)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

353


The Toyota park assist system is de-signed to inform you of the approxi-mate distance between your vehicle andan obstruction by indicator and buzzerwhen parking the vehicle. This systemuses sensors to detect obstructions.

This system works when the ignition keyis at the “ON” position and the transmis-sion is not in the “P” position.

Rear and rear corner sensors workonly when the transmission is in the“R” position.

Front corner sensors works when thetransmission is in the “R” position.

Front corner sensors works when thetransmission is not in the “P” or “R”position and vehicle speed is approxi-mate 10 km/h (6 mph) or less.

To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzerwill sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

In the following cases, the buzzer willsound several times and the indicatorwill stay on to indicate that the systemis not working properly.

When the temperature is extremely low.

When any of the sensors are malfunc-tion.

If the indicator is continuously on, haveyour Toyota dealer check the system.

If the indicator remains blinking butyou do not hear the buzzer sound,clean the sensors with soft cloth.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

354


Rear sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors

This system is designed to inform you ofthe approximate distance between yourvehicle and an obstacle by indicator andbuzzer.

Rear sensors

Distance shown as A inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 1800—900(70.9—35.4)

Intermittent

Approximately 900—550 (35.4—21.7)

Fastintermittent

Approximately 550 (21.7) or less

Continuous

Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as B inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 850—520 (33.5—20.5)

Intermittent

Approximately 520—250 (20.5—9.8)

Fastintermittent


Continuous

Front corner sensors

Distance shown as C inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 600—400 (23.6—15.7)

Intermittent


Fastintermittent


Continuous

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

355


1: Front sensors2: Rear corner sensors3: Rear sensors Perceptible area

A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.)C: Approximately 600 mm (23.6 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown inthe previous illustration. Check the areaaround the vehicle before driving and startdriving slowly.

The maximum detection distance of thesensor varies depending on the size ofthe obstacle. The sensor can detect alarge obstacle, such as a wall, up to 1800mm (70.9 in.) away. However, the detec-tion distance of a thin obstacle, such asa pole, is less than 1800 mm (70.9 in.).

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

356


CAUTION

The Toyota park assist system isintended as an aid to assist you topark and is not a substitute foryour personal judgment. Make yourdriving decisions based on your ob-servations.

Do not attach accessories or otherobjects to the vehicle within thesensor perceptible area. Doing somay cause the system to malfunc-tion, which might result in an acci-dent.

In certain situations, the systemwill not function properly and whenthe vehicle approaches certain ob-jects, the system will not detectthose objects. Therefore, always ob-serve the area around the vehicleand do not rely solely on the sys-tem.


This ISM device compiles withCanadian ICES−001.

In the following cases, the system maynot work properly.

When ice, snow, mud or other objectsbuild up on the sensor.

When the vehicle is parked in extreme-ly high or extremely low temperaturefor a long period.

When driving on bumpy or graveledroads or on grass

When a device such as a horn fromanother vehicle, motorcycle engine, oran air brake sound from a heavy−dutyvehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, nearyour vehicle

When attaching a two−way radio anten-na

When rain or water splashes on thesensor.

When operating the vehicle on an in-clined surface

When a radio antenna or fender poleis mounted on your vehicle.

When a towing hitch is mounted onyour vehicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

357


The system may not detect the follow-ing.

Thin objects such as a wire or rope

Objects with a surface area too smallto reflect ultrasonic waves such aswire gauze

Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-rial such as cotton or snow

A person near the vehicle (dependingon the type of clothes worn)

Objects with a sharp edge

Small or short objects

Tall objects with an upper part project-ing toward the vehicle

Objects just under the bumper

Objects very close to your vehicle

In the following cases, have yourToyota dealer check the system.

When the bumper is damaged.

When the indicator is continuously on.

1: Rear sensors2: Rear corner sensors

The Toyota park assist system is de-signed to inform you of the approxi-mate distance between your vehicle andan obstruction by indicator and buzzerwhen parking the vehicle. This systemuses sensors to detect obstructions.

This system works when the ignition keyis at the “ON” position and the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

The sensors work only when the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzerwill sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

Toyota park assist system(type B)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

358


In the following cases, the buzzer willsound several times and the indicatorwill stay on to indicate that the systemis not working properly.

When the temperature is extremely low.

When any of the sensors are malfunc-tion.

If the indicator is continuously on, haveyour Toyota dealer check the system.

If the indicator remains blinking butyou do not hear the buzzer sound,clean the sensors with soft cloth.

Rear sensors

Rear corner sensors

This system is designed to inform you ofthe approximate distance between yourvehicle and an obstacle by indicator andbuzzer.

Rear sensors

Distance shown as A inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 1800—900(70.9—35.4)

Intermittent

Approximately 900—550 (35.4—21.7)

Fastintermittent


Continuous

Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as B inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 850—520 (33.5—20.5)

Intermittent


Fastintermittent


Continuous

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

359


1: Rear corner sensors2: Rear sensors

Perceptible area

A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown inthe previous illustration. Check the areaaround the vehicle before driving and startdriving slowly.

The maximum detection distance of thesensor varies depending on the size ofthe obstacle. The sensor can detect alarge obstacle, such as a wall, up to 1800mm (70.9 in.) away. However, the detec-tion distance of a thin obstacle, such asa pole, is less than 1800 mm (70.9 in.).

CAUTION

The Toyota park assist system isintended as an aid to assist you topark and is not a substitute foryour personal judgment. Make yourdriving decisions based on your ob-servations.

Do not attach accessories or otherobjects to the vehicle within thesensor perceptible area. Doing somay cause the system to malfunc-tion, which might result in an acci-dent.

In certain situations, the systemwill not function properly and whenthe vehicle approaches certain ob-jects, the system will not detectthose objects. Therefore, always ob-serve the area around the vehicleand do not rely solely on the sys-tem.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

360



This ISM device compiles withCanadian ICES−001.

In the following cases, the system maynot work properly.

When ice, snow, mud or other objectsbuild up on the sensor.

When the vehicle is parked in extreme-ly high or extremely low temperaturefor a long period.

When driving on bumpy or graveledroads or on grass

When a device such as a horn fromanother vehicle, motorcycle engine, oran air brake sound from a heavy−dutyvehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, nearyour vehicle

When attaching a two−way radio anten-na

When rain or water splashes on thesensor.

When operating the vehicle on an in-clined surface

When a radio antenna or fender poleis mounted on your vehicle.

When a towing hitch is mounted onyour vehicle.

The system may not detect the follow-ing.

Thin objects such as a wire or rope

Objects with a surface area too smallto reflect ultrasonic waves such aswire gauze

Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-rial such as cotton or snow

A person near the vehicle (dependingon the type of clothes worn)

Objects with a sharp edge

Small or short objects

Tall objects with an upper part project-ing toward the vehicle

Objects just under the bumper

Objects very close to your vehicle

In the following cases, have yourToyota dealer check the system.

When the bumper is damaged.

When the indicator is continuously on.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

361


The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image ofthe view behind the vehicle while back-ing up. The image is displayed in re-verse on the screen. This allows theimage to appear in the same manner asthat of the rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on thescreen, place the selector lever in the“R” position when the ignition key inthe “ON” position.

If you move the selector lever out of the“R” position, the screen returns to theprevious screen. Operating another func-tion of the navigation system will displayanother screen.

The rear view monitor system is a supple-ment device intended to assist back up.When backing up, be sure to check be-hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

Never depend on the rear viewmonitor system entirely when back-ing up. Always make sure your in-tended path is clear.

Use caution just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

Never back up while looking only atthe screen. The image on thescreen is different from actual con-ditions. Depicted distances betweenobjects and flat surfaces will differfrom actual distances. If you backup while looking only at the screen,you may hit a vehicle, a person oran object. When backing up, besure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mir-rors before proceeding.

Do not use the system when theback door is not completely closed.

If the back of the vehicle is hit, theposition and mounting angle of thecamera may change. Be sure tohave the camera’s position andmounting angle checked at yourToyota dealer.

If the temperature changes rapidly,such as when hot water is pouredon the vehicle in cold weather, thesystem may not operate normally.

If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-here to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

Use your own eyes to confirm thevehicle’s surroundings, as the dis-played image may become faint ordark, and moving images will bedistorted, or not entirely visiblewhen the outside temperature islow. When backing up, be sure tocheck behind and all around the ve-hicle visually and with mirror beforeproceeding.

Rear view monitor system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

362


When replacing the tires, please consultyour Toyota dealer. If you replace thetires, the area displayed on the screenmay change.

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

Image is displayed approximately levelon screen.

On screen

Corners of bumper

Check surroundings for safety.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

363


The area detected by the camera islimited. The camera does not detectobjects which are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper.

The area displayed on the screenmay vary according to vehicle orien-tation or road conditions.

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEMCAMERA

The rear view monitor system camera islocated on the back door as shown in theillustration. The camera uses a speciallens. The distance of the image that ap-pears on the screen differs from the actu-al distance.

In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.

In the dark (for example, at night)

When the temperature near the lens ishigh or low

When water droplets are adhering tothe camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)

When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-era

When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

364


Check surroundings for safety.

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked upby the camera, the smear effect∗ peculiarto the camera may occur.∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light sourceappears to have a vertical streak aboveand below it.

Front

Rear

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-signed for power supply for car acces-sories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12VDC/120W (front and rear outletstogether).

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets (12 VDC)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

365


Beside second seat

Beside third seat

The power outlets (115 VAC) are de-signed for use as a power supply forelectric appliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

Power outlets (115 VAC)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

366


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn-ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key andturning it counterclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

367


The box is designed to store a garagedoor opener transmitter.

Open the cover and remove the hook−and−loop fastener.

Remove the paper strip covering the adhe-sive on back side of loop and adhere loopto back side of the transmitter near cen-ter.

Please note if transmitter has wire clip forsun visor, this clip must be removed priorto adhesion of the fastener.

Garage door opener box

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

368


Place the transmitter with the fastener fac-ing inside of box into the box. Make surethe transmitter button is located abovebutton pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel.Place one spacer on the pin that would bebelow transmitter button when the cover isclosed. Close the cover.

When the garage door opener transmitteris properly installed, you can operate thetransmitter by pushing the center panel ofthe cover.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

369


If the center panel does not contact yourgarage door opener transmitter:

Check to see if spacer is on the cor-rect pin.

Attach another spacer to the top oforiginal spacer. Check operation. If re-quired, continue to add spacers untilcontact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driv-ing, fill in a piece of felt or pad to preventthe transmitter from clattering.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the garage dooropener box closed while driving.

Keep the remaining spacers awayfrom children.

To use the auxiliary box, open the lidas shown in the following illustrations.

Type C—The plate in the center of theauxiliary box can be adjusted or removedas shown in the illustration.

Type I—For details, see “Front seat sidetable” on page 380 in this Section.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

Type A—As these holders are de-signed for holding a light objectsuch as an eyeglass, do not placeany heavy objects in them. Heavyobjects may cause the holder toopen and contents to fly out result-ing in injuries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

370


Type A (driver’s side roof)

Type B (instrument panel)

Position 1 Position 2

Type C (instrument panel without seatheater switches)

Type D (instrument panel with seat heaterswitches)

Type E (upper side of the glove box)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

371


Type F (front door)

Type G (quarter trim)

Type H (spare tire cover)

Type I (front seat side table)

Type J (rear side of console box)

Type K (front passenger’s seat)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

372


To use the coin holder, push the but-ton.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, keep the coin holderclosed when it is not in use.

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans. To use them, ob-serve the following illustrations.

Type C and D—For details, see “Frontseat side table” on page 380 in this Sec-tion.

Type G—For details, see “Removable con-sole box” on page 375 in this Section.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or in an accident.

Type A and F—To reduce thechance of injury in case of an acci-dent or a sudden stop while driv-ing, keep the cup holder closedwhen it is not in use.

Type A (instrument panel)

Type B (quarter trim)

Coin holder Cup holders

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

373


Type C (front side of the front seat sidetable)

Type D (rear side of the front seat sidetable)

Type E (front side of console box)

Type F (rear side of console box)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

374


Type G (console box tray) Front door

Sliding door

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

Bottle holders

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

375


This box is designed to place thingslike bottles.

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-sole box lid.

Storage box Removable console box

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

376


CONSOLE BOX

To access the console box, pull up thelock release lever and raise the consolebox lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Between the front seats

Between the second seats

REMOVING AND INSTALLING THECONSOLE BOX

The console box can be removed andinstalled between the front seats andbetween the second seats as shown inthe illustrations.

When the console box is installed in thesecond seat position, the right side sec-ond seat must be in the outside position.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

377


To remove the console box:Open the auxiliary box of the rear sideand pull up the lock release lever todisengage the rear lock. Then lift theconsole box and release the front hook.

To install the console box between thefront seats:

1. Install the front hook in the frontstriker of the console box under−tray.

2. Rotate down straight and push downto engage the rear lock.

CAUTION

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the console box.

Make sure the console box is se-curely locked by pushing forward,rearward, upward and sideways.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

378


To install the console box between thesecond seats:

1. Install the front hook in the rearstriker of the double striker set.

The striker is used as both the consolebox lock striker and the right second seatlock striker when the right second seat isin the inside position.

2. Rotate down straight and push downto engage the rear lock.

CAUTION

Do not install the console box byany means other than the centerstriker between the second seats.Otherwise, the console box cannotbe installed properly.

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the console box.

Make sure the console box is se-curely locked by pushing forwardand rearward. Failure to do so maycause an unexpected accident orsevere injury in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

CONSOLE BOX TRAY

When the console box is not installedbetween the front seats, the cup holderand small tray can be installed in theconsole box under−tray between thefront seats.

The cup holder and small tray are in theconsole box.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

379


Before installing the cup holder, pushdown the bottom of the cup and turn itcounterclockwise to lock.

To install the cup holder and small tray:

Cup holder—Hook the front of the cupholder to the console box under−tray, thenpush down the back of the cup holder tosecure it.

Small tray—Hook the back of the smalltray to the console box under−tray, thenpush down the front of the small tray tosecure it.

Make sure the cup holder and small trayare locked securely.

CAUTION

Make sure the the cup holder andsmall tray are securely locked bypushing forward and rearward whenthey are installed. Failure to do somay cause an unexpected accidentor severe injury in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

Do not place anything other thancups or drink cans in the cup hold-er, and do not place anything in theconsole box tray, as such itemsmay be thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicle duringsudden braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the cupholder and small tray stored whenthey are not in use.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

380


The note pad holder is designed tohold small paper such as note pads.

To use the holder, raise the console boxupper lid.

CAUTION

Do not write on the note pad holderwhile the vehicle is moving.

Do not place anything else on thenote pad holder. Such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly cause injury duringsudden braking or an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the consolebox upper lid closed when it is notin use.

The front seat side table can be usedas a cup holder or auxiliary box. It canbe also used as a temporary table onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Note pad holder Front seat side table

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

381


The auxiliary box of the table can also beused as a cup holder. To use as a cupholder, open the lid and pull down the tabas shown in the illustration.

To fold down the table, pull up the lockrelease lever and push against the driver’sseat side.

Make sure the table is locked securely.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy things on thefront seat side table. The table mayfall down and cause personal injury.

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, make sure thetable is folded down and locked se-curely when it is not in use.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

382


To use the coat hook, pull it down.

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and curtainshield airbags—Do not hook a hanger,heavy or sharp pointed object on thecoat hook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be hurledaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly. When you hang clothes, hangthem on the coat hook directly.

These hooks are designed to hangthings like grocery bags.

Type A—To use the hook, pull it down.

Type D—To use the hook, pull it up.

CAUTION

Type A and D—To reduce the chanceof injury in case of an accident or asudden stop while driving, keep thehook stored when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Type A, B, and C—To prevent dam-age to the hook, do not hang anyobject heavier than 4 kg (8.8 lb.) init.

Type D—To prevent damage to thehook, avoid hanging heavy loads onit.

Type A (instrument panel)

Type B (front seats)

Coat hooks Grocery bag hooks

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

383


Type C (third seats)

Type D (under the back door)

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Cargo net hooks

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

384


These hooks are designed to be usedfor the cargo net.

The cargo net can be used in a varietyof ways as shown in the illustrations.

The cargo net itself is not included as anoriginal equipment.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hooks,avoid using them for things otherthan the cargo net.

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.


CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks folded when not in use.

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails (1) attached to the roof andsliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, dothis.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise toloosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desiredposition for loading the luggages ofvarious sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten thecross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

Tie−down hooks Roof luggage carrier

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

385


CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweights” on page 512 in Section 8for information on your vehicleoverall length and width.)

Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof. Rear window

Quarter window

Sun shade

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

386


To use the sun shade, pull the tab ofthe shade and hook it on the anchors.To store the shade, pull the tab slightlyto unhook the shade, and lower it slow-ly.

NOTICE

Do not place anything where itmight hinder the opening/closing ofthe shade.

Do not place anything on theshade.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat havetwo holes, then they are designed for usewith two locking clips. Attach the floor matto the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet and thecorrect side faces upward. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

387


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak−in period 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long reach iridium−tipped spark plugs 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

388


Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (ResearchOctane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than 87 may result in engineknocking. Persistent knocking can lead toengine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break−in period Fuel

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

389


GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

390


GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

If driveab ility problems occur ( poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY79 L (21 gal., 17.5 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that fuel has leaked onto theground, the fuel system has beendamaged and is in need of repair. Inthis case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

391


The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

Use only unleaded gasoline.

Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

Avoid racing the engine.

Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

Three−way catalytic converters

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

392


Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

Keep the back door and quarterwindows closed while driving. Anopen or unsealed back door andquarter windows may cause exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the back door and quarterwindows to ensure plenty of freshair enters the vehicle. If you cansmell exhaust fumes even thoughthere are no other vehicles in thesurrounding area, have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer.Continued inhalation of exhaustfumes can lead to death by gas poi-soning.

Engine exhaust cautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

393


FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an express way, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 482 in Section 7−2.

Facts about engine oilconsumption

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

394


Long reachtype

Your engine is fitted with long reachiridium−tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only Toyota genuine long reachiridium−tipped spark plugs and do notadjust gaps for your engine perfor-mance and smooth driveab ility.

For details about the spark plug type, see“Service specifications” on page 514 inSection 8.

The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with“ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Long r each iridium−tippedspark plugs Brake system

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

395


Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti−lock brake system is in theself−check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at the moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

396


Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

Vehicles without the vehicle stab ilitycontrol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if either of the systems malfunc-tions, the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operatebut the brake assist system still operates.In this case the wheels could lock upduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

397






CAUTION



Vehicles with the vehicle stability con-trol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle stability control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.





CAUTION



DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM (with rear disc brake)

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

398


BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Vehicles with the vehicle stability controlsystem—

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 191 in Sec-tion 1−6.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

Brake pad wear limitindicators

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

399


The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.90 in.) by 12 mm (0.50 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

—Engine numberTheft prevention labels(except for Canada)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

400


CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Suspension and chassis

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

401


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size— For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 405.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 404.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “Uniform tire quali-ty grading” that follows.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 490.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols (run−flat tire or standard tire)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

402


6. Run−flat tire (RFT) or standardtire— This vehicle can beequipped with either run−flat tires(RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT”or “DSST” mark is molded on thesidewall of the run−flat tire. Fordetails, see “Run−flat tires” onpage 492.

7. Radial tire or bias−ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 490.

10.Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 517.

11.Summer tire or all seasontire— An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 415.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

403


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”— A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “COMPACT SPARE TIRE” onpage 437.

2. Tire size— For details, see “—Tiresize” on page 405.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 404.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 490.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 490.

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

404


6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 517.

7. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Radial tire or bias−ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

405


This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

406


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear— The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

407


Temperature A, B, C— The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

408


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire orIntended outboard sidewall deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

the sum of—the sum of—(a) curb weight;

Maximum loaded vehicle weight(a) curb weight(b) accessory weight;Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) d ti ti i ht( ) y g(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

409



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

410



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

411


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 487.Total load capacityTotal load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage. Tongue load is included whentrailer towing. For the total load ca-pacity about your vehicle, see “Totalload capacity” on page 513 in Section8.Seating capacity:

7−passenger models—Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)

8−passenger models—Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)

Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity:1587 kg (3500 Ib.)

Towing capacity means the maximumgross trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo weight) that your vehicle isable to tow.Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

412


When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following: Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent cargo and l uggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

413


(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 422.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of A kg (lb.) are ridingin your vehicle with the total load ca-pacity of B kg (lb.), the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:B kg (lb.) – A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of Dkg (lb.) get on, the available cargoand luggage load will be reduced Ekg (lb.) as follows:C kg (lb.) – D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 411.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

414


CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Cargocapacity

Weight of theremoved second seat

SEATING CONFIGURATIONVARIATIONIn case of removing the second seats,it is possible to load as much cargoas the weight of the removed seats.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) − (Total weight of occupants) +(Weight of the removed second seats)

Second seats weights:7−passenger models—

Right side 28 kg (61 lb.)Left side 25 kg (55 lb.)

8−passenger models—Right side 22 kg (48 lb.)Left side 22 kg (48 lb.)Center 24 kg (52 lb.)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

415


Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 401.

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels.

Types of tires

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

416


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

417


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All−wheel driving tips 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 428. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

418


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion height, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”position and release it, the cranking holdfunction continues to crank the engine in“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engineafter about 25 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,the function will keep cranking for about30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine——Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

419


Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START”. Release it when the enginestarts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page432 in Section 4.

NOTICE

Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engineTips for driving in variousconditions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

420


CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

If you need greater traction while driv-ing on sand, mud or snow coveredroadways, use tire chains on the frontwheels.

Always check your brakes for effective-ness immediately after driving acrosssand, mud, or water.

If operating in adverse conditionsfrequently, vehicle maintenance shouldbe increased. (See the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Observe the following tire instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

Keep your tire inflation pressure atthe proper level. (See “Checkingtire inflation pressure” on page 487in Section 7−2.)

Do not use tires (including snowtires) of different brands, sizes,construction or tread patterns. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 490 and “Installing snow tiresand chains” on page 494 in Section7−2.)

All−wheel driving tips (AWD models)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

421


Do not use tires with different treadwear. To equalize the tire wear, ro-tate tires at the appropriate interval.(See “Rotating tires” on page 492in Section 7−2.)

Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not use wheelsof different sizes and types. (See“Replacing wheels” on page 496 inSection 7−2.)

NOTICE

Do not attempt to go off−road in yourToyota. It is not designed for off−roaduse.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 484 in Section 7−2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35C(−31F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42C(−44F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 482 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

Winter driving tips

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

422


NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For your safe-ty and the safety of others, you must notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Ask yourlocal Toyota dealer for further details be-fore towing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

Dinghy towing Trailer towing

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

423


CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed the following.

1587 kg (3500 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it isnecessary to use a sway control de-vice with sufficient capacity. Thecombination of the gross trailerweight added to the total weight ofthe vehicle, occupants and vehiclecargo must never exceed a total ofthe following.

Two−wheel drive models3946 kg (8700 lb.)

All−wheel drive models3992 kg (8800 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight ofthe trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-hicle and trailer combination, cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

424


Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight100 = 9 to 11% (∗1)

or 15% (∗2)

The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% for weight carryinghitch (∗1) or 15% for weight distrib-uting hitch (∗2) of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumload of the following.

Weight carrying hitch158 kg (350 lb.)

Weight distributing hitch238 kg (525 lb.)

Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

HITCHES

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

425


A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 487 in Sec-tion 7−2 and page 517 in Section 8 forinstructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For thisinformation, please refer to thescheduled maintenance information inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

426


TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

Because stopping distance may be in-creased, following distance should beincreased when towing a trailer. Foreach 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allowat least one vehicle and trailer lengthbetween you and the vehicle ahead.Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,resulting in jackknifing and loss of con-trol. This is especially true on wet orslippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not place the transmissionin “D”.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

427


Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30C [85F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 436 inSection 4.

Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P”, start theengine. Be sure to keep the brake ped-al depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

428


Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page487 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.Driving with the selector lever in “4”will reduce the fuel economy. (For de-tails, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 205 in Section 1−7.)

Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

429


CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

430


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

431


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 455. . . . . . . . If you cannot operate back door opener 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

432


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”on page 418 in Section 3 and that youhave sufficient fuel. If your vehicle isequipped with the engine immobilizer sys-tem, also check whether the other keyswill start the engine. If they work, yourkey may be broken. Have the keychecked at your Toyota dealer. If none ofyour keys work, there may be a malfunc-tion in the immobilizer system. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engineimmobilizer system)” on page 10 in Sec-tion 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page433 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three−way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 432 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.Keep the key and accelerator pedal inthese positions for 15 seconds and re-lease them. Then try starting the enginewith your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

433


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

434


Discharged battery

Booster battery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)Jumper cable

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

BoosterbatteryNegative terminal

(“−” mark)

Discharged battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

435


5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 432 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot incr ease enginespeed

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

436


If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

437


1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

COMPACT SPARE TIREThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” moldedinto the side wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page487 in Section 7−2 for details on thetread wear indicators and other ser-vice information.

CAUTION

The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your To-yota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2kgf/cm 2 or bar, 60 psi).

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

If you have a flat tire——Standard tires information

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

438


Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

Avoid sudden a cceleration,sudden d eceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unp aved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

Some vehicles are equipped withrun−flat (RFT) tires. The run−flattire allows you to continue drivingfor up to 160 km (100 miles) at aspeed below 90 km/h (55 mph)even if any tire goes flat. However,in some conditions (such as hightemperatures), you could not con-tinue driving for up to 160 km (100miles).A spare tire is not provided on ve-hicles with run−flat tires.

When the tire goes flat or when thetire pressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm 2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. If you are notsure, consult your Toyota dealer.Do not use the repaired tire.There is an “RFT” or “DSST” mark onthe sidewall of the run−flat tire.For details about the run−flat tire, see“Run−flat tires” on page 492 in Sec-tion 7−2.

—Run−flat tires information

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

439


CAUTION

As the run−flat tire allows you tocontinue driving if any tire goesflat, the tire performance is notthe same as normal condition. Ifthe run−flat tire goes flat, takeyour vehicle to the nearest Toyo-ta dealer or authorized tire dealeras soon as possible, observingthe following instructions: Decelerate as soon as possible

to the lowest appropriatespeed that conditions permit.Do not drive for longer than160 km (100 miles) or over 90km/h (55 mph).

Avoid abrupt steering wheelmaneuvering and braking. Ifthe vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of thesteering wheel or the brakes,causing death or serious inju-ry.

Do not replace or repair the tireby yourself. When the tiresmust be replaced or repaired,consult your Toyota dealer orauthorized tire dealer.

NOTICE

Take due care not to go overa curb stone and be carefulof holes in the road becausedeflated tire pressure affectstire cushion performance.The wheels, tires, body, sus-pension and other compo-nents could be damaged.

Your ground clearance is re-duced if the run−flat tiregoes flat, so avoid drivingover obstacles and driveslowly on rough, unp avedroads and speed bumps.Also, do not attempt to gothrough an automatic carwash as the vehicle may getcaught, resulting in damage.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

440


1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Wheel nut wrench2. Jack handle 3. Jack4. Spare tire (vehicles with stan-

dard tires)To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.A spare tire is not provided on ve-hicles with run−flat tires.

To remove the tools, turn the knobcounterclockwise and remove thecover.

To remove the jack, turn the jack jointby hand until the jack becomes free.

—Required tools and sparetire (type A)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

441


To store the jack, turn the jack jointuntil the jack base fits securely withthe vehicle body.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To remove the wheel nut wrench, firstdisengage the upper part of thewrench from the holding bracket andremove it.When storing the wheel nut wrench,make sure the wrench is securelyheld.

To remove the spare tire:1. Slide the front passenger’s seat to

the front−most lock position andthe right side second seat to therear−most lock position so theywill not interfere with the wheel nutwrench.Open the right side sliding doorand you will find the flap on thefloor. Pull back the flap to find thespare tire clamp bolt.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

442


2. Loosen the spare tire clamp boltby turning it counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench.

3. After the tire is lowered completelyto the ground, remove the holdingbracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire, takingcare that the tire goes straight upwithout catching on any other part, toprevent it from flying forward duringa collision or sudden braking.As the tire carrier is designed for thecompact spare tire, the standard tirecannot be stored there.

CAUTION

Do not remove the spare tirewhen jacking up the vehicle. Thetire carrier and the spare tire mayinterfere with the jack and causea serious accident.

NOTICE

To secure spare tire clampbolt: Do not use impact wrench,but wheel nut wrench.

After taking out or stowingthe spare tire, make sure tosecure the tire carrier bytightening the clamp bolt toprevent the holding bracketfrom hitting the under bodyof the vehicle during driving.

Do not store the flat sparetire with the tire carrier so itmay not be held securely.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

443


1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Wheel nut wrench2. Jack handle3. Jack 4. Spare tire (vehicles with stan-

dard tires)To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.A spare tire is not provided on ve-hicles with run−flat tires.

To remove the tools, turn the knobcounterclockwise and remove thecover.

To remove the jack, turn the jack jointby hand until the jack becomes free.

—Required tools and sparetire (type B)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

444


To store the jack, turn the jack jointuntil the jack base fits securely withthe vehicle body.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To remove the wheel nut wrench, firstdisengage the upper part of thewrench from the holding bracket andremove it.When storing the wheel nut wrench,make sure the wrench is securelyheld.

To remove the spare tire:1. Remove the lid.2. Loosen the bolt, then remove the

bolt and spacer.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

445


When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

—Blocking the wheel—Removing wheel ornament(steel wheels)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

446


4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-en and the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury: Follow jacking instructions. Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

—Loosening wheel nuts —Jacking up precaution

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

447


Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

When jacking up the vehicle,turn off the power sliding doorsystem and the power backdoor system, and close thesliding door and the back doorcompletely.

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

—Positioning the jack

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

448


6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

—Raising your vehicle —Changing wheels

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

449


Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loosen and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

450


9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench totighten the nuts. Do not use othertools or any additional leverage otherthan your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure thewrench is securely engaged over thenut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.1. Put the wheel ornament into posi-

tion.Align the cutout of the wheel orna-ment with the valve stem as shown.2. Press hand firmly on one side of

wheel ornament and then firmlytap the other side around the edgeof wheel ornament with the heelof your hand to snap into place.

—Lowering your vehicle—Reinstalling wheel ornament(steel wheels)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

451


CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

11.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 517 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.12.Restow all the tools and jack se-

curely.

13.Wrap the flat tire in the tire bagand stow temporarily in the lug-gage compartment. The tire bagis stored with the jack handle.

As the tire carrier is designed for thecompact spare tire, the standard tirecannot be stored there.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 517 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.

—After changing wheels

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

452


Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 214 in Section 1−7.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Vehicles with traction control system(two−wheel drive models)—Turn off thetraction control system to become un-stuck to allow the tires to spin enoughto remove the vehicle from the obstruc-tion. (For details, see “Traction controlsystem (two−wheel drive models)” onpage 209 in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

453


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear


All−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

454


TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front— Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear— Use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatictransmission from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground, as thismay cause serious damage to thetransmission.


All−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


(c) Towing with slingtype truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

455


You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobilizer system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

Please contact your nearest Toyotadealer and you can purchase a newwireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

If you lose your keysIf you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

456


3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the back door opener does not oper-ate, you can open the back door fromthe inside.

To open the back door from inside, per-form the following procedure.

1. Remove the cover on the back doortrim.

Without power back door system

With power back door system

If you cannot operate backdoor opener

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

457


2. Pull the lever with the back door motor,open the back door.

Be sure to have the back door openerchecked/repaired by your Toyota dealer.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

458


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

459


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

460


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 461 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

461


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Washing and waxing yourToyota

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

462


Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

With mast type antenna:To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed beforedriving your Toyota through an au-tomatic car wash.

When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower sliding door and power backdoor system are off.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

463


Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbag and curtainshield airbag from activating cor-rectly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Cleaning the interior

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

464


Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol can sand others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

With on−glass antenna: When clean-ing the inside of the rear window,be careful not to scratch or damagethe printed antenna.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

465


Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

466


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

467


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 472. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

468


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to insure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 473 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

469


If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 503 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold.See page 484 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 485 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

Battery conditionCheck the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 500 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 485 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 482 in Section7−2 for additional information.

General maintenance

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

470


Power steering fluid levelCheck the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 486 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 392 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all seat controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operatesmoothly and that all latches lock securelyin any position. Check that the head re-straints move up and down smoothly andthat the locks hold securely in any latchedposition. For folding−down rear seatbacksand detachable second seats, check thatthe latches lock securely.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismOn a safe incline, check that your vehicleis held securely with the selector lever in“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all the doors including backdoor operate smoothly and all latches locksecurely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

471


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 487 in Section 7−2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page490 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 492 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

472


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

473


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 476. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 477. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 479. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

474


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine coolant reservoir

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Electric cooling fans

10. Condenser

11. Radiator

Engine compartment overview

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

475


Spare fuses

Sparefuses

Fuse locations

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

476


If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and Sections fordo−it−yourself maintenance, see “Partsand tools” on page 479 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

When the fan is operating after theengine is turned off, do not touchthe engine compartment. Doing somay result in injury or burn.

Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

477


Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−s ilicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

Rear (two−wheel drive models)

Positioning the jack

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

478


Rear (all−wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

479


Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 482 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON II or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent withsame amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 504 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

Screwdriver

Wrench

Parts and tools

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

480


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

481


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 482. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 484. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 487. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 490. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run−flat tires 492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 494. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

482


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on a level ground. After turn-ing off the engine, wait a few minutesfor the oil to drain back into the bottomof the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 514 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

483


Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE10W−30 oil may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

484


To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add thecoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap,radiator cap and drain cock and waterpump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35C(−31F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42C(−44F).

NOTICE


Checking the engine coolantlevel

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

485


Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

Checking the radiator andcondenser Checking brake fluid

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

486


If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

When the brake fluid must be replaced,contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

If cold add

If cold O.K.

If hot add

If hot O.K.

Open

Close

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Checking power steering fluid

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

487


Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRONII or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 513 and 517. Theyare also on the tire and loading infor-mation label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

Checking tire inflationpressure

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

488


The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed: The pressure s hould be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.

Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

489


5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure ( underinfla-tion)— Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire Poor sealing of the tire bead Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)— Poor handling Excessive wear Uneven wear A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

490


Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “ ∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep e nough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be repl aced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on all−wheel drive mod-els, all the tires must be the samebrand and have the same tread pat-terns.

Checking and replacing tires

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

491


Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 398 and 401.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.

Do not mix radial, bias belted,or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

All−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page437 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be repl acedwith a new one.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 214 in Section 1−7.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

492


To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page437 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

Some vehicles are equipped withrun−flat (RFT) tires. The run−flattire allows you to continue drivingfor up to 160 km (100 miles) at aspeed below 90 km/h (55 mph)even if any tire goes flat. However,in some conditions (such as hightemperatures), you could not con-tinue driving for up to 160 km (100miles).A spare tire is not provided on ve-hicles with run−flat tires.

Rotating tires Run−flat tires

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

493


When the tire goes flat or when thetire pressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm 2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. If you are notsure, consult your Toyota dealer.Do not use the repaired tire.There is an “RFT” or “DSST” mark onthe sidewall of the run−flat tire.If you cannot distinguish between thestandard tire and run−flat tire, consultyour Toyota dealer.The tire warranty book provides de-tailed information on the run−flat tires.For details, see the tire warrantybook.

CAUTION

Do not use non−genuinewheels, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use the run−flat tiresequipped on your vehicle onanother model. These tires areespecially for this model.

Do not mix run−flat tires withstandard tires.

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on:Decelerate at a speed below 90km/h (55 mph), then adjust the tirepressure to the specified level assoon as possible. Do not drivemore than 160 km (100 miles). When the tire pressure is below

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 20psi), consult your Toyota deal-er. If the tire is flat or the tirepressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm 2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. Do not usethe repaired tire.

When the tire pressure is 140kPa (1.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 20 psi)or more, adjust it to specifiedlevel. (See “Tires” on page 517in Section 8.)

See “Tire pressure warning system”on page 214 in Section 1−7 and“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 487 in this Section.

CAUTION

As the run−flat tire allows you tocontinue driving if any tire goesflat, the tire performance is notthe same as normal condition. Ifthe run−flat tire goes flat, takeyour vehicle to the nearest Toyo-ta dealer or authorized tire dealeras soon as possible, observingthe following instructions: Decelerate as soon as possible

to the lowest appropriatespeed that conditions permit.Do not drive for longer than160 km (100 miles) or over 90km/h (55 mph).

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

494


Avoid abrupt steering wheelmaneuvering and braking. Ifthe vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of thesteering wheel or the brakes,causing death or serious inju-ry.

Do not replace or repair the tireby yourself. When the tiresmust be replaced or repaired,consult your Toyota dealer orauthorized tire dealer.

NOTICE

Take due care not to go overa curb stone and be carefulof the holes in the road be-cause deflated tire pressureaffects tire cushion perfor-mance. The wheels, tires,body, suspension and othercomponents could be dam-aged.

Your ground clearance is re-duced if the run−flat tiregoes flat so avoid drivingover obstacles and driveslowly on rough, unp avedroads and speed bumps.Also, do not attempt to gothrough an automatic carwash as the vehicle may getcaught, resulting in damage.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on all−wheel drive models, all thetires must be the same brand and havethe same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

Installing snow tires andchains

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

495


CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

All−wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place. Mark thedirection of rotation and be sure to installthem in the same direction when replac-ing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Vehicles with run−flat tires—Do notreplace or repair the tire by your-self. When the tires must be re-placed or repaired, consult yourToyota dealer or authorized tiredealer.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size andtype.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V−bar typechains.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

496


CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetires, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

All−wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Replacing wheels

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

497


Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 214in Section 1−7.

When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

498


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

499


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

500


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Terminals Ground cable

Hold−downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

501


NOTICE

Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window, power slidingdoor, power back door and moon roof maynot operate correctly and the jam protec-tion function will not function correctly,and does not open the back door afteryou reconnect, replace or recharge thebattery. In any of these cases, you shouldnormalize each system. To normalizethem, see “Power sliding doors” on page28, “Power back door” on page 38, “Powerwindows” on page 43 and “Electric moonroof” on page 53 in Section 1−2.

Type A

Green DarkClear orlight yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

502


Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type C

Good Blown

Type D

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 475 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 518 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type C and D—When any of the fusesare blown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing fuses

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

503


Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “HTR” (10A), “AC INV” or “RAD NO.1” fuse, whichmay be dispensable for normal driving,and use it if its amperage rating is thesame.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

You should normalize the power window,power sliding door, power back door andmoon roof if they do not operate automati-cally or the jam protection function doesnot operate correctly after replacing blownfuses. To normalize them, see “Power slid-ing doors” on page 28, “Power back door”on page 38, “Power windows” on page 43and “Electric moon roof” on page 53 inSection 1−2.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work or the lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

504


The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The high mounted stoplight consists of anumber of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burnout, take your vehicle to your Toyota deal-er to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

When replacing the rear light bulbs,turn off the power back door sys-tem to prevent an unexpected seri-ous injury.

Vehicles with discharge headlights—

Do not touch the high−intensity dis-charge headlight’s high voltagesocket when the headlights areturned on. An extremely high volt-age of 20000 V will be dischargedand could result in serious injury ordeath by electric shock.

Do not attempt to take apart or re-pair the low beam headlight bulbs,connectors, power supply circuits,or related components. Doing socould result in electric shock andserious injury or death. Call yourToyota dealer for headlight repair orservicing, including replacement ofbulbs and bulb disposal.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs—

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

505


A: D2R discharge bulbsB: HB4 halogen bulbsC: HB3 halogen bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (clear)E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)F: Single end bulbsG: Double end bulbs

TypeWBulb No.

3551

Light bulbs

Headlights (low beam)With discharge headlightsWithout discharge headlights

Headlights (high beam)

—9006

AB

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Back−up lights

License plate lights

Luggage compartment light

609005 C

51— B

5— E

303457A E

21— D

21/5— D

18921 D

5— D

5— G

Tail lights 3.8194 D

Front personal lights 4.9— F

Rear personal lights 4.9— F

Vanity lights 3— G

Door courtesy lights 3.8— F

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

506


1. Open the hood. Press the bulb baseslightly and turn the bulb base coun-terclockwise to the front of the ve-hicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connec-tor and install it into the mountinghole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

507


If either the left or right front fog lightbulbs burns out, contact your Toyotadealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front foglight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

—Front fog lights —Front turn signal lights—Parking and front sidemarker lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

508


Remove the bolts. Remove the unit by usingthe flathead screwdriver with cloth.

a: Rear turn signal lightb: Stop/tail and rear side marker light

Remove the strap with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

—Rear turn signal, stop/tailand rear side marker lights —Tail and back−up lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

509


a: Tail lightb: Back−up light

NOTICE

When installing the back door trim,be careful not to jam any wire har-ness and connector. Otherwise, theymay be damaged.

Remove the strap with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

—License plate lights

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

510


NOTICE

When installing the back door trim,be careful not to jam any wire har-ness and connector. Otherwise, theymay be damaged.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

511


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 512. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total load capacity 513. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 518. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

512


Dimensions and weights

Overall width mm (in.)

3030 (119.3)

Overall height mm (in.)

1700 (66.9)∗2

1710 (67.3)∗3

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1665 (65.6)∗2

1675 (65.9)∗3

Rear tread mm (in.)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With P215/65R16 tires∗3: With P225/60R17 tires

Overall length mm (in.) 5105 (201.0)

1965 (77.4)

1750 (68.9)∗1

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

1587 (3500)

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

513


For the U.S.A.— kg (lb.)

LE grade8−passenger models 550 (1210)

Front wheel drive modelsLE grade

7−passenger models 520 (1150)

WagonFront−wheel drive models

XLE or Limited grade8−passenger models 550 (1210)

Wagon XLE or Limited grade7−passenger models 510 (1120)

All wheel drive modelsLE grade

7 passenger models500 (1100)

All−wheel drive modelsXLE or Limited grade

7−passenger models480 (1050)

Van 550 (1210)

For Canada— kg (lb.)

LE or CE grade8−passenger models 550 (1210)

Front wheel drive modelsLE or CE grade

7−passenger models 520 (1150)

WagonFront−wheel drive models

XLE or Limited grade8−passenger models 550 (1210)

Wagon XLE or Limited grade7−passenger models 510 (1120)

All wheel drive modelsLE or CE grade

7 passenger models500 (1100)

All−wheel drive modelsXLE or Limited grade

7−passenger models480 (1050)

Van 550 (1210)

Total load capacity

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

514


Model:2GR−FE

Type:6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):94.0 83.0 (3.70 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):3456 (210.9)

Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):79 (21, 17.5)

ENGINE

Spark plug type:DENSO FK20HR11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE

Use only above spark plugs. Do notadjust gaps for engine performance orsmooth driveab ility.

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With filter 6.1 (6.4, 5.4)Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Engine Fuel Service specifications

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

515


Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):11.3 (12.0, 10.0)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20C (68F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringoptimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” may cause deterioration in shiftquality, locking up of your transmissionaccompanied by vibration, and ultimate-ly damage the automatic transmissionof your vehicle.


07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

516


TRANSFER(all−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18C (0F)

SAE 90Below −18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

REAR DIFFERENTIAL(all−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18C (0F)

SAE 90Below −18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

52 (2.0)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

3—5 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONIIor III

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

517


Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:Front and rear

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire sizeTire inflation pressure

Wheel sizeTire sizeFront Rear

Wheel size

P215/65R16 96T 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 16 6 1/2JJ

P225/60R17 98T 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 17 6 1/2J

Spare kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel size

T155/80R17 101M 420 (4.2, 60) 420 (4.2, 60) 17 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 487 through 497, in Section 7−2.

Tires

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

518


Engine compartment

Instrument panel (driver’s side)

Fuses (type A)

1. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

2. EFI NO. 1 20 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, “EFI NO. 2” fuse

3. H−LP RL 15 A: Right−hand headlight(low beam)

4. DRL 20 A: Daytime running light sys-tem, “H−LP RH” and “H−LP LH” fuses

5. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

6. H−LP LL 15 A: Left−hand headlight(low beam), front fog lights

Instrument panel (passenger’s side)

7. DOOR NO. 2 25 A: Power door locksystem

8. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-cy flashers

9. RAD NO. 3 30 A: Audio system

10. A/F 25 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

11. HORN 10 A: Horns

12. EFI NO. 2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

Fuses

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

519


13. DOME 10 A: Personal lights, vanitylights, door courtesy lights, luggagecompartment light, ignition switch light,multi−information display

14. ECU−B 10 A: Power sliding door, airconditioning system, power windows,multiplex communication system, meterand gauge, wireless remote controlsystem

15. RAD NO. 1 20 A: Audio system, rearseat entertainment system

16. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse




20. SPARE 7.5 A: Spare fuse

21. H−LP RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight

22. H−LP LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight

23. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat entertainmentsystem

24. INJ 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

25. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-ror heaters

26. RAD2 7.5 A: Audio system, navigationsystem, rear seat entertainment system

27. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

28. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

29. ECU ACC 7.5 A: Shift lock controlsystem, air conditioning system, powerrear view mirror control

30. GAUGE2 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

31. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, SRS airbag system, multiplexcommunication system

32. IG2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

33. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper

34. WIP 30 A: Windshield wiper and rearwindow wiper

35. GAUGE1 10 A: Back−up lights, turnsignal lights, emergency flashers

36. S−HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

37. WSH 20 A: Windshield washer andrear window washer

38. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning system

39. ECU−IG 10 A: Toyota park assist sys-tem, rear view monitor system, multi-plex communication system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, anti−lockbrake system, traction control system,vehicle stability control system, shiftlock control system, dynamic lasercruise control system, seat heaters,power back door, electronic moon roof,multi−information display, auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror, powerwindows, power outlets (115 V), powerthird seat, driving position memory sys-tem

40. PANEL 10 A: Air conditioning system,seat heaters, audio system, navigationsystem, power sliding door, power backdoor, multi−information display, rearwindow defogger, emergency flashers,instrument panel lights, steering switchlights

41. TAIL 10 A: Stop/tail lights, licenseplate lights, parking lights, side markerlights

42. S/ROOF 25 A: Electronic moon roof

43. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets (115 V)

44. FR DEF 15 A: Windshield wiper de−icer

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

520


45. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, starter system

46. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, highmounted stoplight, shift lock controlsystem, anti−lock brake system, trac-tion control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, multiplex communicationsystem

47. P/W 25 A: Power windows, power rearview mirror

48. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

49. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

50. P/VENT 15 A: Power quarter windows

51. ST 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

52. A/C 7.5 A: Manual air conditioning sys-tem

53. SFT 5 A: Shift lock control system

Fuses (type B)

54. MAIN 30 A: Headlights, daytime run-ning light system, “H−LP RL” and “H−LP LL” fuses

55. AM2 30 A: “INJ”, “IGN” and “GAUGE2”fuses

56. L−RR2 SEAT 30 A: Power third seat

57. R−RR2 SEAT 30 A: Power third seat

58. P/SEAT 30 A: Power front seats

59. PWR 30 A: Power windows

Fuses (type C)

60. RR2 SEAT 50 A: Power third seat

61. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system,“A/C” fuse

62. FAN 50 A: Electric cooling fans

63. PBD 30 A: Power back door

64. R−PSD 30 A: Right side power slidingdoor

65. L−PSD 30 A: Left side power slidingdoor

66. RR A/C 40 A: Rear air conditioningsystem

67. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger,“MIR HTR” fuse

68. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system

69. ABS2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system

70. ST 30 A: Starting system

Fuse (type D)

71. ALT 140 A: Charging system, “RRA/C”, “HTR”, “FAN”, “PBD”, “R−PSD”,“L−PSD” and “DEF” fuses

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

521


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 522. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)

522


If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll−free at1−888−327−4236 (TTY: 1−800−424−9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

65

ADVANCED FUNCTIONSDescriptions of functions for more effective useSuspending and resuming guidance 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User selection 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . My places 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registering memory points 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing memory points 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting memory points 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering home 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting home 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering area to avoid 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing area to avoid 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting area to avoid 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete previous points 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION IV

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

66

Suspending and resumingguidance To suspend guidance

1. Push the “MENU” button.

2. Touch “Suspend Guidance”.

INFORMATIONWithout route guidance, “SuspendGuidance” cannot be used.

The screen will return to the current positionmap without route guidance.

To resume guidance


2. Touch “Resume Guidance”.

The screen will change to the current positionmap with route guidance.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

67

VolumeVoice guidance can be used when approach-ing a destination.

The volume of the voice or turn off voice guid-ance can be adjusted.


2. Touch “Volume”.

To adjust the volume, select the desired levelby touching the appropriate number.

If voice guidance is unneeded, touch “OFF” .

The selected item is highlighted.

INFORMATIONDuring route guidance, the voice guid-ance continues even if the navigationscreen is changed to other screens.

“Adaptive Volume Control”: By turning“Adaptive Volume Control” on, the volume isturned up automatically when the vehiclespeed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h).

To turn the “Adaptive Volume Control” systemon, touch the button. The indicator will behighlighted.

User selectionThe system can memorize the following set-tings for up to three users.

Map direction

Map scale

Map configuration

Guidance mode

Setup

Volume

Language

Route trace

Travel time/arrival time

Right screen of dual map

Road preference

Maintenance notification

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

68


2. Touch “Select User”.

To register

1. Touch “Memorize”.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. To register, touch “Yes”. To return tothe previous screen, touch “No” or .

When a touch−screen button that is alreadyregistered is touched, the following screenappears.

To replace, touch “Yes” . To cancel the re-placement, touch “No” or .

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

69

To change user

Touch “User number”.

The above message appears, then the mapscreen will be displayed.

To delete user

1. Touch “Delete”.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. To delete, touch “Yes”. To return to theprevious screen, touch “No” or .

My places —Points or areas on the map can be registered.

The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “ — Destinationsearch by Home” on page 26 and “ — Des-tination search by Quick access” on page 27.)

Registered areas are avoided at the time ofroute search.


2. Touch “My Places”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

70

On this screen, the following operations canbe performed.1 Registers memory points. (See “ —

Registering memory points” on page70.)

2 Edits memory points. (See “ — Editingmemory points” on page 71.)

3 Deletes memory points. (See “ — De-leting memory points” on page 75.)

4 Registers or deletes home. (See “ —Registering home” or “ — Deletinghome” on pages 75 or 76.)

5 Registers areas to avoid. (See “ —Registering area to avoid” on page 76.)

6 Edits areas to avoid. (See “ — Editingarea to avoid” on page 77.)

7 Deletes areas to avoid. (See “ — Delet-ing area to avoid” on page 79.)

8 Deletes previous points. (See “ — De-leting previous points” on page 80.)

9 Number of remaining memory points10 Number of remaining areas to avoid

— Registering memory points

1. Touch “Register”.

2. Enter the location in the same way asfor a destination search. (See “Destinationsearch” on page 24.)

After memory point registration is completed,the “Memory Point” screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

71

3. Touch “OK”.To edit registered information, see “ — Editingmemory points” on page 71.

INFORMATIONUp to 106 memory points can be regis-tered.

— Editing memory pointsThe icon, attribute, name, location and/ortelephone number of a registered memorypoint can be edited.

1. Touch “Edit”.

2. Touch the desired memory point but-ton.

3. Touch the touch−screen button to beedited.

“Icon”: To select icons to be displayed on themap. (See page 72.)

“Quick Access”: To set an attribute.Memory points with a set attribute can beused as a “Quick access” or “Home” button.(See page 73.)

“Name”: To edit memory point names. Thenames can be displayed on the map. (Seepage 74.)

“Location”: To edit location information.(See page 74.)

“Phone #”: To edit telephone numbers. (Seepage 75.)

4. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

72

To change “Icon”

1. Touch “Icon” on the “Memory Point”screen.

2. Touch the desired icon.Turn the page by touching “Page 1” , “Page2” or “with Sound” .

SOUND ICONS

When the vehicle approaches the memorypoint, the selected sound will be heard.

1. Touch “with Sound” on the “ChangeIcon” screen.

2. Touch the desired sound icon.The next screen appears when “Bell (withDirection)” is touched.

Touch either or to adjust the direc-tion. Touch “Enter”.

The bell sounds only when the vehicle ap-proaches this point in the direction that hasbeen set.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

73

To change “Quick Access”

It is possible to change attributes of the quickaccess points. Memory points with a set at-tribute can be used as a “Quick access” or“Home” touch−screen button. (See “ — Des-tination search by Home” on page 26 and “ —Destination search by Quick access” on page27.)

1. Touch “Quick Access” on the “MemoryPoint” screen.

2. Touch the desired attribute.

It is possible to replace a registered attribute.

3. To replace the attribute, touch “Yes”.To return to the previous screen, touch“No” or .

INFORMATIONOne “Home” and five “Quick access”can be set.

DELETING “Quick Access”

1. Touch “Del.”.

2. To delete an attribute, touch “Yes”. Toreturn to the previous screen, touch “No”or .

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

74

To change “Name”

1. Touch “Name” on the “Memory Point”screen.

2. Enter the name using the alphanumerickeys.

Up to 24 letters can be entered.

3. Touch “OK”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

DISPLAYING MEMORY POINT NAMES

The name of a memory point that may be dis-played on the map can be set.

To show the name, touch “ON” on the“Memory Point” screen. To not show it,touch “OFF”.

To change “Location”

1. Touch “Location” on the “MemoryPoint” screen.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−screen bu tton to move the cursor to thedesired point on the map.3. Touch “Enter”.


ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

75

To change “Phone #” (telephone num-ber)

1. Touch “Phone #” on the “MemoryPoint” screen.

2. Enter the number using numeral keys.

3. Touch “OK”.The previous screen will be displayed.

— Deleting memory points


2. Touch the touch−screen button to bedeleted.“Delete All”: To delete all memory points inthe system.

3. To delete the memory point, touch“Yes”. To cancel the deletion, touch “No”.

— Registering homeIf home has been registered, that informationcan be recalled by using the “Home” touch−screen button on the “Destination” screen.(See “ — Destination search by Home” onpage 26.)


ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

76

2. Enter the location in the same way asfor a destination search. (See “Destinationsearch” on page 24.)

When registration of home is completed, the“Memory Point” screen will be displayed.

3. Touch “OK”.

To edit registered information, see “ — Editingmemory points” on page 71.

— Deleting home


2. To delete home, touch “Y es”. To cancelthe deletion, touch “No”.

— Registering area to avoidAreas you want to avoid because of trafficjams, construction work or other reasons canbe registered as areas to avoid.


2. Enter the location in the same way asfor a destination search, or display themap of the area to be avoided. (See “Des-tination search” on page 24.)

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

77

3. Set the cursor in the center of thearea to avoid, and touch “Enter”.

4. Touch either or to changethe size of the area to be avoided.5. Touch “OK”.

INFORMATION If a destination is input in the area to

avoid or the route calculation cannotbe made without running through thearea to avoid, a route passing throughthe area to be avoided may be shown.

Up to 10 locations can be registeredas points/areas to avoid. If there are10 locations already registered, thefollowing message will be displayed:“Unable to register additional points.Perform operation again after delet-ing unnecessary points.”.

— Editing area to avoidThe name, location and/or area size of a reg-istered area can be edited.


2. Touch the desired area button.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

78


“Name”: To edit the name of the area toavoid. The names can be displayed on themap. (See page 78.)

“Location”: To edit area location. (See page79.)

“Area Size”: To edit area size. (See page79.)

“Active”: To turn on or off the area to avoidfeature. To turn on the feature touch “ON” onthe “Edit Area to Avoid” screen. To turn off thefeature touch “OFF” on the “Edit Area toAvoid” screen.

4. Touch “OK”.

To change “Name”

1. Touch “Name” on the “Edit Area toAvoid” screen.

2. Enter the name using alphanumerickeys.


3. Touch “OK”.


DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS TO BEAVOIDEDThe name of an area to be avoided that maybe displayed on the map can be set.

To show the name, touch “ON” on the“Edit Area to Avoid” screen. To not showit, touch “OFF”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

79

To change “Location”

1. Touch “Location” on the “Edit Area toAvoid” screen.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−screen button to move the cursor to thedesired point on the map.3. Touch “Enter”.


To change “Area Size”

1. Touch “Area Size” on the “Edit Area toAvoid” screen.

2. Touch either or to changethe size of the area to be avoided.


— Deleting area to avoid

1. Touch “Delete” on the “My Places”screen.

2. Touch the touch−screen button to bedeleted.

“Delete All”: To delete all registered areas toavoid in the system.

3. To delete the area, touch “Yes”. To can-cel the deletion, touch “No”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

80

— Deleting previous pointsThe previous destination can be deleted.

1. Touch “Delete Previous Points”.

2. Touch the touch−screen button youwant to delete.

“Delete All”: To delete all previous points inthe system.

3. To delete the point, touch “Yes”. Tocancel the deletion, touch “No”.

SetupSetting the items shown on the “Setup”screen can be done. (See page ix.)


2. Touch “Setup”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

81

3. Touch the items to be set.


INFORMATIONTo reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

Distance unit

Distance unit can be changed.

1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

2. Touch “km” or “miles” of “Distance” tochoose the distance unit.

The selected button is highlighted.

3. Touch “OK”.

INFORMATIONThis function is available only in Englishor Spanish. To switch language, see“Select language” on page 149.

Estimated travel time

The speed that is used for the calculation ofthe estimated travel time and the estimatedarrival time can be set.


2. Touch “Set Speed” of the “EstimatedTravel Time”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

82

3. Touch or to set the average ve-

hicle speeds for “Residential”, “Mainstreet”, and “Freeway”.

To set the default speeds, touch “Default” .

4. After setting of the desired speeds iscompleted, touch “OK”.

INFORMATION The displayed time to the destination

is the approximate driving time that iscalculated based on the selectedspeeds and the actual position alongthe guidance route.

The time shown on the screen mayvary greatly depending on progressalong the route, which may be af-fected by road conditions such astraffic jams, and construction work.

It is possible to display up to 99 hours59 minutes.

Input key layout

Key layout can be changed.


2. Touch “ABC” or “QWE” of “KeyboardLayout” to choose the Input key layout.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

83

LAYOUT TYPE

“ABC” type

“QWE” type


3. Touch “OK”.

Time zone

Time zone can be changed.


2. Touch “Change” of “Time Zone”.The “Adjust Time Zone” screen will be dis-played on the display.

3. Touch the desired time zone.The selected button is highlighted.

“Daylight Saving Time”: Daylight savingtime can be set or cancelled.

To set daylight saving time, touch “ON” , andto cancel it, touch “OFF” .

4. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

84

Screen layout function ( Function)

Each touch−screen button and current streetname on the map screen can be displayed orhidden.


2. Touch “Change” of “ Function”.

3. Touch the touch−screen button to beturned off. The button becomes dimmed.

To set the default, touch “Default” .

4. Touch “OK”.

POI category change (Display POI Icons)

Select from among the 6 icons displayed onthe “Display POI Icons” top screen, so thatsetting of the icons to be displayed on the mapscreen can be done easily.


Then touch to display page 2 of the “Set-up” screen.

2. Touch “Change” of “Display POIIcons”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

85

3. Touch the category button to bechanged.

4. Touch the category button to be dis-played on the “Display POI Icons” topscreen.

5. Touch “OK”.

Display of building shape

When the “Display Building Shapes” featureis turned on, the system will display the build-ing shape on the map screen using a scale of150 feet (50 m) to 300 feet (100 m).

To turn the “Display Building Shapes” on:



2. Touch “ON” of “Display BuildingShapes”.


3. Touch “OK”.

Notifying traffic restriction

When the “Traffic Restrict. Notification” fea-ture is turned on, the system notifies you oftraffic or seasonal restrictions.

To turn the “Traffic Restrict. Notification” on:



2. Touch “ON” of “Traffic Restrict. Notifi-cation”.


3. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

86

Voice recognition guidance

When the “Voice Recognition Guidance” fea-ture is turned on, the voice recognition guid-ance can be heard automatically.

To turn the “Voice Recognition Guidance” on:



2. Touch “ON” of “Voice RecognitionGuidance”.The selected button is highlighted.

3. Touch “OK”.

Voice guidance in all modes

When the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” fea-ture is turned on, the voice guidance in allmodes can be heard.

When the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” fea-ture is turned off, voice guidance cannot beheard when using the audio system.

To turn the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” on:



2. Touch “ON” of “Voice Guidance in AllModes”.


3. Touch “OK”.

Auto voice guidance

When the “Auto Voice Guidance” feature isturned on, the voice guidance can be heardautomatically.

When the “Auto Voice Guidance” feature isturned off, the voice guidance can be heardonly if the “MAP/VOICE” button is pushed.

To turn the “Auto Voice Guidance” mode on:


Then touch twice to display page 3 of the“Setup” screen.

2. Touch “ON” of “Auto V oice Guidance”.


3. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

87

Pop−up message

When the “Pop−up Message” is turned on,the Pop−up message will be displayed.

To turn the “Pop−up Message” on:



2. Touch “ON” of “Pop−up Message”.The selected button is highlighted.

3. Touch “OK”.

When the “Pop−up Message” is turned off, fol-lowing messages are not displayed.

This message appears when the system is inthe POI mode and the map scale is 1 mile (1.6km) or greater.

The message appears when the map isswitched to the dual map screen mode.

Current position/tire change calibra-tion

The current vehicle position mark can be ad-justed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-tance caused by tire replacement can also beadjusted.



2. Touch “Adjust” of “Calibration”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

88

3. Touch the desired touch−screen but-ton.

INFORMATIONFor additional information on the accu-racy of a current vehicle position, see“Limitations of the navigation system”on page 202.

POSITION/DIRECTION CALIBRATION

When driving, the current vehicle positionmark will be automatically corrected by GPSsignals. If GPS reception is poor due to loca-tion, you can manually adjust the current ve-hicle position mark.

1. Touch “Position/Direction”.

2. Touch the scroll arrows to move thecursor to your desired location.3. Touch “Enter”.

4. Touch either or to adjust the di-rection of the current vehicle positionmark.

5. Touch “Enter”.

The map screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

89

TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

The tire change calibration function will beused when replacing the tires. This functionwill adjust the mis−calculation caused by thecircumference difference between the oldand new tires. If this procedure is not per-formed when tires are replaced, the currentvehicle position mark may be incorrectly dis-played.

To perform a distance calibration proce-dure, touch “Tire Change” on the “Cal-ibration” screen.The message appears and the quick distancecalibration is automatically started. A fewseconds later, a map screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

90

APPENDIX

201

APPENDIXAppendixLimitations of the navigation system 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map database information and updates 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VII

SECTION VII

APPENDIX

202

Limitations of the navigationsystemThis navigation system calculates the cur-rent vehicle position using satellite sig-nals, various vehicle signals, map data,etc. However, the accurate position maynot be shown depending on the satellitecondition, road configuration, vehiclecondition or other circumstances.The Global Positioning System (GPS) devel-oped and operated by the U.S. Department ofDefense provides an accurate current vehicleposition using 3 to 4 satellites. The GPS sys-tem has a certain level of inaccuracy. Whilethe navigation system will compensate forthis most of the time, occasional positioningerrors of up to 300 feet (100 m) can andshould be expected. Generally, position er-rors will be corrected within a few seconds.

When your vehicle is receiving signals fromthe satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at thetop left of the screen.

The GPS signal may be physically ob-structed, leading to inaccurate vehicle posi-tion on the map display. Tunnels, tall build-ings, trucks, or even the placement of objectson the instrument panel may obstruct theGPS signals.

The GPS satellites may not send signals dueto repairs or improvements being made tothem.

Even when the navigation system is receivingclear GPS signals, the vehicle position maynot be shown accurately or inappropriateroute guidance may occur in some cases.

NOTICE

The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion. We advise against the use of win-dow tinting on vehicles equipped withnavigation systems.

APPENDIX

203

(a) Accurate current vehicle positionmay not be shown in the following cases: When driving on a small angled Y−shaped

road.

When driving on a winding road.

When driving on a slippery road such asin sand, gravel, snow, etc.

When driving on a long straight road.

When freeway and surface streets run inparallel.

After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.

When a long route is searched during highspeed driving.

When driving without setting the currentposition calibration correctly.

After repeating a change of direction bygoing forward and backward, or turning ona turntable in the parking lot.

When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

When a roof carrier is installed.

When driving with tire chains installed.

When the tires are worn.

After replacing a tire or tires.

When using tires that are smaller or largerthan the factory specifications.

When the tire pressure in any of the fourtires is not correct.

INFORMATIONIf your vehicle cannot receive GPS sig-nals, you can correct the current posi-tion manually. For information on set-ting the current position calibration, see“ Current position/tire change calibra-tion” on page 87.

(b) Inappropriate route guidance may oc-cur in the following cases: When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.

If you set more than one destination butskip any of them, auto reroute will displaya route returning to the destination on theprevious route.

When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.

When passing through an intersection,there is no route guidance.

During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.

It may take a long time to operate auto re-route during high speed driving. In autoreroute, a detour route may be shown.

After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

An unnecessary U−turn may be shown orannounced.

A location may have multiple names andthe system will announce one or more.

Some routes may not be searched.

If the route to your destination includesgravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the routeguidance may not be shown.

VII

APPENDIX

204

Your destination point might be shown onthe opposite side of the street.

When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time or season or other rea-sons.

The road and map data stored in your nav-igation system may not be complete ormay not be the latest version.

After replacing the tire, implement the op-eration described in the “ Current posi-tion/tire change calibration”. (See page87.)This navigation system uses tire turning dataand is designed to work with factory−speci-fied tires for your vehicle. Installing tires thatare larger or smaller than the originallyequipped diameter may cause inaccuratedisplay of the vehicle’s position. The tire pres-sure also affects the diameter of the tires soplease make sure the tire pressure of all fourtires is correct.

Map database information andupdatesThis system uses the maps of DENSO.

2006 DENSO CORPORATION

2005 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.

2005 Tele Atlas North America, Inc. Allrights reserved. This material is propri-etary and the subject of copyright protec-tion and other intellectual property rightsowned by or licensed to Tele Atlas NorthAmerica, Inc. The use of this material issubject to the terms of a license agree-ment. You will be held liable for any unau-thorized copying or disclosure of this ma-terial.

Data by infoUSA Copyright 2005, AllRights Reserved.

2005 VISA Corporation

National Research Bureau 2005

The Bullseye Design is a registeredtrademark of Target Brands, Inc.

END−USER TERMSThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not for re-sale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms and condi-tions which are agreed to by you, on theone hand, and DENSO CORPORATION(“[CLIENT]”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on the otherhand.

2005 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.

The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, Queen’s Printer for Ontario, CanadaPost Corporation, GeoBase

NAVTEQ holds a non−exclusive licensefrom the United States Postal Serviceto publish and sell ZIP+4 information.

United States Postal Service 2005.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService. The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4.

APPENDIX

205

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Personal Use Only. You agree to use thisData together with the navigation systemfor the solely personal, non−commercialpurposes for which you were licensed,and not for service bureau, time−sharingor other similar purposes. Accordingly,but subject to the restrictions set forth inthe following paragraphs, you may copythis Data only as necessary for your per-sonal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, pro-vided that you do not remove any copy-right notices that appear and do notmodify the Data in any way. You agreenot to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,decompile, disassemble or reverse engi-neer any portion of this Data, and may nottransfer or distribute it in any form, for anypurpose, except to the extent permittedby mandatory laws. Multi−disc sets mayonly be transferred or sold as a completeset as provided by [CLIENT] and not asa subset thereof.

Restrictions. Except where you havebeen specifically licensed to do so by[CLIENT], and without limiting the pre-ceding paragraph, you may not (a) usethis Data with any products, systems, orapplications installed or otherwise con-nected to or in communication with ve-hicles, capable of vehicle navigation,positioning, dispatch, real time routeguidance, fleet management or similarapplications; or (b) with or in communica-tion with any positioning devices or anymobile or wireless−connected electronicor computer devices, including withoutlimitation cellular phones, palmtop andhandheld computers, pagers, and per-sonal digital assistants or PDAs.

Warning. The Data may contain inaccu-rate or incomplete information due to thepassage of time, changing circum-stances, sources used and the nature ofcollecting comprehensive geographicdata, any of which may lead to incorrectresults.

No Warranty. This Data is provided toyou “as is,” and you agree to use it at yourown risk. [CLIENT] and its licensors(and their licensors and suppliers) makeno guarantees, representations or war-ranties of any kind, express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, including butnot limited to, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliability,fitness for a particular purpose, useful-ness, use or results to be obtained fromthis Data, or that the Data or server willbe uninterrupted or error−free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: [CLIENT] ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DIS-CLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESSOR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PER-FORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-POSE OR NON−INFRINGEMENT.Some States, Territories and Countriesdo not allow certain warranty exclusions,so to that extent the above exclusionmay not apply to you. VII

APPENDIX

206

Disclaimer of Liability: [CLIENT] ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALLNOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECTOF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OFTHE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMANDOR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, IN-JURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR IN-DIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROMTHE USE OR POSSESSION OF THEINFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSSOF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTSOR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DI-RECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-CIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-AGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USEOF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS IN-FORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE IN-FORMATION, OR THE BREACH OFTHESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CON-TRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF [CLIENT] OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-AGES. Some States, Territories andCountries do not allow certain liability ex-clusions or damages limitations, so tothat extent the above may not apply toyou.

Export Control. You agree not to exportfrom anywhere any part of the Data pro-vided to you or any direct product thereofexcept in compliance with, and with all li-censes and approvals required under,applicable export laws, rules and regula-tions.

Entire Agreement. These terms and con-ditions constitute the entire agreementbetween [CLIENT] (and its licensors, in-cluding their licensors and suppliers) andyou pertaining to the subject matter here-of, and supersedes in their entirety anyand all written or oral agreements pre-viously existing between us with respectto such subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the lawsof the State of Illinois [insert “Nether-lands” where European NAVTEQ Data isused], without giving effect to (i) its con-flict of laws provisions, or (ii) the UnitedNations Convention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which is ex-plicitly excluded. You agree to submit tothe jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [in-sert “The Netherlands” where EuropeanNAVTEQ Data is used] for any and all dis-putes, claims and actions arising from orin connection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.

Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by the UnitedStates government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with these End User Terms,and each copy of the Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and shall betreated in accordance with such Notice:

APPENDIX

207

NOTICE OF USECONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/

SUPPLIER) NAME: NAVTEQ

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 222 Mer-

chandise Mart Plaza, Suite 900, Chi-cago, Illinois 60654

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subjectto the End User Terms under which

this Data was provided.

2005 NAVTEQ − All rights reser-ved.

If the Contracting Officer, federal gov-ernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend providedherein, the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal offi-cial must notify NAVTEQ prior to seek-ing additional or alternative rights in theData.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENTCAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT FORYOUR COPY OF THE SPATIAL MAPDATABASE, INCLUDING LOCATIONCODES AND RELATED PRODUCTS(COLLECTIVELY, THE “DATABASE”),USED IN THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM.BY USING THE NAVIGATION SYSTEMAND THE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPTAND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALLTERMS AND CONDITIONS SETFORTH BELOW.

LICENSE GRANTDenso Corporation (“Denso”), as a li-censed distributor of the DATABASE,grants to you a non−exclusive, non−per-petual license to use your copy of the DA-TABASE for your personal use or for youruse in your business’ internal operationsand not for any other purpose. This li-cense does not include the right to grantsub−licenses.

OWNERSHIPThe DATABASE and the copyrights andintellectual property and neighboringrights therein are owned by Tele AtlasNorth America, Inc. (“TANA”) and itslicensors. This Agreement does nottransfer any title or interest in theDATABASE, except for the license to usethe DATABASE according and subject tothe terms and conditions of thisAgreement. You shall not alter, obscureor remove any copyright notices,trademark notices or other restrictivelegends relating to the DATABASE.

The DATABASE comprises confidentialand proprietary information and materi-als of TANA. Accordingly, you shall holdthe DATABASE in confidence and trust.You shall take reasonable steps to pro-tect the DATABASE from misappropri-ation or misuse. You shall not extractstand−alone data from or publish anypart of the DATABASE without the priorwritten consent of TANA and its licen-sors. VII

APPENDIX

208

LIMITATIONS ON USEThe DATABASE is restricted for use inthe specific system for which it wascreated. Except to the extent explicitlypermitted by mandatory laws, you maynot extract or reutilize any portion of thecontents of the DATABASE, nor repro-duce, copy, duplicate, modify, adapt,translate, disassemble, decompile, or re-verse engineer any portion of the DATA-BASE.

TRANSFERYou may not transfer the DATABASE tothird parties, except together with thesystem for which it was created, providedthat you do not retain any copy of the DA-TABASE, and provided that the transfer-ee agrees to all terms and conditions ofthis AGREEMENT.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYTHE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ON AN“AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BA-SIS” AND DENSO AND TANA (ANDTHEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHERWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IM-PLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFNON−INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANT-ABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORALOR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMA-TION PROVIDED BY DENSO OR TANA(OR ANY OF THEIR LICENSORS,AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR THIRDPARTY PROVIDERS) SHALL CREATEA WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOTENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCHADVICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DIS-CLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ES-SENTIAL CONDITION OF THISAGREEMENT.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITYIN NO EVENT SHALL DENSO OR TANA(OR THEIR LICENSORS OR SUPPLI-ERS) BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDEN-TAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, IN-DIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGESARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENTOR YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE, IN-CLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COV-ER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS IN-TERRUPTION OR THE LIKE, RE-GARDLESS OF WHETHER THEPARTY WAS ADVISED OF THE POSSI-BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

IN NO EVENT WILL THE TOTAL LIABIL-ITY OF DENSO OR TANA (OR THEIRLICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS) EX-CEED THE AMOUNTS PAID BY YOUFOR THE DATABASE.

APPENDIX

209

WARNINGSThe DATABASE comprises facts and in-formation from government and othersources reflecting circumstances in exis-tence before you received theDATABASE, which may contain errorsand omissions. Accordingly, the DATA-BASE may contain inaccurate or incom-plete information due to the passage oftime, changing circumstances, and dueto the nature of the sources used. TheDATABASE does not include or reflect in-formation relating to, among other things,neighborhood safety; law enforcement;emergency assistance; constructionwork; road or lane closures; vehicle orspeed restrictions; road slope or grade;bridge height, weight or other limits; roador traffic conditions; special events; traf-fic congestion; or travel time.

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTSIf you are an agency, department, or oth-er entity of the United States Govern-ment, or funded in whole or in part by theUnited States Government, then use, du-plication, reproduction, release, modifi-cation, disclosure or transfer of this com-mercial product and accompanying doc-umentation, is restricted in accordancewith the LIMITED or RESTRICTED rightsas described in DFARS252.227−7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DODcommercial computer software defini-tion), DFARS 227.7202−1 (DOD policyon commercial computer software), FAR52.227−19 (JUN 1987) (commercialcomputer software clause for civilianagencies), DFARS 252.227−7015 (NOV1995) (DOD technical data − commercialitems clause); FAR 52.227−14 Alter-nates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (civilianagency technical data and noncommer-cial computer software clause); and/orFAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commer-cial item acquisitions), as applicable. Incase of conflict between any of the FARand DFARS provisions listed herein andthis Agreement, the construction thatprovides greater limitations on the Gov-ernment’s rights shall control.

Contractor/manufacturer is Tele AtlasNorth America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street,Lebanon, NH 03766−1445. Phone:603.643. 0330. The DATABASE is 1984−2005 by Tele Atlas North Ameri-ca, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Forpurpose of any public disclosure provi-sion under any federal, state or local law,it is agreed that the DATABASE is a tradesecret and a proprietary commercialproduct and not subject to disclosure.

VII

APPENDIX

210

If you are an agency, department, or oth-er entity of any State government, theUnited States Government or any otherpublic entity or funded in whole or in partby the United States Government, thenyou hereby agree to protect the DATA-BASE from public disclosure and to con-sider the DATABASE exempt from anystatute, law, regulation, or code, includ-ing any Sunshine Act, Public RecordsAct, Freedom of Information Act, orequivalent, which permits public accessand/or reproduction or use of the Li-censed Products. In the event that suchexemption is challenged under any suchlaws, this Agreement shall be consideredbreached and any and all right to retainany copies or to use of the DATABASEshall be terminated and considered im-mediately null and void. Any copies ofthe DATABASE held by you shall imme-diately be destroyed. If any court of com-petent jurisdiction considers this clausevoid and unenforceable, in whole or inpart, for any reason, this Agreement shallbe considered terminated and null andvoid, in its entirety, and any and all copiesof the DATABASE shall immediately bedestroyed.

END USER NOTICEPLEASE READ THIS NOTICE CARE-FULLY BEFORE USING THIS NAVIGA-TION SYSTEMThe Point Of Interest Data (“POI”Data) in the navigation system is inpart provided by infoUSA Inc.(“infoUSA”). By using the POI Data,you accept and agree to all terms andconditions set forth below.1. OWNERSHIPAll rights, title and interest to the infoUSAPOI Data shall be retained by infoUSA.

2. LIMITATIONS ON USEExcept to the extent explicitly permittedby mandatory laws, you may not extractor reutilize any portion of the contents ofthe POI Data, nor reproduce, copy,modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,decompile, or reverse engineer any por-tion of the POI Data.

3. TRANSFERYou may not transfer the POI Data to thirdparties, except together with the systemfor which it was created, provided thatyou do not retain any copy of the POIData.

4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYEXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN, INFOU-SA MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITH-OUT LIMITATION, ANY EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY.

5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITYEITHER INFOUSA OR SUPPLIER OFPOI DATA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FORANY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES MADE OR AL-LEGED IN CONNECTION WITH YOURUSE OF THE POI DATA.

APPENDIX

211

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPersonal Use Only. You agree to use thisinformation for solely personal, non−commercial purposes, and not for ser-vice bureau, time−sharing or other simi-lar purposes. You may not modify the in-formation or remove any copyright no-tices that appear on the information inany way. You may not decompile, disas-semble or reverse engineer any portionof this information, and may not transferor distribute it in any form, for any pur-pose. Without limiting the foregoing, youmay not use this information with anyproducts, systems, or applicationsinstalled or otherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleet manage-ment or similar applications.

No Warranty. This information is pro-vided to you “as is,” and you agree to useit at your own risk. DENSO and its licen-sors (and their licensors and suppliers,collectively “DENSO”) make no guaran-tees, representations or warranties ofany kind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not limitedto, and DENSO expressly disclaims anywarranties regarding content, quality, ac-curacy, completeness, effectiveness,reliability, fitness for a particular purpose,non−infringement, usefulness, use or re-sults to be obtained from this information,or that the information or server will beuninterrupted or error−free. Somestates, territories and countries do not al-low certain warranty exclusions, so tothat extent, the above exclusion may notapply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO SHALLNOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IR-RESPECTIVE OF ITS NATURE, AL-LEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAM-AGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSE-QUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDINGANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE ORCONTRACTS ARISING OUT OF YOURPOSSESSION, USE OF OR INABILITYTO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DE-FECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CON-DITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION INCONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ONA WARRANTY, EVEN IF DENSO ORITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN AD-VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. Some states, territories andcountries do not allow certain liability ex-clusions or damages limitations, so tothat extent the above may not apply toyou.

VII

APPENDIX

212

Indemnity. You agree to indemnify, de-fend and hold DENSO and its licensors(including their respective licensors, sup-pliers, assignees, subsidiaries, affiliatedcompanies, and the respective officers,directors, employees, shareholders,agents and representatives of each ofthem) free and harmless from andagainst any liability, loss, injury (includinginjuries resulting in death), demand, ac-tion, cost, expense, or claim of any kindor character, including but not limited toattorney’s fees, arising out of or in con-nection with any use or possession byyou of this information.

END USER NOTICEThe marks of companies displayed bythis product to indicate business loca-tions are the marks of their respectiveowners. The use of such marks in thisproduct does not imply any sponsorship,approval, or endorsement by such com-panies of this product.

There are two types of areas available forroute guidance. In one type of area, pri-marily around metropolitan centers, de-tailed route guidance is available for theentire area. In the other type of area, allroads are displayed on the map but routeguidance is limited. The navigation routemight lack precision because the data (noright turns, one−way traffic, etc.) is notcomplete. It is still possible to reach thedestination by following the arrow direc-tion and distance as shown on the bottomleft of the screen. The arrow points in thedirection of the destination. The distanceshown is as measured in a straight linefrom the current vehicle position to thedestination area.In order to provide you with as accurate mapinformation as possible, we are always gath-ering information such as on road repairs andcarrying out on−site investigations. However,the names of roads, streets, facilities, andtheir locations are often changed. In someplaces, construction on roads may be in pro-gress. For that reason, information on someareas in this system might be different fromthe actual location.

— Changing the mapDVD−ROM

1. Push the “LOAD· ” button. The“LOAD·EJECT” screen appears.

APPENDIX

213

2. Touch “MAP ”. The display opensand the map disc is ejected.

3. Insert the new map DVD−ROM with thelabel side up.

4. Push the “LOAD· ” button to closethe display.The map database is normally updated oncea year. Contact your dealer for informationabout the availability and pricing of an update.

CAUTION Do not place anything on the opened

display, as such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking orin an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in thecase of an accident or sudden stop-ping while driving, keep the displayclosed.

Take care not to jam your hand whilethe display is moving. Otherwise, youcould be injured.

NOTICE

Do not obstruct the display while it ismoving. It could damage your naviga-tion system.

INFORMATIONUnder extremely cold conditions, thedisplay may react slowly or operationsound may become louder.

VII

APPENDIX

214

To confirm the database version anddisc coverage area


2. Touch “Map DVD”.

Make sure the version of the database on thisscreen. (The database version on the screenabove may be different from the actualscreen.)

To display the disc coverage area, touch“Covered Area” . Confirm the covered areaon the screen.

Contact your dealer to find out if there is amore recent update released.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

151

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMAudio/video systemQuick reference 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio/video system 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video system operating hints 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VI

SECTION VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

152

1 Function menu display screenTo control the radio, CD changer or DVDplayer, touch the touch−screen buttons.For details, see page 154.

2 “TUNE·FILE” knobTurn this knob to move the station bandand files up or down. For details, seepages 158 and 173.

3 “AM·SAT” buttonPush this button to choose an AM or SATstation. For details, see pages 154 and157.

4 “FM” buttonPush this button to choose an FM sta-tion. For details, see pages 154 and157.

5 “DISC·AUX” buttonPush this button to turn the CD changer,DVD player and AUX on. For details,see pages 154, 157, 168 and 177.

6 “SCAN” buttonPush this button to scan radio stations orscan the tracks, discs, files or folders.For details, see pages 158, 170, 174,178 and 181.

7 “LOAD· ” buttonPush this button to display the“LOAD·EJECT” screen or close the dis-play. For details, see page 165.

Quick reference

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

153

8 “AUDIO” buttonPush this button to display the audiocontrol screen. For details, see page154.

9 “SEEK/TRACK” buttonPush either side of this button to seek upor down for a station, or to access a de-sired track, file or chapter. For details,see pages 158, 169, 173,177 and 180.

10 “PWR·VOL” knobPush this knob to turn the audio systemon and off, and turn it to adjust the volu-me. For details, see page 154.

Using your audio/videosystem — — Some basicsThis section describes some of the basic fea-tures of your audio system. Some informationmay not pertain to your system.

Your audio system works when the ignitionswitch is set at ACC or ON.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the audio systemon longer than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

CAUTIONLaser products

Do not take this unit apart or at-tempt to make any changes your-self. This is an intricate unit thatuses a laser pickup to retrieve in-formation from the surface of com-pact discs. The laser is carefullyshielded so that its rays remain in-side the cabinet. Therefore, nevertry to disassemble the player or al-ter any of its parts since you maybe exposed to laser rays and dan-gerous voltages.

This product utilizes a laser. Useof controls or adjustments or per-formance of procedures other thanthose specified herein may resultin hazardous radiation exposure.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

154

(a) Turning the system on and off“PWR·VOL”: Push this knob to turn the audiosystem on and off. Turn this knob to adjust thevolume. The system turns on in the last modeused.

“AUDIO”: Push this button to display touch−screen buttons for audio system (audio con-trol mode).

You can select the function that enables auto-matic return to the previous screen from theaudio screen. See page 146 for details.

Push “AM·SAT”, “FM” or “DISC·AUX” but-ton to turn on the desired mode. The se-lected mode turns on immediately.Push these buttons if you want to switch fromone mode to another.

If the disc is not set, the CD changer does notturn on.

You can turn off the CD changer by ejectingall the discs. If the audio system was pre-viously off, then the entire audio system willbe turned off when you eject all the discs. Ifthe other function was previously playing, itwill come on again.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

155

The touch−screen buttons for radio, CDchanger and DVD player operation are dis-played on the function touch−screen but-ton display screen when the audio controlmode is selected. Touch them lightly anddirectly on the screen.The selected switch is highlighted.

INFORMATION If the system does not respond to a

touch of a touch−screen button,move your finger away from thescreen and then touch it again.

You cannot operate dimmed touch−screen buttons.

Wipe off fingerprints on the surface ofthe display using a glass cleaningcloth.

(b) Tone and balanceHow good an audio program sounds to you islargely determined by the mix of the treble,midrange, and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usuallysound better with different mixes of treble,mid−range, and bass.

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear sound lev-els is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to a ste-reo recording or broadcast, changing theright/left balance will increase the volume ofone group of sounds while decreasing the vol-ume of another.

Touching “SOUND” displayed on thescreen at the audio control mode will dis-play the sound control mode. Adjust thetone and balance as follows:To adjust the tone, touch “+” or “−” on thescreen. To adjust the balance between thefront and rear speakers, touch “FRONT”or “REAR” on the screen, and to adjust thebalance between the left and right, touch“L” or “R” on the screen.“TREB”: Adjusts high−pitched tones.

“MID”: Adjusts mid−pitched tones.

“BASS”: Adjusts low−pitched tones.

As the yellow display approaches “+”, eachtone is more emphasized.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

156

(c) DSP control

Touching “DSP” displayed on the screenat the audio control mode will display theDSP control mode. You can turn on/off thesurround function and the automaticsound levelizer on the DSP screen.Surround function:Select “ON” of “SURROUND” and touch“OK”.The surround function will turn on.

Automatic sound levelizer (ASL):When the audio sound becomes difficult to beheard due to road noise, wind noise or othernoises while driving, the system adjusts to theoptimum volume according to the noise level.

Select “ON” of “ASL” and touch “OK”.

(d) Selecting screen size (with rear seatentertainment system)

Touching “WI DE” displayed on the screenin the video control mode will display thewide mode control screen.“NORMAL”: Displays a 3 4 screen, with

either side in black.“WIDE 1”: Widens the 3 4 screen hori-

zontally to fill the screen.“WIDE 2”: Widens the 3 4 screen verti-

cally and horizontally, in thesame ratio, to fill the screen.

When you touch , the previous screenreturns.

(e) Your CD changerWhen you insert a disc, touch “LOAD” andgently push the disc in with the label side up.This CD changer can store up to four discs.The changer will play from track 1 through tothe end of the disc. Then it will play from track1 of the next disc.

The changer is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

157

NOTICE

Do not stack up two discs for inser-tion, or it will cause damage to thechanger. Insert only one disc intoslot at a time.

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the changer. Do not insertanything other than a disc into the s-lot.

(f) Your DVD player(with rear seat entertainment system)The sound of the rear seat entertainment sys-tem can be enjoyed by pushing the“DISC·AUX” button.

(g) AUX adapterThe sound of portable audio players con-nected to the AUX adapter can be enjoyed.Push the “DISC·AUX” button to switch to AUXmode. For details, refer to the “Owner’sManual”.

— Radio operation

(a) Listening to the radioPush these buttons to choose either anAM or FM station.“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the screen.

If your vehicle is equipped with a satellite ra-dio broadcast system, when you push the“AM·SAT” button, “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2”,“SAT3” station appears on the display. Fordetails about satellite radio broadcast, see“— Radio operation (XM satellite radiobroadcast)” on page 160.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

158

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the sta-tion band or counterclockwise to stepdown.Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the screen. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reduces theamount of channel separation to prevent theweak signal from creating noise. If the signalbecomes extremely weak, the radio switchesfrom stereo to mono reception. In this case,“ST” disappears from the screen.

(b) Presetting a station1. Tune in the desired station.2. Touch one of the touch−screen but-tons (1 — 6) you want and hold it until abeep is heard. This sets the station to thetouch−screen button and the frequencyappears on the touch−screen button.Each radio mode (AM, FM1 or FM2) can storeup to 6 stations. To change the preset stationto a different one, follow the same procedure.

The preset station memory is cancelled whenthe power source is interrupted by battery dis-connection or a blown fuse.

(c) Selecting a stationTune in the desired station using one of thefollowing methods.

Preset tuning: Touch the touch−screen but-ton (1 — 6) for the station you want. Thetouch−screen button is highlighted and thestation frequency appears on the screen.

Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton on either side. The radio will begin seek-ing up or down for a station of the nearest fre-quency and will stop on reception. Each timeyou push the button, the stations will besearched automatically one after another.

To scan all the frequencies: Touch “SCAN”on the screen or push the “SCAN” buttonbriefly. “SCAN” appears on the screen. Theradio will find the next station and stay therefor a few seconds, and then scan again. Toselect a station, touch “SCAN” or push the“SCAN” button again.

To scan the preset stations: Touch “SCAN”on the screen or push the “SCAN” button forlonger than a second. “P. SCAN” appears onthe screen. The radio will tune in the next pre-set station, stay there for a few seconds, andthen move to the next preset station. To se-lect a station, touch “SCAN” or push the“SCAN” button again.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

159

(d) Radio Data SystemYour audio system is equipped with RadioData Systems (RDS). RDS mode providesyou to receive text messages from radio sta-tions that utilize RDS transmitters.

When RDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular programtype,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.

RDS features are available for the use only onFM stations which broadcast RDS informa-tion.

“TYPE ”If the system receives no RDS stations, “NOPTY” appears on the display.

Each time you touch “TYPE ” or “TYPE ”,the program type changes as in the following:

ROCK

MISC (Miscellaneous)

INFORM (Information)

EASY LIS (Easy listening)

CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

R & B (Rhythm and Blues)

RELIGION

ALARM (Emergency message)

“TYPE SEEK”When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” ap-pears. Touch the switch and the systemstarts to seek the station in the relevant pro-gram type.

If any type program station is not found,“NOTHING” appears on the display.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

160

“MSG” (MESSAGE)If the system receives a radio text from RDSstation, “MSG” appears on the display. Touch“MSG”, and a text message is displayed onthe screen. This function is available onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

When the system can show the station name,“RDS” appears on the display. Each time youtouch “MSG” or “MSG OFF”, indication on thedisplay changes from the band to the stationname, a radio text in this order. After six sec-onds passes, indication returns to the band.

(e) Traffic announcement“TRAF”A station that regularly broadcasts traffic in-formation is automatically located.

When you touch “TRAF”, “TRAF SEEK” ap-pears on the display and the radio will startseeking any traffic program station.

If no traffic program station is found,“NOTHING” appears on the display.

If a traffic program station is found, the namefor traffic program station is displayed for awhile until a traffic announcement is received.

— Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast)To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in yourvehicle, an additional genuine Toyota satellitereceiver and antenna must be purchased andinstalled, and the subscription to the XM sat-ellite radio is necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM satelliteradio

An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed ex-clusively to receive broadcasts provided un-der a separate subscription. Availability islimited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe: You must enter into aseparate service agreement with the XM ra-dio in order to receive satellite broadcast pro-gramming in the vehicle. Additional activationand service subscription fees apply that arenot included in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner. Forcomplete information on subscription ratesand terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio,visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com orcall an XM’s Listener Care at (800)967−2346. The XM radio is solely responsi-ble for the quality, availability and content ofthe satellite radio services provided, whichare subject to the terms and conditions of theXM radio customer service agreement.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

161

Customers should have their radio ID ready;the radio ID can be found by selecting “chan-nel 000” on the radio. For details, see the“Displaying the radio ID” that follows.

All fees and programming are the responsibil-ity of the XM satellite radio and are subjectto change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’ssatellite radio tuners are awarded TypeApproval Certificates from XM SatelliteRadio Inc. as proof of compatibility with theservices offered by the XM satellite radio.

Displaying the radio IDEach XM tuner is identified with a unique ra-dio ID. You will need the radio ID when activat-ing XM service or when reporting a problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the “TUNE”knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric charac-ters appears. If you select another channel,display of the ID code is canceled. The chan-nel (000) alternates the display between theradio ID and the specific radio ID code.

Listening to satellite radio

Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose ei-ther an AM station or an SAT channel.Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” ap-pears on the display.

Turn this knob to select the next or pre-vious channel.If you turn continuously, you can rapidly scrollforward or down through the channels.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

162

Channel category

Touch either “TYPE” or “TYPE” to go tothe next or previous category.

Presetting a channel1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Touch one of the channel selector but-tons (1 — 6) and hold it until a beep isheard.This sets the channel to the touch−screenbutton and the name and number of the chan-nel appears on the touch−screen button.

Each touch−screen button can store threeSAT channels. To change the preset channelto a different one, follow the same procedure.

The preset channel memory is cancelledwhen the power source is interrupted by bat-tery disconnection or a blown fuse.

Selecting a channelTune in the desired channel using one of thefollowing methods.

Preset tuning: Touch the channel selectorbutton (1 — 6) for the channel you want. Thebutton (1 — 6) is highlighted and channelnumber appears on the display.

To select channel within the current cate-gory: Push the “ ” or “ ” button of“SEEK·TRACK”. The radio will step up ordown the channel within the current channelcategory. Touch “TYPE SEEK” . The radiowill step up the channel within the currentchannel category.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

163

To scan the currently selected channelcategory: Touch “TYPE SCAN” or push the“SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears onthe display. The radio will find the next chan-nel in the same channel category, stay therefor a few seconds, and then scan again. Toselect a channel, touch “TYPE SCAN” orpush the “SCAN” button a second time.

To scan the preset channels: Push the“SCAN” button and hold it until you hear abeep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next preset channel, staythere for a few seconds, and then move to thenext preset channel. To select a channel,push the “SCAN” button a second time.

Displaying the title and name

When you touch “TEXT” , the song/programtitle and the artist name/feature are displayed.

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be dis-played. (Some information will not be fullydisplayed.)

When you touch “TEXT” again, the displayreturns.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

164

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctionsWhen problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take thesuggested corrective action.

ANTENNAThe XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.

ANTENNAA short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.

UPDATING

You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

UPDATINGThe premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.

NO SIGNAL The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

−−−−− There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

−−−The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 967−2346 during the following hours:Monday — Saturday: 6 a.m. — 2 a.m. Sunday: 8 a.m. — 8 p.m. Eastern Time

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

165

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de-signed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference in a resi-dential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the in-structions, may cause harmful interfer-ence to radio communications. Howev-er, there is no guarantee that interfer-ence will not occur in a particular instal-lation.

If this equipment does cause harmful in-terference to radio or television recep-tion, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the user isencouraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

— Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

Information to user

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

INFORMATIONThis XM tuner supports “Audio Ser-vices” (Music and Talk) of only XM sat-ellite radio and “Text Information”*linked to the respective “Audio Ser-vices”.*Text Information includes, StationName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

— CD changer operation

(a) Inserting discsThe ignition switch must be set at ACC or ON.

Your CD changer can store up to 4 discs.

You can set a disc at the lowest empty discnumber.


VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

166

2. Touch “LOAD”. The display opens.

3. The amber indicators at either side ofthe slot start blinking. When the indica-tors change to green, insert only one disc.After the disc is loaded, the amber indica-tors at either side of the slot start blinkingagain. When the indicators change togreen, you can insert the next disc.

4. Push the “LOAD· ” button to closethe display.The changer will automatically start playingfrom the last disc you inserted.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot beplayed. In this case, “CD CHECK” appearson the screen.

CAUTION Do not place anything on the opened

display, as such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking orin an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in caseof an accident or sudden stop whiledriving, keep the display closed.

Take care not to jam your hand whilethe display is moving. Otherwise, youcould be injured.

NOTICE

Do not obstruct the display while it ismoving. It could damage your audiosystem.

Do not insert one disc stacked on topof another one or feed them in contin-uously, to prevent discs from gettingstuck in the changer.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

167

(b) Ejecting discs A single disc alone:


2. Touch the disc number to be ejected.

The display opens and the amber indicatorsat either side of the slot start blinking. Afterthe disc is ejected, the amber indicatorschange to green. A disc can be inserted.

All the discs:


2. Touch “ALL CD ”.

The display opens and the amber indicatorsat either side of the slot start blinking. Afterthe disc is ejected, the blinking indicators stayon.

3. Remove the disc.The indicators start blinking again and thenext disc is ejected.

If a disc is not remove within 15 seconds afterit is ejected, the operation will be canceled.

When all the discs are removed, the amber in-dicators change to green. A disc can be in-serted.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

168

The numbers of the trays where the disc is notset are dimmed.

(c) Playing a discPush the “DISC·AUX” button if the discsare already loaded in the changer.“CD CHANGER” appears on the screen.

The discs set in the changer are played con-tinuously, starting with the last disc you in-serted. The disc number of the disc currentlybeing played, the track number and the timefrom the beginning of the program appear onthe screen.

When play of one disc ends, the first track ofthe following disc starts. When play of the fi-nal disc ends, play of the first disc startsagain.

The changer will skip any empty disc trays.

Vehicles with rear entertainment system —

If the DVD player is turned on, push the“DISC·AUX” button again to switch to the CDchanger.

If the rear seat entertainment system is on,pushing the “DISC·AUX” button switches thesound of the front audio system and that of therear seat entertainment system.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

169

(d) Selecting a desired discTouch the desired disc number on thescreen.The selected disc number is highlighted.

The changer will start playing the selecteddisc from the first track.

(e) Playing an audio discPush the “AUDIO” button to display thisscreen. SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK

“SEEK/TRACK” button: Use for a direct ac-cess to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton and repeat it until the desired track num-ber appears on the screen. As you releasethe button, the changer will start playing theselected track from the beginning.

“TRACK LIST”: The desired track can be se-lected from a list. This function is availableonly when the vehicle is not moving.

Touch “TRACK LIST”. The track list is dis-played.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

170

Touch the desired track number. The changerwill start playing the selected track from thebeginning.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 track groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 track groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

Vehicles with rear entertainment system —

While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by pushingeither side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Fast forward: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to fast forward thedisc. When you release the button, thechanger will resume playing from that posi-tion.

Reverse: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to reverse the disc.When you release the button, the changer willresume playing.

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED TRACK ORDISCSearching for a desired track —Touch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button briefly while the disc isplaying.“SCAN” appears on the screen. The changerwill play the next track for 10 seconds, thenscan again. To select a track, touch “SCAN”on the screen or push the “SCAN” button asecond time. If the changer reaches the endof the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1.

After all the tracks are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

171

Searching for a desired disc —Touch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button for longer than a secondwhile the disc is playing.“D·SCAN” appears on the screen. The pro-gram at the beginning of each audio disc willbe played for 10 seconds. To continue listen-ing to the program of your choice, touch“SCAN” on the screen or push the “SCAN”button a second time.

After all the audio discs are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

OTHER FUNCTIONS“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of thetrack or disc you are currently listening to.

Repeating a track —

Touch “RPT” briefly while the track is playing.“RPT” appears on the screen. When the trackis finished, the changer will automatically goback to the beginning of the track and play thetrack again. To cancel it, touch “RPT” onceagain.

Repeating a disc —

Touch “RPT” for longer than a second whilethe disc is playing. “D·RPT” appears on thescreen. When the disc is finished, the chang-er will automatically go back to the beginningof the disc and play the disc again. To cancelit, touch “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection.

Playing the tracks on one disc in random or-der —

Touch “RAND” briefly while the disc is play-ing. “RAND” appears on the screen. The sys-tem selects a track on the disc being listenedto in random order. To cancel it, touch“RAND” once again.

Playing the tracks on all the audio discs in ran-dom order —

Touch “RAND” for longer than a second whilethe disc is playing. “D·RAND” appears on thescreen. The system selects a track on all theaudio discs in the changer in random order.To cancel it, touch “RAND” once again.

If a CD−TEXT disc is inserted, the title of thedisc and track will be displayed. Up to 29 let-ters can be displayed.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

172

(f) Playing a MP3/WMA discPush the “AUDIO” button and touch aMP3/WMA disc number to display thisscreen.

SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER

“FOLDER ”: Touch this touch−screen but-ton to go to the next folder.

“FOLDER ”: Touch this touch−screen but-ton to go to the previous folder.

“FOLDER LIST”: The desired folder can beselected in a list. This function is availableonly when the vehicle is not moving.

Touch “FOLDER LIST”. The folder list is dis-played.

Touch the desired folder number. The chang-er will start playing the first file of the selectedfolder.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 folder groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 folder groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

“FILE”: The file list is displayed.

“DETAIL”: Details of the file currently playingis displayed. This function is available onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

173

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE“SEEK/TRACK” button: Use for direct ac-cess to a desired file.

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton and repeat it until the desired file numberappears on the display. As you release thebutton, the changer will start playing the se-lected file from the beginning. When “RAND”or “FLD·RPT” is on, the file number within thefolder you are currently being listened to ap-pears.

Fast forward: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to fast forward thedisc. When you release the button, thechanger will resume playing from that posi-tion.

Reverse: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to reverse the disc.When you release the button, the changer willresume playing.

“TUNE·FILE” knob: Use for direct access toa desired file in the disc.

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob to step up ordown all the files in the disc you are currentlylistening to. The file number appears on thedisplay. When “RAND” or “FLD. RPT” is on,all the files in the folder you are currently be-ing listened to can be stepped up or down.

“FILE”: The desired file can be selected in alist. This function is available only when thevehicle is not moving.

Touch “FILE”. The file list is displayed.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

174

Touch the desired file number. The changerwill start playing the selected file from the be-ginning.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 file groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 file groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

“FOLDER”: The folder list is displayed.


SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FILETouch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button briefly while the disc isplaying.“SCAN” appears on the screen. The changerwill play the next file in the folder for 10 sec-onds, then scan again. To select a file, touch“SCAN” on the screen or push the “SCAN”button a second time. If the changer reachesthe end of the folder, it will continue scanningfrom file 1.

After all the files are scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FOLDERTouch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button for longer than a secondwhile the disc is playing.“FLD.SCAN” appears on the screen. Theprogram at the beginning of each folder will beplayed for 10 seconds. To continue listeningto the program of your choice, touch “SCAN”on the screen or push the “SCAN” button asecond time.

After all the folders are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

175

OTHER FUNCTIONS“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of the fileor folder you are currently listening to.

Repeating a file —

Touch “RPT” briefly while the file is playing.“RPT” appears on the screen. When the fileis finished, the changer will automatically goback to the beginning of the file and play thefile again. To cancel it, touch “RPT” onceagain.

Repeating a folder —

Touch “RPT” for longer than a second whilethe folder is playing. “FLD.RPT” appears onthe screen. When the folder is finished, thechanger will automatically go back to the be-ginning of the folder and play the folder again.To cancel it, touch “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection of the folder or the disc which youare currently listening to.

Playing the files in one folder in random order—

Touch “RAND” briefly while the disc is play-ing. “RAND” appears on the screen. The sys-tem selects a file in the folder you are current-ly listening to. To cancel it, touch “RAND”once again.

Playing the files in all the folders on one discin random order —

Touch “RAND” for longer than a second whilethe disc is playing. “FLD.RAND” appears onthe screen. The system selects a file in all thefolders. To cancel it, touch “RAND” onceagain.

When a file is skipped or the system is inop-erative, touch “RAND” to reset.

(g) If the player malfunctionsIf “CD ERROR” appears on the screen, audiosignals of the disc cannot be read or the sys-tem has trouble. Push the “DISC” button onceagain.

If the changer does not operate, check thatthe disc surface is not soiled or damaged. Ifthe disc is O.K., the temperature of the chang-er’s internal mechanism may be raised be-cause of high external temperature. Removethe disc from the changer to cool it.

If the changer still does not operate, have itchecked by your dealer.

If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD−DA files,only CD−DA files are played. If an MP3/WMAdisc contains files other than CD−DA, onlyMP3/WMA files are played.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

176

—DVD player operationThe DVD player can play DVD video, audioCD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD or MP3 disconly when a disc is loaded in the DVD play-er. A WMA disc cannot be played.Refer to “Rear seat entertainment system” fordetails.

For appropriate discs for this player, see “Au-dio/video system operating hints” on page194.

(a) Inserting the disc

Insert the disc into the slot with the labelside up.An adapter must be used for 8 cm (3 in.) discswhich are loaded in the same manner as for12 cm (4.7 in.) discs.

The indicator light turns on while the disc isloaded.

If the label faces forward, the disc cannot beplayed. In this case, “DISC CHECK” appearson the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,“DISC CHECK” will also appear on thescreen. For appropriate discs for this player,see “Audio/video system operating hints” onpage 194.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any partof the DVD player. Do not insert any-thing other than a disc into the slot.

(b) Ejecting a disc

Push the button.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

177

(c) Playing a discPush the “DISC· AUX” button if a disc is al-ready loaded in the player.“DVD” appears on the screen. (If the CDchanger is turned on, push the “DISC” buttonagain to switch to the DVD player.)

(d) Operating an audio CDPLAYING AN AUDIO CDCD text only — The disc title and track title willappear on the screen when pushing the“DISC·AUX” button.

Push the “AUDIO” button to display thisscreen.

SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK“SEEK/TRACK” button: Use for direct ac-cess to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton and repeat it until the desired track num-ber appears on the display. As you releasethe button, the player will start playing the se-lected track from the beginning.

“TRACK LIST”: The desired track can be se-lected from a list. This function is availableonly when the vehicle is not moving.

Touch “TRACK LIST”. The track list is dis-played.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

178

Touch the desired track number. The playerwill start playing the selected track from thebeginning.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 track groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 track groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

Fast forward: Touch “” side of “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to fast forward thedisc. When you release the button, the playerwill resume playing from that position.

Reverse: Touch “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to reverse the disc.When you release the button, the player willresume playing.

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED TRACKTouch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button.“SCAN” will be highlighted on the screen. Theplayer will play the next track for 10 seconds,then scan again. To select a track, touch“SCAN” on the screen or push the “SCAN”button a second time. If the player reachesthe end of the disc, it will continue scanning attrack 1.

After all the tracks are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

179

OTHER FUNCTIONS“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of thetrack you are currently listening to.

Touch “RPT” while the track is playing. Whenthe track is finished, the player will automati-cally go back to the beginning of the track andplay the track again. To cancel it, touch “RPT”once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection of the disc which you are currentlylistening to.

When “RAND” is touched, the system selectsa track in the disc you are currently listeningto. To cancel it, touch “RAND” once again.

If a CD−TEXT disc is inserted, the title of thedisc and track will be displayed. Up to 29 let-ters can be displayed.

(e) Operating a MP3 DISCPLAYING A MP3 DISCPush the “AUDIO” button to display thisscreen.

SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER

“FOLDER ”: Touch this touch−screen but-ton briefly to go to the next folder.

“FOLDER ”: Touch this touch−screen but-ton briefly to go to the previous folder. To jumpup to the first folder, touch and hold thistouch−screen button until the beep sounds.

“FOLDER LIST”: The desired folder can beselected in a list. This function is availableonly when the vehicle is not moving.

Touch “FOLDER LIST”. The folder list is dis-played.

Touch the desired folder number. The playerwill start playing the first file of the selectedfolder.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

180

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 folder groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 folder groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

“FILE”: The file list is displayed.


SELECTING A DESIRED FILE“SEEK/TRACK” button: Use for direct ac-cess to a desired file.

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton and repeat it until the desired file numberappears on the display. As you release thebutton, the player will start playing the se-lected file from the beginning.

Fast forward: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to fast forward thedisc. When you release the button, the playerwill resume playing from that position.

Reverse: Push “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and hold it to reverse the disc.When you release the button, the player willresume playing.

“FILE”: The desired file can be selected in alist. This function is available only when thevehicle is not moving.

Touch “FILE”. The file list is displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

181

Touch the desired file number. The player willstart playing the selected file from the begin-ning.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves up by 6 file groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the toppage of the list is displayed, the last page isdisplayed.

: By touching this touch−screen button,the list moves down by 6 file groups. If thistouch−screen button is touched when the lastpage of the list is displayed, the top page isdisplayed.

“FOLDER”: The folder list is displayed.


SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FILETouch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button briefly.“SCAN” appears on the screen. The DVDplayer will play the next file in the folder for 10seconds, then scan again. To select a file,touch “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button a second time. If the playerreaches the end of the folder, it will continuescanning from file 1.

After all the files are scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FOLDERTouch and hold “SCAN” on the screen orpush the “SCAN” button until the beepsounds.“FLD.SCAN” appears on the screen. TheDVD player will play the file at the beginningof each folder for 10 seconds, then scanagain. To select a file, touch “SCAN” on thescreen or push the “SCAN” button a secondtime.

After all the folders are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

182

OTHER FUNCTIONS“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of the fileor folder you are currently listening to.

Repeating a file —

Touch “RPT” briefly while the file is playing.“RPT” appears on the screen. When the fileis finished, the player will automatically goback to the beginning of the file and play thefile again. To cancel it, touch “RPT” onceagain.

Repeating a folder —

Touch and hold “RPT” until the beep soundswhile the folder is playing. “FLD.RPT” ap-pears on the screen. When the folder is fin-ished, the player will automatically go back tothe beginning of the folder and play the folderagain. To cancel it, touch “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection of the folder which you are currentlylistening to or of all the folders.

Playing the files in one folder in random order—

Touch “RAND” briefly. “RAND” appears onthe screen. The system selects a file in thefolder you are currently listening to. To cancelit, touch “RAND” once again.

Playing the files in all the folders in random or-der —

Touch and hold “RAND” until the beepsounds. “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.The system selects a file in the folders of allthe trays which are set and plays it. To cancelit, touch “RAND” once again.

When a file is skipped or the system is inop-erative, touch “RAND” to reset.

(f) Operating a DVD video discNOTE: The playback condition of someDVD video discs may be determined by aDVD video software producer. This DVDplayer plays a disc as the software pro-ducer intended. So some functions maynot work properly. Be sure to read the in-struction manual for the DVD video discseparately provided. For the detailed in-formation about DVD video discs, see “(h)DVD player and DVD video disc informa-tion”.Precautions on DVD video discWhen recording with a DVD video or videoCD, audio tracks may not record in somecases while the menu is displayed. As audiowill not play in this case, verify that the videotracks are playing and then activate playback.

When playback of a disc is completed:

If an audio CD or MP3 disc is playing, thefirst track or file starts.

If a DVD video or video CD is playing,playback will stop or the menu screen willbe displayed.

The title/chapter number and playback timedisplay may not appear while playing backcertain DVD video discs.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

183

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDsis recorded at a low volume to empha-size the impact of sound effects. If youadjust the volume assuming that theconversations represent the maximumvolume level that the DVD will play, youmay be startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a different audiosource. The louder sounds may have asignificant impact on the human body orpose a driving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

This “DVD Hint!” screen appears when thevideo screen is first displayed after theignition switch is set at ACC or ON.Touch “OK” when you read the message.

PLAYING A DVD DISCPush the “AUDIO” button to display thisscreen.When you touch “WIDE”, the screen modecan be changed.

It you touch “PICTURE” when the vehicle iscompletely stopped and the parking brake isapplied, the video screen returns.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

184

DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLSIf you touch a part of the screen, where con-trols are not located while watching video,DVD controls will appear.

“Page2”: Touching this will display on thesecond page of DVD controls.

“Page1”: Touching this will display the toppage of DVD controls.

“Hide Buttons”: Touching this will turn off thecontrols from the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen when you toucha control, the operation relevant to the controlis not permitted.

DESCRIPTION OF DVD CONTROLS Top page of DVD video controls“Menu” and “Top Menu”: If you touch anyof the above controls, the menu screen forDVD video appears. (For the operation, seethe manual that come with the DVD video discprovided separately.)

: The menu control key appears on thescreen. (See page 185.)

: Touching this will pause the videoscreen. When you touch this again, the videoscreen advances frame by frame.

: Touching this will fast reverse duringplayback.

: Touching this will stop the video screen.

: Touching this will pause during playbackand resume normal play during pause or slowforward.

: Touching this will fast forward duringplayback and forward slowly during pause.

Second page of DVD video controls“Setup”: The initial set up screen appears.(See page 187.)

“Search”: The title search screen appears.(See page 185.)

“Return”: Touching this will display the pre-determined scene and start playing fromthere.

“AUDIO”: The audio changing screen ap-pears. (See page 186.)

“Subtitle”: The subtitle changing screen ap-pears. (See page 185.)

“Angle”: The angle selection screen ap-pears. (See page 186.)

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

185

SELECTING A MENU ITEMEnter the menu item using , , and and touch “Enter”. The player starts play-ing video for that menu item. (For details,see the manual that comes with the DVDvideo disc provided separately.)Each time you touch “Move Buttons”, thecontrols on the screen move upward anddownward.When you touch “<<OFF”, the controls willdisappear. To display them again, touch“ON”.


SEARCHING BY TITLEEnter the title number and touch “Enter”.The player starts playing video for thattitle number.When you push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button, you can select a chapter.

If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear”to delete the numbers.


CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGEEach time you touch “Subtitle”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones stored inthe discs and changed.


VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

186

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGEEach time you touch “AUDIO”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones stored inthe discs and changed.


CHANGING THE ANGLEThe angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when theangle mark appears on the screen.Each time you touch “Angle”, the anglechanges.

When you touch , and the previousscreen returns.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

187

SETUP MENUThere are initial setting touch−screen but-tons on the “Setup Menu” screen.After you change the initial setting, touch “En-ter”. The initial setting screen will be turnedoff and return to the picture previously.

When “Default” is touched, all menus are ini-tialized.

The initial setting can be changed. Audio languageYou can change the audio language.1. Touch “Audio Language”.2. Touch the language you want to hearon the “Select Audio Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want tohear on this screen, touch “Others” and entera language code. For the entry of languagecode, see the following “ENTER AUDIOLANGUAGE CODE”.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, touchthe .

Subtitle languageYou can change the subtitle language.1. Touch “Subtitle Language”.2. Touch a language you want to read onthe “Select Subtitle Language” screen.

If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, touch “Others” and entera language code. For the entry of languagecode, see the following “ENTER AUDIOLANGUAGE CODE”.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, touchthe .

DVD languageYou can change the language on the DVDvideo menu.1. Touch “DVD Language”.2. Touch the language you want to readon the “DVD Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, touch “Others” and entera language code. For the entry of languagecode, see the following “ENTER AUDIOLANGUAGE CODE”.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, touch.

Angle markThe multi−angle mark can be turned on oroff on the screen while the disc which ismulti−angle compatible is being played.Each time you touch “Angle Mark”, theangle mark on the screen turns on or off al-ternately.

Parental lockThe level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.1. Touch “Parental Lock”.2. Enter the 4−digit personal code on the“Enter Personal Code” screen.If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear”to delete the numbers.

10 touches of “Clear” will initialized the per-sonal code.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, touch.

3. Touch a parental level (1 — 8) on the“Select Restriction Level”. Touch the

switch to return to the “SetupMenu” screen.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

188

ENTER AUDIO LANGUAGE CODE

If you touch “Others” on the “Select AudioLanguage” screen, “Select Subtitle Lan-guage” screen or “DVD Language”screen, you can select the language youwant to hear or read by entering a lan-guage code.1. Enter the 4−digit language code.If you enter the wrong numbers, touch“Clear” to delete the numbers.2. Touch “Enter”.

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czach

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

189

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan)Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

190

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

SETUP OPERATION FROM THE REARSEAT

This screen appears when a rear passengerselects the setup menu.

If you want to cancel the setup operation fromthe rear seat, touch “Play”. The player will re-sume normal play.

Under the same condition, the rear passen-ger can cancel the setup operation from thefront seat.

To lock the operation of the player from therear seat, see “(c) Rear system lock” on page147.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

191

(g) Operating a video CDPLAYING A VIDEO CDPush the “AUDIO” button to display thisscreen.When you touch “WIDE”, the screen modecan be changed.

It you touch “PICTURE” when the vehicle iscompletely stopped and the parking brake isapplied, the video screen returns.

DISPLAYING VIDEO CD CONTROLSIf you touch the part where controls are not lo-cated while you are watching video on the vid-eo CD, video CD controls will appear.

“Page2”: Touching this will display on thesecond page of video CD controls.

“Page1”: Touching this will display on the toppage of video CD controls.

“Hide Buttons”: Touching this will turn off thecontrols from the screen.

If “ ” appears on the display when you toucha control, the operation is not permitted.

DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO CD CONTROLS Controls on top page“Select Number”: The track or numbersearch screen appears. (See “SEARCHINGBY TRACK” on page 192.)

“Prev. Menu”: When you touch this while thedisc menu is displayed, the previous page ap-pears on the screen. If you touch this whilethe player is playing video, the previous trackis searched and played.

“Next Menu”: When you touch this while thedisc menu is displayed, the next page ap-pears on the display. If you touch this whilethe player is playing video, the next track issearched and played.

“Main/Sub”: A multiplex transmissionchanging control. The mode changes fromMain/Sub to Main, to Sub and back to Main/Sub by touching this control.

“Return”: Touching this will display the pre-determined scene and start playing fromthere.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

192

Controls on second page

: Use this to pause the video screen.When you touch this again, the video screenadvance frame by frame.

: Touch this to fast reverse during play-back.

: Touch this to pause during playback andresume playing during pause.

: Touch this to fast forward during theplayback and start playing slowly duringpause.

SEARCHING BY TRACKEnter the track numbers and touch “En-ter”. The player starts playing video forthat title number.You can select a track number by pushing “”or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear”to delete the numbers.

Touch , and the previous screen re-turns.

(h) If the player malfunctionsIf the player or another unit equipped with theplayer malfunction, your audio system willdisplay following messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the display:It indicates that the disc dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted upside down. Clean the disc orinsert it correctly. If a disc which is not play-able is inserted, “DISC CHECK” will also ap-pear on the screen. For appropriate discs forthis player, see “Audio/video system operat-ing hints” on page 194.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe display: It indicates that the DVD regioncode is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the display:It indicates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambienttemperature. Remove the disc from the play-er and allow the player to cool down.

If the malfunction is not rectified: Takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

If an MP3 disc contains CD−DA files, onlyCD−DA files are played. If an MP3 disc con-tains files other than CD−DA, only MP3 filesare played.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

193

(i) DVD player and DVD video disc infor-mationDVD VIDEO DISCSThis DVD player conforms to NTSC colorTV formats. The DVD video disc conform-ing to another formats such as PAL or SE-CAM cannot be used.Region codes: Some DVD video discs havea region code indicating a country where youcan use the DVD video disc on this DVDplayer. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as“ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVDplayer. If you attempt to play an inappropriateDVD video disc on this player, “REGIONCODE ERROR” appears on the screen.Even if the DVD video disc does not have aregion code, there is a case that you cannotuse it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSCformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3Indicates a region code bywhich this video disc can beplayed.ALL: in all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARYDVD video discs: Digital versatile Disc thatholds video. DVD video discs have adopted“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digi-tal compression technologies. The picturedata is compressed by 1/40 on average andstored. Variable rate encoded technology inwhich the volume of data assigned to the pic-ture is changed depending on the picture for-mat has also been adopted. Audio data isstored using PCM and Dolby digital, whichenables higher quality of sound. Further-more, multi−angle and multi−language fea-tures will also help you enjoy the more ad-vanced technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits whatcan be viewed in conformity with a level of re-strictions of the country. The level of restric-tions varies depending on the DVD videodisc. Some DVD video discs cannot beplayed at all, or violent scenes are skipped orreplaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can beplayed.

Level 2 − 7: DVD video discs for children andG−rated movie can be played.

Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs canbe played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

194

Multi−language feature: You can select alanguage of the subtitle and audio.

Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the same re-gion code as the DVD player, you cannot playthe disc on the DVD player. For region codes,see page 193.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM,Dolby digital and MPEG audio format DVD.Other decoded type cannot be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video disc are divided inparts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audioprograms stored on DVD video discs. Usual-ly, one piece of movie, one album, or one au-dio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: The unit smaller than that of title. Atitle comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, andthe double−D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-lished works.1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protected bymethod claims of certain U.S. patents andother intellectual property rights ownedby Macrovision Corporation and otherrights owners. Use of this copyrightprotection technology must be authorizedby Macrovision Corporation, and is in-tended for home and other limited viewinguses only unless otherwise authorized byMacrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-neering or disassembly is prohibited.“DTS” is a trademark of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.

Audio/video system operatinghints

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperations:

Be careful not to spill beverages overthe audio system.

Do not put anything other than a discinto the slot.

Do not put anything other than an ap-propriate disc into the DVD player.

The use of a cellular phone inside ornear the vehicle may cause a noisefrom the speakers of the audio sys-tem which you are listening to. How-ever, this does not indicate a mal-function.

RADIO RECEPTIONUsually, a problem with radio reception doesnot mean there is a problem with your radio —it is just the normal result of conditions outsidethe vehicle.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

195

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Power linesor telephone wires can interfere with AM sig-nals. And of course, radio signals have a lim-ited range. The farther you are from a station,the weaker its signal will be. In addition, re-ception conditions change constantly as yourvehicle moves.

Here are some common reception problemsthat probably do not indicate a problem withyour radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations — Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you may no-tice fading and drifting, which increase withthe distance from the radio transmitter. Theyare often accompanied by distortion.

Multi−path — FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for two signals to reach your an-tenna at the same time. If this happens, thesignals will cancel each other out, causing amomentary flutter or loss of reception.

Static and fluttering — These occur when sig-nals are blocked by buildings, trees, or otherlarge objects. Increasing the bass level mayreduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping — If the FM signal you arelistening to is interrupted or weakened, andthere is another strong station nearby on theFM band, your radio may tune in the secondstation until the original signal can be pickedup again.

AM

Fading — AM broadcasts are reflected by theupper atmosphere — especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio station,causing the radio station to sound alternatelystrong and weak.

Station interference — When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from a radiostation are very nearly the same frequency,they can interfere with each other, making itdifficult to hear the broadcast.

Static — AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as high ten-sion power lines, lightening, or electrical mo-tors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CD CHANGER, DVDPLAYER AND DISCS Your CD changer is intended for use with

12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

Extremely high temperatures can keepyour CD changer and DVD player fromworking. On hot days, use the air condi-tioning to cool the vehicle interior beforeyou use the changer and player.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your CD changer and DVD playerskip.

If moisture gets into your CD changer andDVD player, you may not play eventhough they appear to be working. Re-move the disc from the changer and play-er and wait until it dries.

CAUTIONCD changers and DVD players use an in-visible laser beam which could causehazardous radiation exposure if di-rected outside the unit. Be sure to oper-ate the changers and players correctly.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

196

CD changer Use only discs marked as shown above.

The following products may not be play-able on your changer.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

Video CDs

DVD player Use only discs marked as shown above.

The following products may not be play-able on your player.

SACDCopy−protected CDCD−ROMDVD−RDVD+RDVD−RWDVD+RWDVD−ROMDVD−RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

197

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer or changer, or it may be impossi-ble to eject the disc.

Correct Wrong

Handle discs carefully, especially whenyou are inserting them. Hold them on theedge and do not bend them. Avoid gettingfingerprints on them, particularly on theshiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or oth-er disc damage could cause the player toskip or to repeat a section of a track. (Tosee a pin hole, hold the disc up to thelight.)

Remove discs from the players when youare not using them. Store them in theirplastic cases away from moisture, heat,and direct sunlight.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

198

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft,lint−free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from the centerto the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry itwith another soft, lint−free cloth. Do not usea conventional record cleaner or anti−staticdevice.

MP3/WMA FILES MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.

The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 andWMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and CD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings compat-ible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 andwith the Romeo and Joliet file system.

When naming an MP3 or WMA file, addthe appropriate file extension (.mp3 or.wma).

The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-back errors, use the appropriate file ex-tensions.

The player can play only the first sessionusing multi−session compatible CDs.

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and Ver. 2.3 for-mats. The unit cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.

The emphasis function is available onlywhen playing MP3/WMA files recorded at32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system canplay MP3 files with sampling frequenciesof 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz. However, theemphasis function is not available for filesrecorded at these frequencies.)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-erally improves with higher bit rates. In or-der to achieve a reasonable level of soundquality, discs recorded with a bit rate of atleast 128 kbps are recommended.

Playable bit ratesMP3 files:MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbpsWMA files:Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

The MP3/WMA player does not play backMP3/WMA files from discs recorder usingpacket write data transfer (UDF format).Discs should be recorded using “pre−mastering” software rather than packet−write software.

M3u playlists are not compatible with theaudio player.

MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO for-mats are not compatible with the audioplayer.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

199

The MP3 player is compatible with VBR(Variable Bit Rate).

When playing back files recorded as VBR(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if fast−forwardor reverse operations are used.

It is not possible to check folders that donot include MP3/WMA files.

MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levelsdeep can be played. However, the start ofplayback may be delayed when usingdiscs containing numerous levels of fol-ders. For this reason, we recommendcreating discs with no more than two lev-els of folders.

It is possible to play up to 192 folders or255 files on one disc.

001.mp3002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3

Folder 2004.wma005.mp3

Folder 3006.mp3

The play order of the compact disc withthe structure shown on the left is as fol-lows:

CD−R and CD−RW discs CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot beplayed.

It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music CD record-er or a personal computer because of disccharacteristics, scratches or dirt on thedisc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit.

It may not be possible to play discs re-corded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and the en-vironment. Record with the correctformat. (For details, contact the appropri-ate application manufacturers of the ap-plications.)

CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged bydirect exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs.

If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, playback will beginmore slowly than with a conventional CDor CD−R disc.

Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot beplayed using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.

VI

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

200

TERMSPacket write—This is a general term that describes the pro-cess of writing data on−demand to CD−R,etc., in the same way that data is written tofloppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—This is a method of embedding track−relatedinformation in an MP3 file. This embedded in-formation can include the track title, the art-ist’s name, the album title, the music genre,the year of production, comments and otherdata. The contents can be freely edited usingsoftware with ID3 tag editing functions. Al-though the tags are restricted to the numberof characters, the information can be viewedwhen the track is played back.

WMA Tag—WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is usedin the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tagscarry information such as track title, artistname.

ISO 9660 format—This is the international standard for the for-matting of CD−ROM folders and files. For theISO 9660 format, there are two levels of regu-lations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character filenames, with a 3 character file extension. Filenames must be composed of one−byte capi-tal letters and numbers. The “_” symbol mayalso be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters(including the separation mark “.” and file ex-tension). Each folder must contain fewer than8 hierarchies.

m3u—Playlists created using “WINAMP” softwarehave a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—MP3 is an audio compression standard deter-mined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO(International Standard Organization). MP3compresses audio data to about 1/10 the sizeof that on conventional discs.

WMA—WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed by Microsoft.It compresses files into a size smaller thanthat of MP3 files. The decoding formats forWMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and 9.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

1

BASIC FUNCTIONSBasic information before operationDisplay operation 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial screen 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch screen operation 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting letters and numbers/list screen operation 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function help 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map screen operation 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Current position display 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen scroll operation 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the screens 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map scale 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot print map 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation of the map 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of navigation system operation 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guiding the route 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering home 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION I

BASIC FUNCTIONS

2

Display operation

Adjustment of the angle of the display can bedone by pushing the “TILT” button. Eachpush of the “TILT” button will tilt the display topositions 1 , 2 , 3 and then back to 0 in thereverse order.

If the ignition switch is set at OFF, the displaywill automatically move back to position 0 .The display will automatically resume the pre-vious position when the ignition switch is setat ACC or ON.

CAUTIONInjury may result from placing a hand orany fingers on the display while it ismoving.

NOTICE

Do not place any foreign objects on thedisplay while it is moving. It could dam-age your navigation system.


Initial screen

When the ignition switch is set at ACC or ON,the initial screen will be displayed and thesystem will begin operating.

CAUTIONWhen the vehicle is stopped with the en-gine running, always apply the parkingbrake for safety.

After a few seconds, the “CAUTION” screenwill be displayed.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

3

Touch “English”, “Français” or “Español”to select a language.

When “I Agree” is touched on the screen,the map screen will be displayed.

The “CAUTION” screen will be displayedwhen the “INFO” button is pushed and “Lan-guage” is touched. Then select a language.(See “Select language” on page 149.)

Maintenance informationThis system informs about when to replacecertain parts or components and shows deal-er information (if registered) on the screen.

When the vehicle reaches a previously setdriving distance or date specified for a sched-uled maintenance check, the “Information”screen will be displayed when the navigationsystem is in operation.

To disable this screen, touch “Do NotDisplay This Message Again.”. Thisscreen goes off if the screen is not oper-ated for several seconds.To prevent this information screen from beingdisplayed again, touch “Do Not Display ThisMessage Again.” .

To register “Maintenance information”, see“Maintenance information” on page 92.

Memo informationThis system notifies about a memo entry. Atthe specified date, the memo information willbe displayed when the navigation system is inoperation. The memo information screen willbe displayed every time the system is turnedon.

The memo of the current date can beviewed by touching “Memo”. (See “ —Editing a memo” on page 98.)

To disable this screen, touch “Do NotDisplay This Message Again.”. Thisscreen goes off if the screen is not oper-ated for several seconds.To prevent this information screen from beingdisplayed again, touch “Do Not Display ThisMessage Again.” .

To register a memo information, see “Calen-dar with memo” on page 95.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

4

Touch screen operationThis system is operated mainly by the touch−screen buttons on the screen.

To prevent damage to the screen, lightlytouch the touch−screen buttons on thescreen with the finger. When a touch−screen button on the screen is touched, abeep sounds.Do not use objects other than the finger totouch the screen.

INFORMATION If the system does not respond to a

touch on a touch−screen button,move the finger away from the screenand then touch it again.

Dimmed touch−screen buttons can-not be operated.

Wipe off fingerprints on the surface ofthe display using a glass cleaningcloth.

The displayed image may becomedarker and moving images may beslightly distorted when the display iscold.

Under extremely cold conditions, themap may not be displayed and thedata input by a user may be deleted.Also, the touch−screen buttons maybe harder than usual to depress.

When you look at the screen throughpolarised material such as polarisedsunglasses, the screen may be darkand hard to see. If so, change theangle of the screen or take off yoursunglasses.

Inputting letters andnumbers/list screen operationWhen searching for an address or a name, orentering a memo, letters and numbers can beinput via the touch screen.

INFORMATIONKey layout can be changed. (See “ In-put key layout” on page 82.)

BASIC FUNCTIONS

5

To input lettersTo display the alphabet keys, touch “A−Z” or

“ ” .

Enter letters by touching the alphabet keys di-rectly.

: Touching this touch−screen buttonerases one letter. By holding thistouch−screen button, letters willcontinue to be erase.

On certain letter entry screens, letters can beentered in upper or lower case.

: To enter in lower case.

: To enter in upper case.

To input numerals and symbolsTo display the number keys and symbol keys,touch “0−9” .

Enter numerals and symbols by touching thenumber keys and symbol keys directly.

: Touching this button erasesone letter. By holding thisbutton, letters will continue tobe erased.

: Touching this button displaysother symbols.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

6

To display the list

To search for an address or a name, touch“List” . Matching items from the database arelisted even if the entered address or name isincomplete.

If the number of matches is four or less, the listis displayed without touching “List” .

INFORMATIONThe number of matching items is shownto the right side of the screen. If thenumber of matching items is more than9,999, the system displays “ ∗∗∗∗” onthe screen.

List screen operationWhen a list is displayed, use the appropriatetouch−screen button to scroll through the list.

To shift to the next or previouspage.

To scroll up or down one item at atime.

This expresses a displayedscreen position.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

7

If appears to the right of theitem name, the complete name istoo long for the display. Touchto scroll to the end of the name.

Touch to scroll to the beginningof the name.

SortingThe order of a list displayed on the screen canbe rearranged.

TYPE A

1. Touch “Sort by”.

2. Select the desired sorting criteria.Sorting criteria are as follows:

“Distance”: To sort in the order of distancefrom your current location.

“Date”: To sort in the order of the date.

“Category”: To sort in the order of the cate-gory.

“Icon”: To sort in the order of the icons.

“Name”: To sort in order by name.

“Attribute”: To sort in order by attribute.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

8

TYPE B

“Dist. Sort”: To sort in the order of distancefrom the current vehicle location. The dis-tance from current vehicle position up to thedestination is displayed to the right of thename.

“Name Sort”: To sort in alphabetical order byname.

Function helpExplanations for the functions of the “Destina-tion”, “Setup”, and “Menu” screens can beviewed.

Touch “?”.

: To view the previous page.

: To view the next page.

: To return to the previous screen.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

9

Map screen operation — — Current position displayWhen starting the navigation system, the cur-rent position is displayed first.

This screen displays the current vehicle posi-tion and a map of the surrounding local area.

The current vehicle position mark ( 1 ) ap-pears in the center or bottom center of themap screen.

A street name will appear on the bottom of thescreen, depending on the scale of the map( 2 ).

You can return to this map screen that showsyour current position at any time from anyscreen by pushing the “MAP/VOICE” button.

While driving, the current vehicle positionmark is fixed on the screen and the mapmoves.

The current position is automatically set asthe vehicle receives signals from the GPS(Global Positioning System). If the currentposition is not correct, it is automatically cor-rected after the vehicle receives signals fromthe GPS.

INFORMATION After battery disconnection, or on a

new vehicle, the current position maynot be correct. As soon as the systemreceives signals from the GPS, thecorrect current position is displayed.

To correct the current position manu-ally, see “ Current position/tirechange calibration” on page 87.

— Screen scroll operation(one−touch scroll)When any point on the map is touched, thatpoint moves to the center of the screen and isshown by the cursor mark ( 1 ).

Use the scroll feature to move the desiredpoint to the center of the screen for looking ata point on the map that is different from thecurrent position of the vehicle.

If the finger is continuously held on thescreen, the map will continue scrolling in thatdirection until the finger is removed.

A street name, city name, etc. of the touchedpoint will be shown, depending on the scaleof the map ( 2 ). Distance from the currentposition to will also be shown ( 3 ).

BASIC FUNCTIONS

10

After the screen is scrolled, the map remainscentered at the selected location until anotherfunction is activated. The current vehicleposition mark will continue to move alongyour actual route and may move off thescreen. When the “MAP/VOICE” button ispushed, the current vehicle position mark re-turns to the center of the screen and the mapmoves as the vehicle proceeds along the des-ignated route.

INFORMATIONWhen the one−touch scroll feature isused, the current vehicle position markmay disappear from the screen. Movethe map with a one−touch scroll again orpush the “MAP/VOICE” button to returnto the current vehicle position map loca-tion display.

To set the cursor position as a destina-tion

A specific point on the map can be set as adestination using the one−touch scroll func-tion.

Touch “Enter ”.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

If there is already a set destination, “Add to” or “Replace ” are displayed.

“Add to ”: To add a destination.

“Replace ”: To delete the existing destina-tions and set a new one.

To register the cursor position as amemory point

Memory point registration enables easy ac-cess to a specific point.

Touch “Mark”.When you touch “Mark” , the following screenappears for a few seconds, and then the mapscreen returns.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

11

The registered point is shown by on themap.

To change the icon or name, etc., see “ —Editing memory points” on page 71.

Up to 106 memory points can be registered.If there is an attempt to register more than106, a message appears for confirmation.

To see information about the iconwhere the cursor is set

To display information about an icon, set thecursor on it.

POI INFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on a POI icon, thename and “Info.” are displayed on the top ofthe screen.

Touch “Info.”.

Information such as the name, address, andphone number are displayed.

If “Enter ” is touched, the position of thecursor is set as a destination.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

12

If there is already a set destination, “Add to” and “Replace ” are displayed.



To register this POI as a memory point, touch“Mark” . (See page 70.)

If is touched, the registered tele-phone number can be called.

INFORMATIONThe desired Point of Interest can be dis-played on the map screen. (See “ — Dis-play POI icons” on page 58.)

MEMORY POINT INFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on a memory pointicon, the name and “Info.” are displayed onthe top of the screen.

Touch “Info.”.


If “Enter ” is touched, the position of thecursor is set as a destination.




To edit a memory point, touch “Edit” . (See “— Editing memory points” on page 71.)

To delete a memory point, touch “Delete” .


BASIC FUNCTIONS

13

DESTINATION INFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on a destination icon,the name and “Info.” are displayed on the topof the screen.

Touch “Info.”.


To delete a destination, touch “Delete” .


— Switching the screensAny one of the screen configurations can beselected.

1. Touch this touch−screen button to dis-play the following screen.

2. To select the desired screen configura-tion, touch one of the following touch−screen buttons.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

14

Depending on the conditions, certain screenconfiguration buttons cannot be selected.

: To display the single map screen.(See page 14.)

: To display the dual map screen. (Seepage 14.)

: To display the compass modescreen. (See page 15.)

: To display the turn list screen. (Seepage 50.)

: To display the arrow screen. (Seepage 50.)

: To display the freeway informationscreen. (See page 48.)

: To display the intersection guidancescreen or the guidance screen on thefreeway. (See page 49.)

Screen configurationsSINGLE MAPThis is a regular map screen.

While on a different screen, touching will display the single map screen.

The screen shows the single map.

DUAL MAPA map can be displayed split in two.

While on a different screen, touching will display the dual map screen.

The screen shows the dual map. The map onthe left is the main map.

The right side map can be edited by touchingany specific point on the right side map.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

15

This screen can perform the following proce-dures:

1. Changing the map scale2. Displaying the POI icon3. Changing the orientation of the map

Touch “OK” when you complete editing.The screen returns to the dual map screen.

COMPASS MODECurrent vehicle position is indicated with acompass, not with a map.

While on a different screen, touching will display the compass mode screen.

Information about the destination and currentposition, as well as a compass, is displayedon the screen.

The destination mark is displayed in the direc-tion of the destination. When driving, refer tothe longitude and latitude coordinates and thecompass, to make sure that your vehicle isheaded in the direction of the destination.

INFORMATIONWhen the vehicle goes out of the discarea, the guidance screen changes intocompass mode.

— Map scale

Touch or to change the scale ofthe map display. The scale bar and indicatorat the bottom of the screen indicates the mapscale menu. The scale range is 150 feet (50m) to 250 miles (400 km).

Touch or until the scale barchanges normally. By continuing to touch thetouch−screen button, the scale bar changessmoothly.

The scale of the map display can be changedby touching the scale bar directly. It is notavailable while driving.

The map scale is displayed under the north−up symbol or heading−up symbol at the topleft of the screen.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

16

INFORMATIONWhen the map scale is at the maximumrange of 250 miles (400 km), is notshown. When the map scale is at theminimum range of 150 feet (50 m), is not shown. However, in the areawhere the foot print map is contained,when the map scale is changed to 150feet (50 m), changes to .

— Foot print mapFor the area which is covered by the foot printmap (Some areas in the following cities; De-troit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you can switch tothe foot print map on a scale of 75 feet (25 m).

To switch to the foot print map

changes into when the map isscaled down to 150 feet (50 m).

To display the foot print map, touch .

To delete the foot print map display, touch.

INFORMATION If the map or the current position is

moved to the area which is not cov-ered by the foot print map, the screenscale automatically changes to 150feet (50 m).

On the foot print map, a one waystreet is displayed by .

It is not possible to perform scrollingon the foot print map (one−touchscroll) while driving.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

17

To display building informationInformation is available only for buildings forwhich information is recorded on the mapdisc.

1. Touch “Info.” while the foot print mapis displayed.If the map is displayed by a split screen, themap turned into a single map display.

2. Using an eight−direction arrow, movethe cursor to the position of the building todisplay building information.3. Touch “Building Info.”.

Details of POIs in some buildings may be dis-played.

For detailed POI information, touch the build-ing name. You can see details of the selectedPOIs.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

18

— Orientation of the map

North−up screen

Heading−up screen

The orientation of the map can be changedfrom north−up to heading−up by touching theorientation symbol at the top left of the screen.

North−up symbol

Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel,North is always up.

Heading−up symbol

The direction of vehicle travel is always up.A red arrow indicates North.

Example of navigation systemoperation — — Guiding the routeGuidance to a destination occurs by specify-ing the destination using the “POI Name”.

1. Push the “DEST” button.

2. Touch “POI Name”.

INFORMATIONThere are 13 dif ferent methods to searchdestinations. (See “Destination search”on page 24.)

BASIC FUNCTIONS

19

3. Enter the name of the destination.Every touch on a letter key narrows the selec-tion.

Letters that cannot be selected in the data-base are dimmed out.

When there are four or fewer database items,these items are displayed in a list.

Even if the entered name is incomplete,touching “List” displays the list.

4. Select the destination from the dis-played list.

5. Touch “Enter”.The system starts route search and displaysrecommended routes.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

20

6. Touch “Guide”.Route guidance starts.

Guidance is done by both the screen andvoice. (See “Route guidance screen” and“Typical voice guidance prompts” on pages48 and 50.)

INFORMATIONIt is possible to change the route. (See“Starting route guidance” on page 43.)

— Registering homeThe home button on the “Destination” screencan be used if your home has been regis-tered. (See “ — Destination search by Home”on page 26.)


2. Touch “My Places”.


4. Touch “Address”.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

21

5. Enter the house number. 6. Enter the street name.Every touch on a letter key narrows the selec-tion.

Letters that cannot be selected in the data-base are dimmed out.

When there are four or fewer database items,these items are displayed in a list.

Even if the entered name is incomplete,touching “List” displays the list.

7. Select the street name from the dis-played list.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

22

8. Touch “Enter”.Registration of home is complete and the“Memory Point” screen is displayed.

Registered “Home” information will bedisplayed.The icon, quick access, name, location, andphone number can be changed. (See “ —Editing memory points” on page 71.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

23

DESTINATION SEARCHDestination searchDestination search 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting the search area 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Home 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Quick access 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address” 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “POI Name” 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “POI Category” 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Emergency” 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Memory” 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Previous” 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Map” 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Intersection” 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Freeway Ent./Exit” 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Coordinates” 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Phone #” 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting route guidance 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION II

DESTINATION SEARCH

24

Destination search —Push the “DEST” button and the “Destina-tion” screen appears.

You can use one of 13 different methods tosearch your destination. (See pages 26through 43.)

INFORMATIONWhen searching the destination, the re-sponse to the touch−screen button maybe slow.

— Selecting the search areaSELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ON THEDESTINATION SCREEN

1. Touch “Change” on the “Destination”screen to display a map of the UnitedStates and Canada divided into 11 areas.(For map database information and updates,see “Map database information and updates”on page 204.)

2. Touch one of “US1” through “CAN” toselect a search area.3. Touch “OK” and the “Destination”screen returns.

DESTINATION SEARCH

25

SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ON THEINPUT SCREENChange the search area in order to set a des-tination from a different area by using “Ad-dress”, “POI Name”, “Freeway Ent./Exit”, or“Intersection”.

1. Touch the search area button like“US9” on the input screen to display amap of the United States and Canada di-vided into 11 areas. (For map database in-formation and updates, see “Map databaseinformation and updates” on page 204.)

2. Touch one of “US1” through “CAN” toselect a search area.3. Touch “OK” and the previous screenreturns.

U.S.A.

Button States included in the search area

“US1”IdahoOregonWashington

“US2”CaliforniaNevada

“US3”

ArizonaColoradoMontanaNew MexicoUtahWyoming

“US4”

IowaKansasMinnesotaMissouriNorth DakotaNebraskaSouth Dakota

“US5”OklahomaTexas

“US6”

IllinoisIndianaKentuckyMichiganOhioWisconsin

DESTINATION SEARCH

26

“US7”

ArkansasAlabamaLouisianaMississippiTennessee

“US8”

ConnecticutMassachusettsMaineNew HampshireNew JerseyNew YorkRhode IslandVermont

“US9”

Washington, D.C.DelawareMarylandNew JerseyPennsylvaniaVirginiaWest Virginia

“US10”

FloridaGeorgiaNorth CarolinaSouth Carolina

Canada

ButtonProvinces and regions included inthe search area

“CAN”All provinces and regions inCanada included in this button.

— Destination search by Home

Touch the home touch−screen button onthe “Destination” screen.The screen changes and displays the maplocation for home and the route preference.(See “Starting route guidance” on page 43.)

To use this function, it is necessary to set“Home” for the memory point. (To register“Home”, see page 75.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts from the current vehicleposition to your home if “Enter” istouched even while driving.

DESTINATION SEARCH

27

— Destination search byQuick access

Touch any of the quick access touch−screen buttons on the “Destination”screen.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the quick access point and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

To use this function, it is necessary to set“Quick access” for each memory point. (Toregister “Quick Access”, see page 73.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts from the current vehicleposition to the quick access point if “En-ter” is touched even while driving.

— Destination search by“Address”There are 2 ways to input a destination by ad-dress.

Touch “Address” on the “Destination”screen.

(a) Inputting a house number and a streetname

1. Touch numerals directly on the screento input a house number.After inputting a house number, touch “OK”to display the screen for inputting a streetname.

It is possible to input a street name first.Touch “Street” to display the screen for in-putting a street name.

DESTINATION SEARCH

28

2. Input the street name. 3. When the desired street name is found,touch the corresponding touch−screenbutton.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

If the same address exists in more than onecity, the current screen changes to the city listscreen.

4. Select or enter the desired city.“Input Name”: To narrow down the listeditems by inputting the city name.

DESTINATION SEARCH

29

If inputting a street name first, the screenchanges. The house number can then be in-put.

If the above screen appears, an addressrange on the screen can be selected.

If the same address exists in more than onecity, the current screen changes to the city listscreen.

(b) Selecting a city to search

Touch “City”.

DESTINATION SEARCH

30

To search by city, the following three methodsare possible.

1. Input the city name2. Select from the nearest 5 cities3. Select from the last 5 cities

INFORMATION To change the search area, touch

“Search Area”.

To cancel the city setting, touch “AnyCity”.

INPUTTING THE CITY NAME1. Touch “Input City Name”.

2. Input a city name.

3. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired city name from the displayed list.“Map”: To display the selected destinationand the route preference. (See “Startingroute guidance” on page 43.)

The current screen changes to the screen forinputting a house number or a street name.(See “(a) Inputting a house number and astreet name” on page 27.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

31

SELECTING FROM THE NEAREST 5CITIES1. Touch “Nearest 5 Cities”.

2. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired city name from the displayed list.The current screen changes to the screen forinputting a house number or a street name.(See “(a) Inputting a house number and astreet name” on page 27.)

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES

Touch the touch−screen button of the de-sired city name.If the navigation has not be used, no cities willbe displayed on the screen.

The current screen changes to the screen forinputting a house number or a street name.(See “(a) Inputting a house number and astreet name” on page 27.)

— Destination search by “POIName”1. Touch “POI Name” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

2. Input the name of the Point of Interest.

DESTINATION SEARCH

32

3. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired destination.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

When inputting the name of a specific Point ofInterest, and there are two or more sites withthe same name, the list screen is displayed.

Touch the touch−screen button of the de-sired destination.If the same name exists in more than one city,a search can be performed more easily with“City” and “Category” . (See “(a) Selectinga city to search” on page 32 and “(b) Select-ing from the categories” on page 34.)

INFORMATIONThe desired Point of Interest can be dis-played on the map screen. (See “ — Dis-play POI icons” on page 58.)

(a) Selecting a city to search

Touch “City”.

DESTINATION SEARCH

33

To search by city, the following three methodsare possible.

1. Input the city name2. Select from the nearest 5 cities3. Select from the last 5 cities

INFORMATION To change the search area, touch

“Search Area”.

To cancel the city setting, touch “AnyCity”.

INPUTTING THE CITY NAME1. Touch “Input City Name”.

2. Input the city name.

3. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired city name from the displayed list.

SELECTING FROM THE NEAREST 5CITIES1. Touch “Nearest 5 Cities”.

2. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired city name.

DESTINATION SEARCH

34

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES

Touch the touch−screen button of the de-sired city name.If the navigation has not be used, no cities willbe displayed on the screen.

(b) Selecting from the categories

Touch “Category”.

If the desired POI category is on the screen,touch the name to display a detailed list of thePOI category.

If the desired POI category is not on thescreen, touch “List All Categories” to list allPOI categories.

When the desired category is touched, thePOI name list screen is displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH

35

— Destination search by “POICategory”The destination can be set by selecting thesearch point and the POI category.

Touch “POI Category” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

Set the search point by the followingmethod:1. Input the city center2. Set the current position as the search

point3. Set the search point via the map screen4. Set the search point from any destination

It is possible to display the names of POIs lo-cated within approximately 20 miles (32 km)from the selected search point.

INPUTTING THE CITY CENTER1. Touch “Input City Center”.

2. Input the city center name.

3. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired city center name.

When an arrow facing the desired point istouched, the map scrolls in that direction. Re-leasing the finger from the arrow will stop thescrolling

4. Touch “Enter”.The search point is set and the “POI Catego-ry” screen will be displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH

36

SETTING THE CURRENT POSITION ASTHE SEARCH POINTTouch “Current Position”.The search point is set at the current position,and the “POI Category” screen will be dis-played.

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT VIA THEMAP SCREEN1. Touch “Map”.



SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROMDESTINATIONS1. Touch the destination buttons at thebottom of the screen.



DESTINATION SEARCH

37

To search POIs near the search pointWhen the search point is set, the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed.

Select the desired POI categories.“List”: If the desired POI categories have al-ready been selected, a list of POI will be dis-played from among the selected categories.

The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.


Select the desired POI categories from thelist and touch “OK”.The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.

“Select Category”: To return to the POIcategory selection screen.

“Show List”: To display the list of POIs in theselected categories.

DESTINATION SEARCH

38

By touching the touch−screen button of thedesired item, the screen changes and dis-plays the map location of the selected des-tination and the route preference. (See“Starting route guidance” on page 43.)

“On Route”: When the indicator is illumi-nated by touching this touch−screen button,the list of the items searched along the routeis displayed.

— Destination search by“Emergency”1. Touching “Emergency” on the “Des-tination” screen.The display changes to a screen to select po-lice stations, dealers, hospitals or fire sta-tions. While driving, only nearby police sta-tions, dealers, hospitals, or fire stations areshown. The current position is shown with anaddress, and the latitude and the longitude atthe top of the screen.

2. Touch the desired emergency catego-ry.The selected emergency category list is dis-played.


INFORMATIONThe navigation system does not guide inareas where route guidance is unavail-able. (See page 203.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

39

— Destination search by“Memory”1. Touch “Memory” on the “Destination”screen.A list of registered memory points is dis-played. (To register or edit memory points,see “My places” on page 69.)

2. Touch the touch−screen button of yourdesired memory point.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

— Destination search by“Previous”1. Touch “Previous” on the “Destination”screen.

The previous starting point and up to 100 pre-viously set destinations are displayed on thescreen.


INFORMATIONThe list of previous destinations can bedeleted while the vehicle is stopped, ifthese destinations are no longer neces-sary. (See “ — Deleting previous points”on page 80.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

40

— Destination search by“Map”Touch “Map” on the “Destination” screen.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation that was previously displayed justbefore the destination input operation and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts if “Enter” is touchedeven while driving. However, the cursorcannot be moved.

— Destination search by“Intersection”1. Touch “Intersection” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

2. Input the name of the two intersectingstreets which are located near the destina-tion to be set.

3. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired item.After inputting the two intersecting streets,the screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

41

If the same two streets cross at more than oneintersection, the screen changes and dis-plays the menu to select the city name wherethe streets intersect. Select the city, and themap location of the selected destination andthe route preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 43.)

— Destination search by“Freeway Ent./Exit”1. To input a freeway entrance or exit,touch “Freeway Ent./Exit” on the “Des-tination” screen.

Be sure to use the complete name of the free-way or highway, including the hyphen, whenentering the destination. Freeways and inter-states use an “I” (I−405). US highways usethe state designation before the number(CA−118).

2. Select the desired freeway by touchingthe touch−screen button.

3. Either a freeway “Entrance” or “Exit”can be selected.

DESTINATION SEARCH

42

4. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired entrance or exit name.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

“Input Name”: An applicable list is displayedby touching this touch−screen button and in-putting the name.

— Destination search by“Coordinates”1. Touch “Coordinates” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

2. Input the latitude and the longitude.3. When the input is finished, touch“OK”.By touching the touch−screen button of thedesired point, the screen changes and dis-plays the map location of the selected des-tination and the route preference. (See“Starting route guidance” on page 43.)

— Destination search by “Phone #”1. Touch “Phone #” on the “Destination”screen.

2. Input a telephone number.3. After inputting a telephone number,touch “OK”.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroad preference. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 43.)

If there is more than one site having the samenumber, the following screen will be dis-played.

DESTINATION SEARCH

43

INFORMATION If there is no match for the telephone

number inputted, a list of identicalnumbers with different area codeswill be displayed.

To set a memory point as a destina-tion using the phone number, thenumber must be registered previous-ly. (See page 75.)

Starting route guidanceAfter inputting the destination, the screenchanges and displays the map location of theselected destination and the route prefer-ence. Registering the destination allows youselect a route.

1. When an arrow facing the desiredpoint is touched, the map scrolls in that di-rection.Releasing the finger from the arrow will stopthe scrolling.

2. Touch “Enter”.The system starts route search and displaysrecommended routes.




“Route Preference”: To change the routepreference. (See page 45.)

“Info.”: If this touch−screen button is dis-played on the top of the screen, touch theswitch to view items such as name, address,and phone number.

DESTINATION SEARCH

44

1 Current position2 Destination point3 Type of the route and the distance4 Distance of the entire route

3. To start guidance, touch “Guide”.“3 Routes”: To select the desired route fromthree possible routes. (See page 46.)

“Route”: To change the route. (See pages53 and 55.)

INFORMATION Guidance can be suspended or re-

sumed. (See “Suspending and re-suming guidance” on page 66.)

If “Guide” is touched until a beepsounds, Demo mode will start. Pushthe “MAP/VOICE” button to finishDemo mode.

The route for returning may not be thesame as that for going.

The route guidance to the destinationmay not be the shortest route nor aroute without traffic congestion.

Route guidance may not be availableif there is no road data for the speci-fied location.

When setting the destination on amap with a scale larger than 0.5 miles(800 m), the map scale changes to 0.5miles (800 m) automatically. Set thedestination again.

If a destination is entered, the roadnearest to the point you selected isset as the destination.

CAUTIONBe sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind whiledriving. If a traffic sign on the roadhas been changed, the route guidancemay provide incorrect information.

DESTINATION SEARCH

45

To change the route before startingguidance

ROUTE PREFERENCE

1. You can change route preference bytouching “Route Preference”.

2. Select desired route preferences bytouching each button on/off.When searching for a route, the system willavoid routes for preferences that are deselec-ted.

3. After choosing the desired route pref-erence, touch “OK”.

INFORMATION Even if the “Allow Freeway” indicator

is dimmed, the route cannot avoid in-cluding a freeway in some cases.

If the calculated route includes a tripby ferry, the route guidance shows asea route. After you travel by ferry,the current vehicle position may beincorrect. Upon reception of GPS sig-nals, it is automatically corrected.

DESTINATION SEARCH

46

3 ROUTES SELECTION

1. To select the desired route from threeroutes, touch “3 Routes”.

2. Touch “Quick1”, “Quick2” or “Short”to select the desired route.“Quick1”: Recommended route. This route is indicated by an orange line.

“Quick2”: Alternative route.This route is indicated by a purple line.

“Short”: A route by which you can reach thedestination in the shortest distance.This route is indicated by a green line.

“Info.”: To display the following informationabout each of the 3 routes.

1 Time necessary for the entire trip2 Distance of the entire trip3 Toll road4 Freeway5 Ferry

ii

Important information aboutthis manualFor safety reasons, this manual indicatesitems requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

CAUTIONThis is a warning against anythingwhich may cause injury to people if thewarning is ignored. You are informedabout what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury toyourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anythingwhich may cause damage to the ve-hicle or its equipment if the warning isignored. You are informed about whatyou must or must not do in order toavoid or reduce the risk of damage toyour vehicle and its equipment.

INFORMATIONThis provides additional information.

Safety Instruction

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.

This system is intended to assist in reachingthe destination and, if used properly, can doso. The driver is solely responsible for thesafe operation of your vehicle and the safetyof your passengers.

Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and preventssafe driving. The first priority while drivingshould always be the safe operation of thevehicle. While driving, be sure to observe alltraffic regulations.

Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly familiarwith it. Read the entire Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to make sure you under-stand the system. Do not allow other peopleto use this system until they have read andunderstood the instructions in this manual.

For your safety, some functions may becomeinoperable when driving. Unavailabletouch−screen buttons are dimmed. Onlywhen the vehicle is not moving, can the des-tination and route selection be done.

iii

CAUTION For safety, the driver should not

operate the navigation system whilehe/she is driving. Insufficientattention to the road and traffic maycause an accident.

While you are driving, be sure toobey the traffic regulations andmaintain awareness of the roadconditions. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, routeguidance may provide wronginformation such as the direction ofa one way street.

While driving, listen to the voice instructionsas much as possible and glance at thescreen briefly and only when it is safe. How-ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.Use it just for reference. If the system cannotdetermine the current vehicle position cor-rectly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late,or non−voice guidance.

The data in the system may occasionally beincomplete. Road conditions, including driv-ing restrictions (no left turns, street closures,etc.) frequently change. Therefore, beforefollowing any instruction from the system,look to see whether the instruction can bedone safely and legally.

This system cannot warn about such thingsas the safety of an area, condition of streets,and availability of emergency services. If un-sure about the safety of an area, do not driveinto it. Under no circumstances is thissystem a substitute for the driver’s per-sonal judgement.

Use this system only in locations where it islegal to do so. Some states/provinces mayhave laws prohibiting the use of video andnavigation screens next to the driver.

i

Introduction

Thank you for your purchase of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manua lin your vehicle at all times.

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellitesignals from the Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and other vehiclesensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination.

The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting location to your destination. The system is also designedto direct you to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may notbe the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculatedroutes.

The navigation system’s database includes about 75 Point of Interest categories to allow you to easily select destinations such as restaurantsand banks. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guideyou there. The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remainingand the direction to turn in approaching a fork or intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are timedto provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.

Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly.The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on the satellite condition, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circu mstan-ces. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 202 through 204.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

91

OTHER FUNCTIONSOther functions Maintenance informationon 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance information setting 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dealer setting 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calendar with memo 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a memo 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a memo 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memo list 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hands−free system 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speech command system 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help screen 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen adjustment 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen setting 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beep setting 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select language 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V

SECTION V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

92

Maintenance information —— Maintenance informationsettingWhen the Navigation System is turned on, the“Information” screen displays when it is timeto replace a part or certain components. (Seepage 3.)

1. Push the “INFO” button.

2. Touch “Maintenance”.


For details of each touch−screen button, see“INFORMATION ITEMS” on page 92.

“Delete All”: To cancel all conditions whichhave been inputted.

“Reset All”: To reset the item which has sat-isfied a condition.

“Set Dealer”: To register or edit dealer infor-mation. (See “ — Dealer setting” on page93.)

If “ON” is selected, the system gives mainte-nance information with the “Information”screen when the system is turned on. (Seepage 3.)

If “OFF” is selected, the “Information” screenis disabled.

When the vehicle needs to be serviced, thetouch−screen button color will change toorange.

INFORMATION ITEMS

“ENGINE OIL”: Replace engine oil

“OIL FILTER”: Replace engine oil filter

“ROTATION”: Rotate tires

“TIRES”: Replace tires

“BATTERY”: Replace battery

“BRAKE PAD”: Replace brake linings

“WIPERS”: Replace wiper blades

“LLC”: Replace engine coolant

“BRAKE OIL”: Replace brake fluid

“ATF”: Replace ATF

“SERVICE”: Scheduled maintenance

“AIR FILTER”: Replace air filter

“PERSONAL”: New information items canbe created separately from provided ones

OTHER FUNCTIONS

93

4. Input the conditions.Notice of “Date”: The next maintenancedate can be input.

Notice of “Distance”: The driving distanceuntil the next maintenance check can be in-put.

“Delete”: To cancel the date and distanceconditions.

“Reset”: To reset the date and distance con-ditions.

5. Touch “OK”.The screen then returns to the “Maintenance”screen.

INFORMATION For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

Depending on driving or road condi-tions, the actual date and distancemay differ from the stored date anddistance in the system.

— Dealer settingIt is possible to register a dealer in the system.With dealer information registered, routeguidance to the dealer is available.

1. Touch “Set Dealer” on the “Mainte-nance” screen.

2. If the dealer has not been registered,enter the location of the dealer in the sameway as for a destination search. (See “Des-tination search” on page 24.)

When “Set Dealer” registration is finished, the“Edit Dealer” screen will be displayed.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

94


“Dealer”: To enter the name of a dealer. (Seepage 94.)

“Contact”: To enter the name of a dealermember. (See page 94.)

“Location”: To set a location. (See page94.)

“Phone #”: To set a telephone number. (Seepage 95.)

“Delete Dealer”: To delete the dealer infor-mation displayed on the screen.

“Enter ”: To set the displayed dealer as adestination. (See “Starting route guidance”on page 43.)

To edit “Dealer” or “Contact”

1. Touch “Dealer” or “Contact” on the“Edit Dealer” screen.

2. Enter the name using the alphanumerickeys.


3. Touch “OK”.


To edit “Location”

1. Touch “Location” on the “Edit Dealer”screen.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−screen bu tton to move the cursor to thedesired point on the map.3. Touch “Enter”.


OTHER FUNCTIONS

95

To edit “Phone #” (telephone number)

1. Touch “Phone #” on the “Edit Dealer”screen.

2. Enter the number using numeral keys.3. Touch “OK”.


Calendar with memo —It is possible to enter memos for particulardates on the calendar. The system informsyou of the memo entry when the system isturned on. (See page 3.) Memos can also beused for route guidance if the memo has beenregistered with location information.

1. Push the “INFO” button.

2. Touch “Calendar”.

On this screen, the current date is highlightedin yellow.

or : To change month.

or : To change year.

“Today”: To display the current month calen-dar (if another month will be displayed).

“List”: To display the list of registered me-mos. (See “ — Memo list” on page 98.)

Touching a date button on the “Calendar”screen displays the “Memo” screen.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

96

Memos can be edited by touching the list but-ton. (See “ — Editing a memo” on page 98.)

“Add Memo”: To add a memo. (See “ — Add-ing a memo” on page 96.)

“Mark ”: To change the color of the markdisplayed next to the date. To default themark color, touch “Delete” on the “Mark col-or” screen.

“Date ”: To change the color of the date. Todefault the date color, touch “Delete” on the“Date color” screen.

“Prev. Day”: To go to the “Memo” screen ofthe previous date.

“Today”: To go to the “Memo” screen for thecurrent day.

“Next Day”: To go to the “Memo” screen ofthe next date.

— Adding a memoIf a memo is added, the system informs of thememo entry when the system is started on thememo date. (See page 3.)

1. Touch the date you want to add a memoon the “Calendar” screen.

2. Touch “Add Memo”.

Up to 100 memos can be added.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

97

3. Touch “Memo”. 4. Enter text using the keys.Up to 24 letters can be entered.

After entering the text, touch “OK” at the bot-tom right of the screen.

5. When registering information on thememo, touch “Location”.

A screen similar to the destination searchscreen appears. Search the same way assearching a destination. (See “Destinationsearch” on page 24.)

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

98

— Editing a memoThe registered memo can be edited.

1. Touch the day you want to edit a memoon the “Calendar” screen.

2. Touch the memo to be edited.

3. Touch the item to be edited.“Memo”: To edit a memo. (See “ — Addinga memo” on page 96.)

“Location”: To change a registered location.(See “ — Adding a memo” on page 96.)

“Enter ”: To set the registered location asa destination. (See “Starting route guidance”on page 43.)

“Delete”: To delete the memo.

— Memo listIt is possible to display a memo list by settinga condition.

1. Touch “List” on the “Calendar” screen.

2. Touch the desired search condition tolist the memos.

“This W eek”: To display the list of memos forthe current week.

“This Month”: To display the list of memosfor the current month.

“Future”: To display a list of future memos.

“Past”: To display the list of past memos.

“All”: To display the list of all memos.

“Period”: To display the list of memos for aspecified period. (See page 99.)

OTHER FUNCTIONS

99

3. To delete and/or edit the memo, touchthe desired memo button.

“Delete All”: To delete all the displayed me-mos.

A message will be displayed.

4. To delete, touch “Yes”. To cancel thedeletion, touch “No”.

To display memos for a specified peri-od of time

1. Touch “Period” on the “Memo Search”screen.

2. Enter the period using the numeralkeys.The period from January 1, 2005 through De-cember 31, 2024 can be set for searching.

3. After setting the period, touch “OK”.

The “Memo List” screen will be displayed.

Hands−free systemHands−free system allows you to make orreceive a call without taking your handsoff the steering wheel by connecting yourcellular phone.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetoothis a wireless data system by which you cancall without your cellular phone being con-nected with a cable or placed on a cradle.

If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth, this system can not function.

CAUTIONWhile you are driving, do not use a cel-lular phone or connect the Bluetooth phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone in thecar. The temperature indoor may behigh and damage the phone.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

100

INFORMATIONIn the following conditions, the systemmay not function.

The cellular phone is turned OFF.

The current position is outside thecommunication area.

The cellular phone is not connected.

The cellular phone has a low battery.

By pushing the telephone switch above,you can receive a call or hang up withouttaking your hands off the steering wheel.

Microphone

You can use the microphone above whentalking on the phone.The other party’s voice outputs from the driv-er’s speaker. When the received calls or re-ceived voice outputs, the audio from the Au-dio system or voice guidance from theNavigation system will be muted.

INFORMATION Talk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If you talk at the same time,the voice may not reach each other. (Itis not a malfunction.)

Keep the volume of receiving voicedown. Ot herwise, echo is coming up.When you talk on the phone, speakclearly towards the microphone.

In the following situations, your voicemay not reach the other party.

Driving on unpaved road. (Toomuch road noise.)

Driving at high speed.

Windows are open.

If air−conditioning vents are turnedtowards the microphone.

The sound of the air−conditioningfan is loud.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

101

1 Indicates the condition of Bluetooth connection.

“Blue” indicates an excellent connection toBluetooth.

“Yellow” indicates a bad connection toBluetooth, resulting in possible deteriorationof voice quality.

: no connection to Bluetooth.2 Indicates the amount of battery

charge left.

Empty FullIt is not displayed while the Bluetooth is con-necting or the phone book data is being trans-ferred.

The amount left does not always correspondwith the one of your cellular phone. This sys-tem doesn’t have a charging function.

3 Indicates the receiving area.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in Roam-ing area.

“Hm” is displayed when receiving in Homearea.4 Indicates the level of reception.

Too bad Excellent

The level of reception does not always corre-spond with the one of your cellular phone.

INFORMATIONThis system supports the following ser-vice. HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth phone, and take OPP service individual-ly.

An antenna for the Bluetooth connectionis built in the display. The indication of theBluetooth connection may turn yellowand the system may not function whenyou use the Bluetooth phone in the fol-lowing conditions and places.

Your cellular phone is hiding behind thedisplay (behind the seat or in the glove boxand console box).

Your cellular phone touches or is coveredwith metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth phone on the placewhere “Blue” indication is displayed.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

102

When you sell your car:

A lot of personal data is registered whenyou use the Hands−free system. Whenyou sell your car, initialize the system soyour personal information is no longer re-corded. (See “(d) D elete personal data” onpage 148.)If you initialize it, the former state will nevercome back again. Be careful when initializingdata, because once the data is initialized itcan not be recovered.

You can initialize the following data in the sys-tem.

Phone book data

Dialed numbers and received calls

Speed dial

Bluetooth phone data

Security code

FCC ID: HYQDNNS016IC ID: 1551A−DNNS016MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the equipment.

NOTE: This equipment has been testedand found to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to part 15of the FCC Rules. These limits are de-signed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference in a residen-tial installation. This equipment gener-ates, uses and can radiate radio frequen-cy energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, maycause harmful interference to radio com-munications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occur in aparticular installation. If this equipmentdoes cause harmful interference to radioor television reception, which can be de-termined by turning the equipment offand on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more ofthe following measures:−Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.−Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.−Connect the equipment into an outlet ona circuit different from that to which the re-ceiver is connected.−Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

103

CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCC radi-ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCC ra-dio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelinesin Supplement C to OET65. This equip-ment has very low levels of RF energythat it deemed to comply without maxi-mum permissive exposure evaluation(MPE). But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20 cmand more between the radiator and per-son’s body (excluding extremities:hands, wrists, feet and legs).

Co−location: This transmitter must notbe co−located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.

(a) Enter a Bluetooth phoneTo use the hands−free system, you needto enter your phone into the system. Onceyou have registered it, you can make ahands−free call.

1. Push the “INFO” button to display the“Information” screen.

2. Touch “Telephone” to display “Tele-phone” screen.

You can also push the switch of the steer-ing wheel to display this screen when the ve-hicle is stopped.

3. Touch “Settings” to display “Settings”screen.

4. Touch “Bluetooth ∗” to display the“Bluetooth ∗ Settings” screen. ∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

104

5. Touch “Register” to connect your cel-lular phone to the system.

6. When this screen is displayed, inputthe Passkey displayed on the screen intothe phone.

For the operation of the phone, see the manu-al that comes with your cellular phone.

If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel” .

7. When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.

You will not need to reenter the passkey whenthis phone is used in the future.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

Connecting a Bluetooth phone

(i) Automatically

When you register your phone, auto con-nection will be turned on. Always set it tothis mode and leave the Bluetooth phonein a condition where connection can beestablished.

Each time you touch “Auto Connect” , autoconnection will be switched on or off.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

105

When the ignition switch is set at ACC orON, the selected Bluetooth phone will beautomatically connected and the connec-tion result is displayed.

This screen appears when the Bluetoothphone is first connected after the ignitionswitch is set at ACC or ON.

(ii) Manually

When the auto connection fails or isturned off, you have to connectBluetooth manually.

Touch “Connect” after enabling theBluetooth connection on the phone.

When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed.

Now you can use the Bluetooth phone.

Reconnecting the Bluetooth phone

If the Bluetooth phone is disconnectedwith a poor reception from the Bluetooth network when the ignition switch is set atACC or ON, the system automatically re-connects the Bluetooth phone. In thiscase, the connection result is not dis-played.

If the Bluetooth is disconnected on purposesuch as you turned your cellular phone OFF,this does not happen. Reconnect it by the fol-lowing methods.

Select the Bluetooth phone again.

Enter the Bluetooth phone.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

106

(b) Call on the Bluetooth phoneAfter you enter the Bluetooth phone, youcan call by using hands−free system. Youcan call using the 7 methods describedbelow.

(i) By dial

You can call by inputting the telephonenumber.

This cannot be operated while driving.

Touch the desired key to input the tele-phone number.Each time you touch , an inputted digit is de-leted.

When you touch , the number you calledlast is inputted.

Touch or push the switch of the steer-ing wheel.

(ii) By phone book

You can call by phone book data which istransferred from your cellular phone.

The system has one phone book. You canregister up to 1000 numbers.This cannot be operated while driving.

Touch the desired key to input the tele-phone number.

1. Touch “Phone Book” to display“Phone Book” screen.

2. Select the desired number from the list.


OTHER FUNCTIONS

107

(iii) By dialed numbers

You can call by dialed number. The sys-tem memorizes up to 5 dialed numbers. Ifit is more than 5, the oldest number is de-leted.


1. Touch “Call Log” to display “OutgoingCalls” screen.

When you call by phone book, the name(if registered) is displayed.

When you call the same numbercontinuously, only the newest number isregistered.



(iv) By received calls

You can call by received calls. When a callis received, the system memorizes up to 5numbers. If it is more than 5, the oldestnumber is deleted.This cannot be operated while driving.

1. Touch “Call Log” to display “OutgoingCall” screen.

2. Touch “Incoming Calls” to display “In-coming Calls” screen.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

108

When a telephone number registered inthe phone book is received, the name andthe number are displayed.

Received calls which you did not answerare also memorized in the system and“Abs.” is displayed on the left side of thenumber.

Unnoticed telephone number such as apublic telephone is not memorized in thesystem.



An international phone call may not bemade depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.

(v) By speed dial

You can call by registered telephone num-ber which you selected from a phonebook, dialed numbers and received calls.(See page 114 for registering the speeddial.)

1. Touch “Speed Dial” to display “SpeedDial” screen.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

109

2. Touch the desired number to call. Youcan change the page by touching “SpeedDial 2” or “Speed Dial 3”.When you push the telephone button whiledriving, the screen above appears. Touch thedesired name to call. (The telephone numberis not displayed.)

(vi) By voice recognition

You can call by giving a command. (For theoperation and command of voice recogni-tion, see “Speech command system” onpage 142 and “Help screen” on page 144.)

Dialing by name

You can call by giving a voice tag regis-tered in the phone book. For setting thevoice recognition, see “Setting the voicerecognition” on page 126.

Example: Call Charlize

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

110

You: Push the talk switch.

System: “After the beep, please say thename.”

You: “Charlize.”

System: “Charlize chosen, when ready,please briefly push the talk switchor push the off−hook switch todial.”


System: “After the beep, please say “Dial”.”

You: “Dial.”

System: “Dialing the name.”

Now you are calling Charlize.

“Next” is displayed when multiple entries arefound for a searched name.

Up to 6 entries can be displayed including thefirst searched one.

Do the following to change the entry to thenext one.

Touch “Next”

Push the talk switch to say “Next Candi-date”.

Calling without the voice recognition

After the entry number is displayed, you canalso call by pushing the telephone switch ortouching “Dial”.

Cancelling the voice recognition

The voice recognition will be cancelledwhen you do the following.

Keep on pushing the talk switch

Push the switch of the steering wheel.

Touch “Cancel”. (Except for recognizingthe command)

Say “Cancel”

OTHER FUNCTIONS

111

Dialing by phone number

You can call by giving a desired number.


System: “After the beep, please say thenumber.”

You: “812387”

System: “When ready, please briefly pushthe talk switch or push theoff−hook switch to dial.”


System: “After the beep, please continue toadd numbers or say “Dial”.”

You: “Dial.”

System: “Dialing the number.”

Now you are calling 812387.

Sending a tone

You can send a tone by giving a desirednumber.


System: “Say numbers, pound, or star.”

You: “1234.”

System: “1234.” “Push the talk switch.”


System: “Send? Say Yes or No.”

You: “Yes.”

System: “Sending.”

Now you are sending the tone.

(vii) By POI call

You can call by touching when it isdisplayed on the screen from Navigationsystem. (See page 11 for details.)

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

112

(c) Receive on the Bluetooth phone

When a call is received, this screen is dis-played with a sound. Touch or push

the switch of the steering wheel to talkon the phone.

To hang up the phone:Touch or push the switch of thesteering wheel again.

To refuse to receive the call:Touch and hold it.

To adjust the volume of received call:Touch “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.

On the international phone call, the otherparty’s name may not be displayed correctlydepending on the cellular phone which youhave.

(d) Talk on the Bluetooth phone

While you are talking on the phone, thisscreen is displayed. You can do the opera-tion below on the screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’svoice:Touch “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.

To hang up the phone:Touch or push the switch of thesteering wheel.

To mute your voice:Touch “Mute” .

To input a Key:Touch “0−9” .

To transfer the callTouch “Transfer Call” .

You cannot change from Hands−free call tocellular phone call while driving.

When you change from cellular phone call toHands−free call, the Hands−free screen willbe displayed and you can operate it on thescreen.

Transferring method and behavior are differ-ent depending on the cellular phone whichyou have.

For the operation of the phone, see the manu-al that comes with your cellular phone.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

113

Touch the desired number to input the key.



If the continuous tone signal is registeredin a phone book, this screen appears. (Ifnot registered, “Send” and “Exit” are notdisplayed.)

Confirm the number displayed on thescreen and touch “Send”. The number be-fore marked sign will be sent.

When you touch “Exit” , this function will befinished and normal tone screen appears.


The continuous tone signal is the marked sign(p or w) and the number following telephonenumber. (ex. 056133p0123w#1)

You can do this operation when you want tooperate an answering machine or use a tele-phone service in bank for example. You canregister the phone number and the code num-ber in the phone book.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

114

Sending a tone by the speed tone

You can send a tone by the speed tone.(For registering the speed tone, see “Reg-istering the speed tone” on page 117.)

1. Touch “Speed Tone”.

2. Touch the desired switch to send atone.

(e) Change the settings of theBluetooth phone

Touch “Settings” to display “Settings”screen.

You can change the settings of the phone.

(i) Registering the speed dial

You can register the desired telephonenumber from phone book, dialed numbersand received calls. Up to 17 speed dialnumbers can be registered.

The 6th entry is the speed dial for redialing.

1. Touch “Speed Dial” to display the“Speed Dial Settings” screen.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

115

2. Touch “Register” of “Speed Dial”.

3. Select the data you want to register.

4. Touch the desired telephone number.

5. Touch the touch−screen button youwant to register in.

The latest dialed number is registered in the6th item (speed redial).

6. If you select a touch−screen button youregistered before, this screen is dis-played.Touch “Yes” if you want to overwrite it.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

116

Deleting the speed dial individually

You can delete “01” − “17” of the speeddial individually.

If you delete them all at once, all of 17 num-bers are deleted.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Speed Dial”.


3. Touch “Yes”.

Deleting all of the speed dial

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Speed Dial”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

117

(ii) Registering the speed tone

You can register the desired tone number.Up to 6 speed tone numbers can be regis-tered.

1. Touch “Register” of “Speed Tone”.

2. Use the software keyboard to input thename.

3. Input the number and touch “OK”.

4. Touch the desired touch−screen but-ton you want to register in.

5. If you select a touch−screen button youregister before, this screen is displayed.Touch “Yes” if you want to overwrite it.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

118

Editing the speed tone.

You can edit the speed tone.

1. Touch “Edit” of “Speed Tone”.

2. Touch the touch−screen button youwant to edit.



OTHER FUNCTIONS

119

Deleting the speed tone individually.

You can delete “1” to “6” of the speedtone.

If you delete them all at once, all of 6 numbersare deleted.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Speed Tone”.


3. Touch “Yes”.

Deleting all the speed tone

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Speed Tone”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

120

(iii) Setting the volume

1. Touch “Volume” to display the “Vol-ume Settings” screen.

2. Touch “−” or “+” to adjust the “VoiceVolume” or “Ring Volume”.Voice Volume Adjusting the other party’s. .

voice.

Ring Volume Adjusting the ring volume.. . .

Automatic volume settings for highspeed

You can set the volume one step up whenthe speed is over 80 km/h. (When it is un-der 70 km/h, previous volume is back.)

Each time you touch “Adaptive VolumeControl” , you can switch on or off.

Initializing the settings

You can initialize the settings.

Touch “Default”.

Touch “Yes”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

121

(iv) Setting the screen

1. Touch “Screen” to display the “ScreenSettings” screen.

2. Do the detail settings of the screen andtouch “OK”.

Receiving Call Display

You can select the method of the receivingcall display.

Touch “Full” or “Icon”.Full mode When a call is received, the. . . . .

Hands−free screen isdisplayed and you canoperate it on the screen.

Icon mode The message is displayed. . . . . on the upper side of thescreen. You can onlyoperate the steeringswitch.

Auto answer

When a call is received, the display auto-matically changes to the talking screenand you can start to talk on the phone(without touching any switch) after thepreset time.

Touch “ON” of “Auto Answer” and “−” or“+” to adjust the waiting time of auto an-swer within 1 − 60 seconds.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

122

The Bluetooth connection status atstartup

When the ignition switch is set at ACC orON and the Bluetooth is automaticallyconnected, the connection check is dis-played.

Touch “ ON” or “OFF” of “Show Bluetooth ∗

connection status at start up”.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Initializing the settings


Touch “Default”.

Touch “Yes”.

(v) Setting the phone book

You can register phone numbers in thephone book.

Touch “Phone Book” to display the“Phone Book Management” screen.

You can do the detail settings of phonebook.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

123

Transferring a telephone number

You can transfer the telephone numbers inyour Bluetooth phone to the system. Upto 1000 person’s data (up to 2 numbers aperson) can be registered in the phonebook.

Transfer it while the engine is running.

1. Touch “Transfer Data” to display “Se-lect Group” screen.

2. Select the group you want to transferto.

3. Touch “Overwrite” or “Add TO”.

4. Transfer the phone book data to thesystem using the Bluetooth phone.

This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel it, touch “Cancel” . If the transferringis interrupted on the way, the phone book datatransferred until then can be memorized in thesystem.

5. When this screen is displayed, thetransfer is completed.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

124

When this screen is displayed, try thetransfer operation again.

Registering the phone book data

You can register the phone book data.

1. Touch “Register” of “Phone Book”.

2. Touch the desired touch−screen but-ton to edit the phone book.

3. When you complete the edit, touch“OK”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

125

Editing the name

When you don’t input the name, the num-ber is displayed.

1. Touch “Name”.


Editing the phone number

You can register the phone number in“TEL1” and “TEL 2” separately. Up to 2numbers a person can be registered.

1. Touch “TEL 1” or “TEL 2”.


3. Select the desired icon.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

126

Selecting the group

You can set a group for a contact (for ex-ample: “Family”, “Friends”, “Office”...). Itwill then be easier for you to find this con-tact when needed, by using the group dis-play.

You can select “No group” or “Group 01”to “Group 19”.

“No group” is displayed if you don’t set thegroup.

1. Touch “Group”.

2. Select the desired group.

Setting the voice recognition

You can set the voice recognition. Up to 20numbers can be registered for the voicerecognition.

1. Touch “Voice Rec.”.

2. Select the phone number and touch“REC” to record a voicetag.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

127

3. Touch “PLAY” to play the voicetag.If you want to delete it, touch “Delete” and“OK” .

Adding the data to the phone book

You can add data to the phone book.

1. Touch “Add to”.

2. Select the data you want to add log datato.

3. Confirm the added data on the screenand touch “OK”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

128

Editing the data

You can edit the registered data.


2. Select the data you want to edit.


When you edit the data, touch “OK” .

When you also touch “Edit” on thisscreen, you can edit it.

Deleting the data

You can delete the data.

When you release your car, delete all yourdata on the system.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Phone Book”.


OTHER FUNCTIONS

129

3. Touch “Yes”.You can also delete it in the following way.

1. Touch “Phone Book”.

2. Select the desired data.


4. Touch “Yes”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

130

Deleting all the phone data

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Phone Book”.

2. Select the deleting method.Group Data Deleting all the phone. . . . . . . .

data in group.

All Contact Data Deleting all the phone. . . data.

3. When you select “Group Data”, the“Select Group” screen is displayed.

4. Select the desired group.

5. Touch “Yes”.

You can also delete it in the following way.

1. Touch “Phone Book”.

2. Touch “Delete All”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

131

3. Touch “Yes”.

Registering a group name

You can register 20 groups. “No Group”,“Group 01” − “Group 19” is registered bydefault.

You can change “Group 01” − “Group 19”into desired names.

1. Touch “Register” of “Group Name”.

2. Select the group you want to register.

3. When you complete all the edit, touch“OK”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

132

Selecting a group icon

1. Touch “Icon”.

2. Select the desired icon.

Editing a group name

1. Touch “Name”.


Deleting a group name

You can delete the group names individu-ally or all at once. If you delete a groupname, that group will return to the defaultsetting. (excluding “No Group”)

1. Touch “Delete” of “Group Name”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

133

2. Select the group you want to delete thename of.

3. Touch “Yes”.

Deleting all the group name

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Group Name”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

Deleting the log data

You can delete the log data individually orall at once.

When you release your car, delete all thedata on the system.(a) Individually

1. Touch “Delete” on the “Log Data”screen.

2. Touch “Yes”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

134

(b) All at once

1. Touch “Delete All” on the “OutgoingCalls” or “Incoming Calls” screen.

2. Touch “Yes”.

(vi) Setting the security

When you set the security, you can pre-vent people from using some functions ofthe Hands−free system. It is useful whenyou leave your car with the hotel or youdon’t want others to see the data you reg-istered.When you set or unlock the security, you haveto input the security code. Be sure to changethe default code when you use the security forthe first time.

Changing the security code

The security code is 4 digits and the de-fault is “0000”.

Change a new code that is hard for otherpeople to know.

When you change the security code, don’t for-get the code. The dealers cannot unlock thesecurity when you forget it.

If you forget the security code, initialize yourpersonal data. When you initialize it, not onlythe phonebook data but also the memorypoints in the navigation system, etc. will bedeleted. (See “ Initializing the security code”on page 136.)

1. Touch “Phone Book Lock”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

135

2. Touch “Change”.

3. Input the current code.

Each time you touch , an inputted digit is de-leted.

4. Input a new code.

5. Touch “Yes”.

Phone Book Lock

When you set the phone book lock, youcan have the following functions locked.

Display of the phone book screen andtransferring, registering, editing, deletingthe phone book data.

Display of speed dial screen, registering,deleting the speed dial and speed dialing.

Display of the other party’s name for callsbeing received or made.

Display of dialed numbers screen andreceived calls screen, deleting dialednumbers and received numbers.

Display of phone information screen.

Changing the security code.

When you set this function, the speed dialscreen is not displayed while you are driving.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

136

1. Touch “ON”.

2. Input the security code and touch“OK”.

Initializing the security code


1. Touch “Default”.

2. Input the security code and touch“OK”.

3. Touch “Yes”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

137

(f) Set a Bluetooth phone Selecting a Bluetooth phone

In case you register more than oneBluetooth phone, you need to choose afavorite one.

1. Touch “Settings” to display “Settings”screen.

2. Touch “Select Telephone” to display“Select Telephone” screen. You can se-lect the Bluetooth phone from a maxi-mum of 6 numbers.“Empty” is displayed when you have not reg-istered a Bluetooth phone yet.

Bluetooth mark is displayed when youchoose the phone.

Although you can register up to 6 Bluetoothphones in the system, only one Bluetoothphone can function at a time.

3. Touch “OK”.

When the result message is displayed, youcan use the Bluetooth phone.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

138

When another Bluetooth phone is trying toconnect, this screen is displayed.

Touch “Yes” or “No”.

Displaying Bluetooth information

You can see or set the information of theBluetooth phone on the system.

Device Name The name of Bluetooth. . . . phone which is dis-played on the screen.You can change it into adesired name.

Bluetooth∗ Device AddressThe address peculiar to. . . . . . . . . . . . . the system. You cannotchange it.

1. Select the desired phone and touch“Information”.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.


3. When you complete the setting, touch

.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

139

Changing a Device Name

You can change a Device Name. If youchange a Device Name, the name regis-tered in your cellular phone is notchanged.


2. Use the software keyboard to input theDevice name.

Changing the Bluetooth settings

You can change the display and settings ofBluetooth information on the system.

The information displays the following items.

Device Name The name in the. . . . Bluetooth network. Youcan change it.

Passkey The password when you. . . . . . . . . register your cellularphone in the system. Youcan change it into the fig-ure of 4−8 digits.

Bluetooth∗ Device AddressThe address peculiar to. . . . . . . . . . . . . the system. You can notchange it. If you haveregistered twoBluetooth phones withthe same Device Nameor Passkey and youcannot distinguish onefrom the other, refer to it.

When you change the Device Name orPasskey, do the followings.

1. Touch “Bluetooth ∗”.

2. Touch “Change” of “Device Name” or“Passkey”.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

140

3. Use the software keyboard to input theDevice Name.

You can input up to 20 characters.

4. Input a Passkey with 4 − 8 digits.

When you touch , the inputted number isdeleted.

5. When you complete the setting, touch

.

Initializing the Bluetooth settings.


1. Touch “Default”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

141

Deleting a Bluetooth phone

1. Touch “Delete” of “Bluetooth ∗ Tele-phone”.

2. Select the telephone you want to deleteand touch “OK”.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

3. Touch “Yes”.

Displaying the information of theBluetooth phone you delete

You can display the information of theBluetooth phone before you delete it andyou can make sure whether the telephoneyou delete is correct or not.

1. Select the telephone you want to dis-play the information about.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

142

2. When you complete confirming it,

touch .

Speech command systemThe speech command system enablesyou to operate the navigation system bygiving a command.

1. Push the talk switch.

A beep sounds and on screen message isdisplayed with an indicator at the top left.

2. Say a command while the indicator isshown on the display.

If you want to check the command list,touch “Help” to display the help screen.(See “Help screen” on page 144.) Whenyou touch “Cancel”, the previous screenreturns.

If the navigation system does not respond orthe confirmation screen does not disappear,please push the talk switch and try again.

If no command is given, a beep sounds andthe indicator disappears 6 seconds later.

If the system does not recognize yourspeech, the system will respond with thismessage (“System does not recognize thiscommand, please rephrase your com-mand.”). Start the operation from the begin-ning.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

143

Microphone

It is unnecessary to speak directly into themicrophone when giving a command.

Speech command example: Searching fora route to your home.1. Push the talk switch.

2. Say “Home” .

You can also say the street name or address.(ex. say “Woodridge Avenue”.)

If your home is not registered, you will hear“Home is not registered”.

3. If the system recognized the command,the recognition result “Home” is dis-played on the top of the screen with thescreen message. (Displayed messageand the switches on the screen depend onthe situation.)

Touch or say “Cancel”, and the system will becanceled. Touch or say “Help”, and displaysthe “Help” screen.

4. Touch “Enter” or say “Enter destina-tion” , and the system starts searching fora route to your home. (If the destination isalready registered, “Add” or “Replace” isdisplayed on the screen.)Touch or say “Cancel”, and the search will becanceled.

When you search the destination by “POIName”, this screen is displayed.

Touch “Enter” or say “Enter destination”.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

144

When you touch “Show List” , you cansearch another spot in its category.

INFORMATIONIn the following conditions, the systemmay not recognize the command proper-ly.

The command is not correct or clear.

There are background noises such aswind noise, etc.

Help screenThis system has a function which displaysthe voice recognition help screen. Youcan see the command list and operatingguide on it.

(a) Command List

1. Touch the “Command List” tab on theupper side of the screen and the touch−screen buttons on the right side of thescreen to select the desired category.2. You can scroll through the list of thecommand list by touching “ ” or “ ”.

Touch “OK” after you check it.

(b) Operating Guide

1. Touch the “Operating Guide” tab onthe upper side of the screen and thetouch−screen buttons on the right side ofthe screen to select the desired category.

2. You can scroll through the list of the op-erating guide by touching “ ” or “ ”.

Touch “OK” after you check it.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

145

Screen adjustmentThe brightness or contrast of the screencan be adjusted depending on the bright-ness of your surroundings. You can alsoturn the display off.

To display the “Display” screen, push the“DISPLAY” button.

Contrast and brightness adjustment“Contrast” “+”:Strengthens the contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “−”:Weakens the contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”:Brightens the screen.

“Brightness” “−”:Darkens the screen.

After adjusting the screen, touch “OK”.

If your vehicle is equipped with the rear seatentertainment system, the rear screen turnson or off when “Rear” is touched.

The screen goes off when “Screen Off” istouched. To turn the display screen back on,push any button such as “INFO” , etc. The se-lected screen appears.

INFORMATIONWhen you do not touch any touch−screen button on the “Display” screenfor 20 seconds, the previous screen willbe displayed.

Color and tone adjustment (with rear seatentertainment system)

You can adjust the color and the tone whilethe DVD video and video CD are beingplayed.

“Color” “R”:Strengthens the red color of the screen.

“Color” “G”:Strengthens the green color of the screen.

“Tone” “+”: Strengthens the tone of thescreen.

“Tone” “−”: Weakens the tone of the screen.

After adjusting the screen, touch “OK”.

The rear screen turns on or off when “Rear”is touched.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

146

The screen turns off when “Screen Off” istouched. To turn the screen back on, pushany button such as “INFO” , etc. The selectedscreen appears.

INFORMATIONWhen you do not touch any touch−screen button on the “Display” screenfor 20 seconds, the previous screen willbe displayed.

Depending on the position of the headlightswitch, the screen changes to either daymode or night mode.To display the screen in the day mode evenwith the headlight switch on, touch “DayMode” on the adjustment screen for bright-ness and contrast control.

If the screen is set in the day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this condition ismemorized in the system even with the en-gine turned off.

Screen setting1. Push the “INFO” button to display the“Information” screen.

2. Touch “Screen Setting”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

147

(a) Automatic transitionYou can select a function that enables au-tomatic return to the navigation screenfrom the audio screen.

Select “ON” or “OFF” and then touch“OK”.

“ON”: The navigation screen automaticallyreturns from the audio screen 20seconds after the end of audio op-eration.

“OFF”: The audio screen remains on.

(b) Switch colorYou can select a color of touch−screenbuttons.

Select “Green” or “Orange” and thentouch “OK”.

(c) Rear system lock (with rear seat entertainmentsystem)If the vehicle is equipped with the rear seatentertainment system, the rear seat enter-tainment system can be locked to preventrear passengers from operating the enter-tainment system.

Select “ON” or “OFF” and then touch“OK”.“ON”: The rear passengers cannot operatethe rear seat entertainment system. Onlyfront passengers can operate the system.

“OFF”: Both the front and rear passengerscan operate the rear seat entertainment sys-tem.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

148

(d) Delete personal dataThe following personal data can be de-leted or returned to their default settings:

Maintenance conditions

Maintenance information “off” setting Memory points

Areas to avoid

Previous points Route trace

User selection settings

Phone book data Dialed numbers and received calls

Speed dial

Bluetooth phone data Security code

This function is available only when thevehicle is not moving.

1. Touch “Delete personal data”. The“Delete personal data” screen appears.

2. Touch “Delete”. The “Confirmation todelete all personal data” screen appears.

3. Touch “Yes”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

149

Beep settingYou can turn the beep sound off.

Touch “Beep Off”. “Beep Off” is high-lighted. To set the beep sound on, touch“Beep Off” again.

Select languageThe language of the touch−screen but-tons, pop−up messages and the voiceguidance can be changed.1. Push the “INFO” button.

2. Touch “Language”.

3. Touch “English”, “Français” or “Es-pañol” to select a language.

4. Touch “I Agree”.

The language is changed and the screen re-turns to the map display.

V

OTHER FUNCTIONS

150

iv

1 North−up or heading−up symbolThis symbol indicates a map view withnorth−up or heading−up. Touching this sym-bol changes the map orientation. 18. . . . . . 2 Scale indicator

This figure indicates the map scale. 15. . . 3 “INFO” button

Push this button to display the “Information”screen. 3, 92, 95, 103, 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Zoom out touch−screen button

Touch this touch−screen button to reducethe map scale. 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 “Mark”

Touch this touch−screen button to registerthe current position or the cursor position asa memory point. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 “Route”

Touch this touch−screen button to changethe route. 53, 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 “Map View”

Touch this touch−screen button to browseinformation about guidance route, to set thePoints of Interest to be displayed on thescreen, or to record the route.

58, 61, 62, 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

— Quick reference

v

8 “DISPLAY” button

Push this button to display the “Display”screen. 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 “OFF”

Touch this touch−screen button to obtain abroader view. Some of the buttons on thescreen are not displayed. They are dis-played again by touching “ON” .

84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Zoom in touch−screen buttonTouch this touch−screen button to magnifythe map scale. 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Foot print map touch−screen button

Touch this touch−screen button to displaythe foot print map and the building informa-tion. 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 “MAP/VOICE” button

Push this button to repeat a voice guidance,cancel one touch scroll, start guidance, anddisplay the current position. 9, 10, 52. . . . 13 “DEST” button

Push this button to display the “Destination”screen. vi, 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Screen configuration touch−screen

buttonTouch this touch−screen button to changethe screen mode. 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 “MENU” button

Push this button to display the “Menu”screen. viii, 66, 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Distance and time to destination

Displays the distance, the estimated traveltime to the destination, and the estimated ar-rival time at the destination. 52. . . . . . . . . . 17 “GPS” mark (Global Positioning

System)

Whenever your vehicle is receiving signalsfrom the GPS, this mark is displayed.

202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Speech command system indicator

This indicator is shown by pushing thespeech command switch. The speech com-mand system can be operated while this in-dicator is shown. 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi

1 “Address”A house number and the street address canbe input by using the input keys. 27. . . . . . 2 “POI Name”

Select one of the many POIs (Points of Inter-est) that have already been stored in the sys-tem’s database. 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 “POI Category”

A destination can be selected from the POIcategory. 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 “Previous”

A destination can be selected from any of thelast 100 previously set destinations and fromthe previous starting point. 39. . . . . . . . . . . 5 “Memory”

The location can be selected from the regis-tered “Memory points”. (To register memorypoints, see “ — Registering memory points”on page 70.) 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 “Emergency”

One of the four categories of emergency ser-vice points that are already stored in the sys-tem’s database can be selected. 38. . . . . .

— “Destination” screen

vii

7 “Map”

A destination can be selected simply bytouching the location on the displayed map.

40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 “Intersection”

The names of two intersecting streets can beentered. This is helpful if only the general vi-cinity, not the specific address, is known.

40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 “Freeway Ent./Exit”

The name of a freeway (interstate) entranceor exit can be entered. 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 “?”

Function help for the “Destination” screencan be viewed on this screen. 8. . . . . . . . . 11 “Change”

To change the search area, touch thistouch−screen button. 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Quick access touch−screen buttons

One of 5 preset destinations can be selectedby touching the screen directly. To use thisfunction, it is necessary to set the “Quick ac-cess” for each memory point. (To register a“Quick Access”, see “ — Editing memorypoints” on page 71.) 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Home touch−screen button

A personal home address can be selectedwithout entering the address each time. Touse this function, it is necessary to set“Home” for the memory point. (To register“Home”, see “ — Registering home” on page75.) 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 “Phone #”

A destination can be entered by the tele-phone number. 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 “Coordinates”

A destination can be set by using latitudeand longitude as coordinates. 42. . . . . . . .

viii

1 “Resume Guidance”Resumes guidance 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 “Suspend Guidance”

Suspends guidance. 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 “Volume”

Sets the volume for voice guidance.67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 “?”

Function help for the “Menu” screen can beviewed on this screen. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 “Map DVD”

Displays information regarding the disc ver-sion or covered area. 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 “Select User”

Up to 3 different settings for different userscan be memorized. 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 “Setup”

Enables various settings for the navigationsystem. ix, 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 “My Places”

Enables changes to “Memory points”,“Home” and “Areas to avoid”. Enables dele-tion of the previous point. 69. . . . . . . . . . . .

— “Menu” screen

ix

1 “Distance”The distance units “km” or “miles” can beselected. 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 “Estimated Travel Time”

The system to display the travel time and thearrival time to the destination on the routeguidance screen can be set. 81. . . . . . . . . 3 “Keyboard Layout”

Key layout can be changed. 82. . . . . . . . . . 4 “Time Zone”

The desired time zone can be selected.83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 “ Function”

The choice whether to display each touch−screen button and current street name onthe map screen can be set. 84. . . . . . . . . . 6 “Display POI Icons”

A selection of 6 icons displayed on the “Dis-play POI Icons” top screen is possible.

84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 “Display Building Shapes”

Selection of either ON or OFF to display thebuilding shape on the map screen is pos-sible. 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

— “Setup” screen

x

8 “Traffic Restrict. Notification”

Notification of seasonal restrictions can beselected. 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 “Voice Recognition Guidance”

Voice recognition guidance can be set.86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 “Voice Guidance in All Modes”

Voice guidance can be set in all modes.86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 “Auto Voice Guidance”

Automatic voice guidance can be set.86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 “Pop−up Message”Selection of either ON or OFF to display thepop−up message is possible. 87. . . . . . . . . 13 “Calibration”Adjustment of the current vehicle positionmark can be done manually, or mis−calcula-tion by changing tire will be adjusted.

87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 “Default”This touch−screen button initializes all of thesettings. 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 “?”

Function help for the “Setup” screen can beviewed. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROUTE GUIDANCE

47

ROUTE GUIDANCERoute guidanceRoute guidance screen 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical voice guidance prompts 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance and time to destination 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting and deleting destination 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding destinations 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering destinations 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting destination 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting route 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search condition 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detour setting 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preference 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting route from adjacent road 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Map view 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display POI icons 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route overview 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preview 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION III

ROUTE GUIDANCE

48

Route guidance screenDuring route guidance, various types of guid-ance screens can be displayed depending onconditions.

Screen layout

1 Distance to the next turn and the ar-row indicating turning direction

2 Current street name3 Distance and travel/arrival time to the

destination4 Current position5 Guidance route

INFORMATION If the vehicle goes off the guidance

route, the route is searched again.

For some areas, the roads have notbeen completely digitized in our data-base. For this reason, the route guid-ance may select road that should notbe traveled on.

During freeway drivingDuring freeway driving, the freeway informa-tion screen will be displayed.

This screen displays the distance to the nextjunction and exit, or POIs in the vicinity of thefreeway exit.

1 Current position2 Points of Interest that are close to a

freeway exit.3 Exit number and junction name4 Distance from the current position to

the exit or junction5 Current street name

: To display the selected map of the exitvicinity.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

49

: To scroll for farther junctions or exits.

: To scroll for closer junctions or exits.

: To scroll for the closest three junctionsor exits.

When approaching a freeway exit orjunction

When the vehicle approaches an entrance,exit, or junction, the guidance screen for thefreeway will be displayed.

1 Road/area name2 Distance from the current position to

the exit or junction3 Current position

“OFF”: The guidance screen on freeway dis-appears and the map screen appears.

When touching or pushing the “MAP/VOICE” button, the guidance screen on free-way reappears.

When approaching an intersectionWhen the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, the intersection guidance screen will bedisplayed.

1 Next street name2 Distance to the intersection3 Current position

“OFF”: The intersection guidance screendisappears and the map screen appears.

When touching or pushing the “MAP/VOICE” button, the intersection guidancescreen reappears.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

50

Other screensTURN LIST SCREENOn this screen, the list of turns on the guid-ance route can be viewed.

Touching during guidance displays theturn list.

1 Next street name or destination name2 Turn direction3 Distance to the next turn4 Current street name

ARROW SCREENOn this screen, information about next turnson the guidance route can be viewed.

Touching during guidance displays thearrow screen.

1 Exit number, street name containingnumber or next street name

2 Turn direction3 Distance to the next turn4 Current street name

Typical voice guidancepromptsThe voice guidance provides various mes-sages as you approach an intersection, orother point where you need to maneuver thevehicle.

4.7 miles

0.25 miles+α

1 “Proceed about 5 miles.”

2 “In a quarter of a mile, right turn.”

3 “Right turn.”

4 (Beep sound only)

ROUTE GUIDANCE

51

INFORMATIONOn freeways, interstates or other high-ways with higher speed limits, the voiceguidance will be made at earlier pointsthan on city streets in order to allow timeto maneuver.

4.2 miles

0.25 miles

1 “Proceed about 4 miles to the traf-fic circle.”

2 “In a quarter of a mile, traffic circleahead, and then 3rd exit ahead.”

3 “The 3rd exit ahead.”

4 “The exit ahead.”

5 (Beep sound only)

One−way road

One−way road

∗: The system indicates a U−turn if the dis-tance between two one−way roads (of oppo-site directions) is less than 50 feet (15 m) inresidential areas or 164 feet (50 m) in non−residential areas.

1 “In half of a mile, make a legal U−turn.”

2 “Make a legal U−turn ahead.”

3 (Beep sound only)

ROUTE GUIDANCE

52

The system announces the approach to the fi-nal destination.

1 “Your destination is ahead.”

2 “You have arrived at your destina-tion. The route guidance is nowfinished.”

INFORMATION If the system cannot determine the

current vehicle position correctly (incases of poor GPS signal reception),the voice guidance may be made ear-ly or delayed.

If you did not hear the voice guidancecommand, push the “MAP/VOICE”button to hear it again.

To adjust the voice guidance volume,see “Volume” on page 67.

Distance and time todestination

When the vehicle is on the guidance route,the distance and the estimated travel/arrivaltime to the destination are displayed. Whenthe vehicle is not on the guidance route, thedistance and the direction of the destinationare displayed.

When driving on the guidance route and morethan one destination is set, the distance andthe estimated travel/arrival time from the cur-rent position to each destination are dis-played.

1. Touch this touch−screen button to dis-play the following screen.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

53

2. Touch the number button to displaythe desired destination.The distance, the estimated travel time andthe estimated arrival time from the currentposition to the selected destination are dis-played.

Estimated travel time is displayed.

Estimated arrival time is dis-played.

To switch to estimated arrivaltime.

To switch to estimated travel time.

Displayed while driving off theguidance route. The destinationdirection is indicated by an arrow.

INFORMATIONWhen the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured along theroute is displayed. Travel time and arriv-al time is calculated based on the set ve-hicle speed information. (See page 81.)However, when the vehicle is not on theguidance route, the distance is the lineardistance between the current positionand the destination.

Setting and deletingdestination —— Adding destinationsAdding destinations and searching again forthe routes can be done.

1. Touch “Route”.

2. Touch “Add”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

54

3. Input an additional destination in thesame way as the destination search. (See“Destination search” on page 24.)

4. Touch the desired “Add” to determinethe arrival order of the additional destina-tion.

— Reordering destinationsWhen more than one destination is set, youcan change the arrival order of the destina-tions.


2. Touch “Reorder”.

3. Select the destination in the order ofarrival by touching the destination button.Reordered number of arrival is displayed onthe right side of the screen.

Touching “Undo” will cancel each selectedorder number from the previously input num-ber.

4. After selecting the destinations, touch“OK”.The system searches for the guidance routeagain, and displays the entire route. Even if“OK” is not touched, the entire route is dis-played automatically within a few secondswhen the order is fixed.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

55

— Deleting destinationsA set destination can be deleted.


2. Touch “Delete”.When more than one destination is set, a listwill be displayed on the screen.

3. Touch the destination for deletion.“Delete All”: To delete all destinations on thelist.

A message appears to confirm the request todelete.

4. To delete the destination(s), touch“Yes”.If “Yes” is touching, the data cannot be recov-ered.

If “No” is touching, the previous screen willreturn.

5. If more than one destination is set,touch “OK” after deleting the destination-s.The system searches for the guidance routeagain, and displays the entire route.

Setting route —— Search conditionYou can designate the route conditions of theroute to the destination.


2. Touch “Search Condition”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

56

3. Touch “Quick”, “Quick1”, “Quick2” or“Short” and touch “OK”.

The entire route from the starting point to thedestination is displayed.

“Guide”: To start guidance.

“Route”: To change a route. (See pages 53and 55.)

— Detour settingWhile the route guidance is operating, youcan change the route to detour around a sec-tion of the route where a delay is caused byroad repairs, or an accident, etc.


2. Touch “Detour”.

3. Select the touch−screen button belowto select the desired detour distance.“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles(km)”: Touch one of these touch−screen but-tons to start the detour process. After detour-ing, the system returns to the original guid-ance route.

“Whole Route”: By touching this touch−screen button, the system will calculate anentire new route to the destination.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

57

This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delay causedby a traffic jam.1 This position indicates the location of a

traffic jam caused by road repairs or anaccident.

2 This route indicates the detour sug-gested by the system.

INFORMATION When your vehicle is on a freeway, the

detour distance selections are 5, 15,and 25 miles (km).

The system may not be able to calcu-late a detour route depending on theselected distance and surroundingroad conditions.

— Route preferenceA number of choices are provided on the con-ditions which the system uses to determinethe route to the destination.


2. Touch “Route Preference” to changethe conditions which are to determine theroute to the destination.

3. Select desired route preferences bytouching each button on/off.When searching for a route, the system willavoid routes for preferences that are deselec-ted.

4. After choosing the conditions, touch“OK”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

58

— Starting route fromadjacent roadYou can start the route guidance from the ad-jacent road.

(ex. When route guidance is set on the free-way, but the vehicle is driven parallel alongthe freeway.)


2. Touch “Start from Adjacent Road”.When there is no adjacent road, this buttonwill not be displayed.

Map view —— Display POI iconsPoints of Interest such as gas stations andrestaurants can be displayed on the mapscreen. You can also set their location as adestination and use them for route guidance.

1. Touch “Map View”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

59

2. Touch “Display POI Icon” to display aparticular type of Point of Interest on thescreen.

A screen with a limited choice of Points of In-terest will be displayed. (To change the dis-played POI, see page 84.)

Selecting POIs to be displayedUp to 5 categories of icons can be displayedon the screen.

Touch the desired Point of Interest catego-ry to display POI location symbols on themap screen.By selecting the desired POI category andthen touching “OK” , the selected POI iconsare displayed on the map screen.

To turn off the Points of Interest icon on themap screen, touch “Delete” .

“Other POIs”: If the desired Point of Interestcan not be found on the limited choice screen,touch this button. The screen then displaysthe complete POI listing screen.

“Local POI List”: When searching for thenearest Point of Interest, touch this touch−screen button. The system will list the pointswithin 20 miles (32 km). (See page 60.)

Touch “Other POIs” on the “Display POIIcons” screen.When a Point of Interest category is selectedfrom either the limited list or the complete list,the screen will display symbols at those loca-tions on the map screen.

Select the desired POI categories.The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.

By selecting the desired POI category andthen touching “OK” , the selected POI iconsare displayed on the map screen.


ROUTE GUIDANCE

60

Select the desired POI categories from thelist.The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.

By selecting the desired POI category andthen touching “OK” , the selected POI iconsare displayed on the map screen.

To return to the POI category selectionscreen, touch “More” .

To display the local POI listPoints of Interest that are within 20 miles (32km) of the current position will be listed fromamong the selected categories.

1. Touch “Local POI List” on the “DisplayPOI icons” screen.

2. Touch the touch−screen button of thedesired Point of Interest.The selected Points of Interest are displayedon the map screen.

“On Route”: When the indicator is illumi-nated by touching this touch−screen button,the list of the items searched along the routeis displayed

ROUTE GUIDANCE

61

To set a POI as a destinationYou can select one of the Points of Interesticons on the map screen as a destination anduse it for route guidance.

1. Directly touch the Point of Interest iconthat you want to set as a destination.The map will shift so that the icon is centeredon the screen and overlaps with the cursor

. At this time, the distance from the currentposition is displayed on the screen. The dis-tance shown is measured as a straight linefrom the current vehicle position to the POI.

2. When the desired Point of Interestoverlaps with the cursor, touch “Enter ”.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and routepreference. (See “Starting route guidance”on page 43.)

— Route overview


2. Touch “Route Overview”.

The entire route from the current position tothe destination is displayed.

“Guide”: To start guidance.

“Route”: To change the route. (See pages53 and 55.)

“Turn List”: The following screen displaysthe list of the roads up to the destination.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

62

You can scroll through the list of roads by

touching or . However, not all roadnames in the route may appear on the list. Ifa road changes its name without requiring aturn (such as on a street that runs through twoor more cities), the name change will not ap-pear on the list. The street name closest tothe starting point will be displayed with themileage to the next turn.

These marks indicate thedirection in which you should turnat an intersection.

Touch “Map” on the “Turn List” screen.The point which you choose is displayed onthe map screen.

— Route preview


2. Touch “Route Preview”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

63

: To indicate the next destination.

: To preview the route to the next des-tination.

: To preview the route to the next des-tination in fast−forward mode.

: To stop the preview.

: To review the route to the previousdestination or starting point.

: To review the route to the previousdestination or starting point in fast−forward mode.

: To indicate the previous destinationor starting point.

— Route traceIt is possible to store the traveled route up to124 miles (200 km) and retrace the route onthe display.

INFORMATIONThis feature is available on the map withmore detailed map scale than 30 mile (50km).

Touch “Map View”.

“Record”: To start recording the route trace.

“Stop”: To stop recording the route trace.

If you touch “Stop” to display the followingscreen.

Touching “Yes” stops recording and theroute trace remains displayed on the screen.

Touching “No” stops recording and the routetrace is erased.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

64

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)


You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

07 SIENNA_U (L/O 0 612)


Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for SIENNA may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material

Distribution Center. To purchase the repair

manual, please contact your Toyota dealer orcall the Material Distribution Center toll−free

at 1−800−622−2033.

2007 toyota sienna owners manual

Documents